API-546 Synchronous-Machines

STD-API/PETRO STD
54b-ENGL
L777
m
0732270 05b743L bTO
m
Brushless Synchronous
Machines-500 kVA and Larger
API STANDARD 546
SECOND EDITION, JUNE1997
American
Petroleum
Institute
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R OS T DS q b - E N G L
1797 W O732290 0 5 b 7 4 3 2 537 W
Brushless Synchronous Machines500 kVA and Larger
Manufacturing, Distribution and Marketing Department
API STANDARD 546
SECOND EDITION, JUNE 1997
American
Petroleum
Institute
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO STD
5Yb-ENGL
1777
m 0732270
05b71.133 Y73
m
SPECIAL NOTES
All rights reserved No p a n of this work may be reproduced, storedin a retrievalsystem, or
transmitted by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording,or otherwise,
without prior written permission
from the pubLisheK Contact the Publishec
MI Publishing Services, 1220 L Street, N. W ,Washington, D.C. 20005.
Copyright Q 1997 American Petroleum Institute
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
API publications necessarily address problems
of a general nature. With respect to particular circumstances, local,state, and federal laws and regulations should be reviewed.
A P I is not undertaking to meet the duties of employers, manufacturers, or suppliers to
warn and properly train andequip their employees, andothers exposed, concerning health
and safety risks and precautions, nor undertaking their obligations under local, state, or
federal laws.
Information concerning safety and health risks and proper precautions with respect
to particular materials and conditions should
be obtained from the employer, the manufacturer or
or the material safety data sheet.
supplier of that material,
Nothing contained in any A P I publication is to be construed as granting any right, by
implication or otherwise, for the manufacture, sale, or useany
of method, apparatus, or product covered by letters patent. Neither should anything contained in the publication be construed as insuring anyone against liability for infringement of letters patent.
Generally,API standards are reviewed and revised, reaffirmed,
or withdrawn at least every
five years. Sometimes a one-time extension of up to two years will be added to this review
cycle. This publication will no longer bein effect five years after its publication dateas an
operative API standard or, where an extension has been granted, upon republication. Status
API Authoring Department [telephone (202)
of the publication can be ascertained from the
682-8000]. A catalog of API publications and materials is published annually and updated
quarterly by API, 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington, D.C.20005.
This document was produced underM I standardization proceduresthat ensure appropriate notification and participation in the developmental process and is designated as an API
standard. Questions Concerning the interpretation of the content of this standard or comments and questions concerning the procedures under which this standard was developed
should be directed in writing to the directorof the Authoring Department (shown
on the title
page of this document), American Petroleum Institute, 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington,
D.C.20005. Requestsfor permission to reproduce or translate all
or any part of the material
published herein shouldalso be addressed to the director.
API standards are publishedto facilitate the broad availability of proven, sound engineering and operating practices. These standards are not intended
to obviate theneed for applyingsoundengineeringjudgmentregardingwhenandwherethesestandardsshouldbe
utilized. The formulation and publication of API standards is not intended in any way to
inhibit anyone from using any other practices.
Any manufacturer marking equipment or materials in conformance with the marking
requirements of an A P I standard is solely responsible for complying with all the applicable
requirements of that standard. APIdoes not represent, warrant, or guarantee that
such prodA P I standard.
ucts do in fact conform to the applicable
S T D = A P I / P E T R O STD 54b-ENLL L997 m 0732270 0 5 b 7 4 3 43 0 T
W
FOREWORD
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
M I publications may be used
by anyone desiring to doso. Every effort has been made
by
the Instituteto assure the accuracy and reliability of data
the contained in them; however, the
Institute makes no representation, warranty, or guarantee
in connection with this publication
and hereby expressly disclaims any liability or responsibility for loss or damage resulting
from its use or for the violation of any federal, state, or municipal regulation with which this
publication may conflict.
be submitted to the directorof the ManufacturSuggested revisions are invited and should
ing, Distribution and Marketing Department, American Petroleum Institute, 1220 L Street,
N.W.,Washington, D.C. 20005.
iii
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO
S T D 5qb-ENGL L777 I0732290 05b743524b
m
CONTENTS
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Page
1 GENERAL ..........................................................
1.1 Scope ...........................................................
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
AlternativeDesigns ................................................
Corresponding and ConflictingRequirements ...........................
CoordinationResponsibility ......................................... 1
DefinitionofTerms ................................................
2
ReferencedPublications ............................................
3
2 BASICDESIGN ....................................................
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
General..........................................................
Electrical Design ..................................................
Insulation Systems.................................................
MechanicalDesign ................................................
3 ACCESSORIES ....................................................
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
1
1
1
1
TerminalBoxes ..................................................
WindingTemperatureDetectors .....................................
BearingTemperatureDetectors ......................................
SpaceHeaters ...................................................
ScreensandFilters ................................................
Alarms and Control Devices for Machine Protection ....................
GroundConnectors ...............................................
VibrationDetectors ...............................................
4 INSPECTION.=STING.ANDPREPARATION
FORSHIPMENT ...................................................
5
5
6
8
8
24
24
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
General .........................................................
Inspection.......................................................
FinalTesting ....................................................
Preparation for Shipment ..........................................
27
27
27
29
35
5 GUARANTEEANDWARRANTY .................................
36
6 VENDOR’SDATA .................................................
6.1 Proposals .......................................................
6.2 ContractData ....................................................
36
36
38
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DATA SHEETS
. . . . . . . . . . 41
SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR DATA SHEETS. . . 53
PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINATIONOF
RESIDUAL UNBALANCE........................... 65
APPENDIXDVENDORDRAWINGANDDATA
REQUIREMENTS ................................... 73
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX C
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
~~
~
S T D * A P I / P E T R O S T D 5Vb-ENGL L777 S 0732270 05b7V3b L82 W
page
APPENDIX ESYNCHRONOUSMOTORDATASHEET
GUIDE ...............................................
APPENDIX F SYNCHRONOUSGENERATORDATA
SHEET GUIDE.......................................
79
95
Figures
Shaft Vibration Limits(Relative to Bearing Housing Using Noncontact
Vibration Probes): For all Hydrodynamic Sleeve Bearing Machines;
With the Machine Securely Fastenedto a Massive Foundation............. 30
2 Bearing Housing Radial and Axial Vibration Limits: For Sleeve
and Antifriction Bearing Machines; With
the Machine Securely
Fastened to a Massive Foundation
.................................... 31
C- 1 Sensitivity Check Work Sheet .......................................
66
C-2 Sensitivity Check Work Sheet .......................................
67
68
C-3 Residual Unbalance Work Sheet .....................................
69
C-3 Residual Unbalance Work Sheet (Continued) ...........................
C 4 Sample Calculations for Residual Unbalance ...........................
70
C-4 Sample Calculationsfor Residual Unbalance (Continued) ................. 71
1
Tables
1
2
3
4
5
dex
Voltage
Ratings ...................................................
6
Starting Capabilities ................................................
7
Machine Enclosures andCorresponding NEMA or E C Specifications ....... 9
MaximumSeventy of Defects in Castings .............................
28
DC Test Voltages for Insulation Resistance and Determination of
.................................................
Polarization
31
vi
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO
S T D 5Vb-ENGL
L777 I0732270 05b7437 019 I
Brushless Synchronous Machines-500 kVA and Larger
SECTION 1-GENERAL
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Scope
1.1
1.1.1 Thisstandardcoverstheminimumrequirementsfor
specified
1.1.2
machine
is theWhen
aspurpose
special
on
the Purchaser’s Synchronous Machine Data Sheets (Appendix A), theparagraphsthat are markedwith squarebullets).(
form-wound and bar-wound
paragraph
apply.
also
shall
Where
a
includes both a round
and
in Petroleum
standard includes
square
bullet,
that
pxagraph apply
shall
when
h e machine
is
purpose, or when indicated on thedata
synchronousmotorsandgeneratorswithtwodifferent
rotor
specified as
sheets
designs:
machinethe
if
specified
been
has not
puras special
a.Theconventional salient-polerotorwithsolid or laminated
poles.
b. Thecylindrical rotor withsolid or laminatedconstruction.
Pose in the Purchase Order.
Note 1: A round bullet (@) at the beginning of a paraamph indicates that
either a decision is required or further information is to be provided by the
purchaser. This informationshould be indicatedonthe data sheets (see
Appendix A); otherwise it shouldbe stated in the quotation requestor in the
order.
ingful as an aid to procurement, the purchaser must complete
the data sheets in Appendix or
A B. [ESP]
1.1.3 Thisstandardrequiresthepurchaser
to specifycertain detailsand
In order for this standard to be mean-
1.2 AlternativeDesigns
Note 2: A square bullet (W) at the beginning of the paragraph indicates additional requirementsfor special-purpose machines. Special-purpose machines
are: motors that drivehigh-inema loads, vertical machines that support highthrust loads, part of o complete vain requiring vibration sensitivity criteria,
operate in abnormally hostile environments, or are critical unspared equip
ment.
The vendor may offer alternative designs (see 6.1.10 for
proposal requirements). Equivalents such as metric dimensions, fasteners, and flanges may be substituted as mutually
[ESP]
agreed upon by the purchaser and the vendor.
Note 3: This standard may be applied
to adjustable speed motors with apprcpriate attention to the specific requirements of such applications.For adjustable speed applications, proper selection the
of motor and drive is required
to
avoid the following conditions:
1.3 CorrespondingandConflicting
Requirements
1.3.1 ms documentrecognizes two different systems of
a. Motor rms current exceeding the continuous sinusoidal nameplate rat-
ing due to excessive voltageharmonics or improper voltshertz levels.
standards for themanufacturingandtestingofelectrical
b. Excessive winding temperature due toinsufficient cooling, excessive
torque levels, improper
voltslhem
levels
and
increased
losses
due
harto
machines: the North American
IEEE, and NEMA
~standards; and the International IEC and IS0 standards. The
monics.
c. Insufficientmotor accelerating torque atreduced speeds due to insuffiNorthAmericanStandardsarethebasedocuments.When
cient voh/hertz levels or limitations in the drive’smomentary current
specified by the purchaser,thecorresponding International
capacity and excitation system.
Standards are acceptable for useas alternatives; however, this
d. Increasedsoundlevels
due to increased fan speed, excitation of
mustnot be construed that they are identical
to the North
mechanicalresonances,and/or magnetic noisecaused by supplysource
harmonics.
systemAmerican
which of
Standards.
selectionThe
of stane. Mechanicalfailureof the motor or coupling due to toque pulsations,
dards to be utilized shall depend upon the machine’s applicaoperation at or near mechanical resonances, or excess speed.
tion
and site location.
f. Winding failures due to repetitive high amplitude voltage spikes created
by the drive system.
purchaser
should
TheNote:
requirements
specific
contained
be
thataware
g. Motorground insulation overstress due to increasedcommonmodewithincorresponding
standards may differ.
voltage.
In
Of conflict between the
Order, this
Damage
h.motor
the
to
and
drive
due
to improper application of system
capacitance.
the
information
in
the
standards,
referenced
any
andstandard,
i. Higher motor temperatures whichmay limit application in Division 2
inquiry or order shallgovernoverthisstandard,while
this
classified locations.
standards.
referenced
any overgovernshall
standard
[ESP]
j. Shaft voltages/currents due to harmonics whichmay cause bearing
failure.
k. Possible
resonance with, and overheating of, surge capacitors (surge
1.4 CoordinationResponsibility
capacitors are not recommended).
1. Rotor heating due to drive-created space harmonicmmf(e.g.
6th. 12th.
Thevendorshall
be responsible for providingthepuretc. harmonic rotor currents).
installation
details
necessary
the
all
chaser
with
for
and
oper-
ation as an
Pm Of the
6.2 for the
information
required).
[ESP]
Note 4: [ESP] designates
use
of an electrical standard
paragraph.
[MSP]
designates
of
use
the
a mechanical
standard
paragraph.
1
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
(see
~~
S T D * A P I / P E T R O S T D S q b - E N G L L777 M 0732270 05b7438 T 5 5 M
2
API STANDARD
546
1.5 Definition of Terms
with unit responsibility, considers excitations
of torsional natural frequencies includingbut not limited to the following:
1.5.1 pull-in torque: The pull-in torque of a synchronous
a. Gear problems suchas unbalance and pitch line runout.
motor is themaximumconstanttorqueunderwhichthe
or circuits.
motor will pull the connected inertia load into synchronism at b. Torsional transients suchas motor start-ups short
the rated voltage and frequency when the field excitation is
c. Torsional excitation resulting from drivers such as motors
applied.
and reciprocating engines.
d.Torsionalexcitationsresultingfromadjustable
speed
1.5.2 pullsut torque: The pull-out torque of a synchrodrives. [ESP]
nous motor is the maximum sustained torque that the motor
will developat synchronous speed with the rated voltage, fre- Note:Thefirsttorsionalnaturalfrequencyof
synchronous-motoddrivenequipment combinations nonnallylies between twice the line frequency and
quency and excitation applied.
1.5.3
locked-rotor
toque: The
minimum
average
torque that the motor will produce with
a locked rotor at any
angular position of the rotor with its rated voltage and frequency applied. [ESP]
1.5.4 accelerating torque: Thedifferencebetweenthe
shaft torque and allload torques, i.e., the net torque available
for accelerating the rotating parts. [ESP]
1.5.5 pulsating toque: Thepulsatingtorque of a synchronous motor is the single amplitudethe
of exciting pulsating torque that is superimposedon the mean uniform starting
torque. The frequency of this torque oscillation is twice the
rotor-slip frequency and thus decreases linearly (at the usual
rated frequenciesof 50 or 60 hertz) from100 or 120 hertz toO
hertz as the speed increases from zeroto synchronous speed.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
1S.6synchronousmachinecharacteristicdata:
For definitionof synchronous machine characteristic data see
ANSVIEEE 100 or IEC 34-10.
1.5.7 cold start:,A motor start that occurs when the rotor
and stator are initially at ambient temperature. [ESP]
1.5.8 hot start: Any restart of the motor that occurs when
the motor is at a temperature above ambient temperature.
[ESPI
1.5.9 lateralcritical speed: Corresponds to resonant
frequencies of the rotor, bearings, and bearing support system. [ESP]
Note: The basic identificationof critical speeds is made from the natural frequencies of the system and of the forcing phenomena.If the frequencyof any
is equalto or
harmoniccomponent of aperiodicforcingphenomenon
approximates the frequency of any mode of rotor vibration, a condition of
resonance may exist. If resonance exists at a finite speed, thatspeed is called
a criticalspeed. This standardis concerned with actual resonant
speeds rather
than various calculatedvalues. Actual criticalspeeds are notcalculated
undamped values butare critical speeds confirmed by test-standdata. Critical
speeds above the maximum test speed shall be calculated damped values or
shall be determined by externally applied rotor excitations.
[ESP]
1.5.10torsionalcriticalspeed:
Corresponds to resonant frequencies of the complete mass-elastic system in the
drive train including couplings and driven equipment. The
torsional analysis, whichis normally providedby the supplier
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
zero frequency and is excited from the motor during start-up. Thismeans that
at least the first torsional critical speed is traversed each time such a drive
train is started.Dependingon the mechanicalcharacteristics of the drive
train, at the resonant speed defined by the intersection of the natural torsional
frequency and the frequency of the torque oscillations, the electrical torque
oscillation may be-escalated to a point at which unacceptably high torsional
stress occurs in the shaft system if there is not sufficient damping within the
system. [ESP]
1.5.1 1 forcing phenomena for vibration excitation:
Defined as follows: The exciting frequency
may be less than,
equal to, or greater than the synchronous frequency of the
rotor. Potential excitations to be considered in the design of
the system shall include but are not limited to the following
sources:
a. Mechanical unbalancein the rotor system.
b. Oil-film instabilities (whirl
or whip).
C. Internal rubs.
d. Misalignment.
e. Loose rotor-system components.
f. Hysteresis and friction.
g. Start-up condition frequencies.
h. Twice the line frequencies.
1. Electrical unbalance.
J. Mechanical pulsations producedby the motor load.
k. Electrical exciting pulsating torque with double slip frequency. [ESP]
1. Short circuits (faults)on the electrical system.
1.5.12servicefactor:
Themultiplier to thenameplate
power rating defining the maximum continuous power capability of the machine.A Service Factor(S.F.) greater than 1.O
can be specified when required. For example,a machine with
a Service Factor of 1.15 is able to run at 115 percent of its
2.2.1.3.
rated load witha temperature rise in accordance with
[ESPI
1.5.13 trip speed (in revolutions per minute): The speed
to
at which the independent emergency speed device operates
shut down the machine. [ESP]
1.5.14 power factor: The ratio of kilowatt input to kilovolt-ampere input for a motor or the ratio of kilowatt output
to kilovolt-ampere output fora generator. [ESP]
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO
S T D 54b-ENGL
L977
m
0732290 0 5 b 7 V 3 7 991
KVA AND LARGER
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS
MACHINE+500
(30.1O
The editions of the following standards,codes, and specifications that arein effect at the time of publication of this standard shall, to the extent specified herein, form a part of this
standard.Theapplicability of changesinstandards,codes,
and specifications that occur after the inquiry shall be mutually agreedupon by the purchaser and the vendor.
Std 670
Std 671
RP 684
RP 686
ABMA’
Std 7
Std 8.2
Std 9
Std I l
Std 20
B1.l
Synchronous
UnifìedInchScrewThreads(UN
Thread Form)
and UNR
B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads, GeneralPurpose (Inch)
Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,
B16.1
Class 25,125,250, and 800
Recommended Practice for Classification of
Locationsfor Electrical Installations at PetroB 16.2
leum Facilities
Lubrication,Shaft-Sealing, andControl-Oil
B16.5
Systemsfor Special-Purpose Applications
ReciprocatingCompressors for Petroleum,
Chemical and Gas Industry Services
vibration,Axial-Position,andBearing-Temperature Monitoring Systems
Special-Purpose Couplingsfor Refinery SerB16.11
vice
TutorialontheAPIStandardParagraphs
B3 1.3
Covering Rotor Dynamics and Balance
and Installation
Machinery
Installation
Design
ASTM6
A 278
Shaft and Housing Fitsfor Metric Radial Ball
and Roller Bearings
MountingAccessories,Inch
Design-Locknuts, Washers, and Adapters
Load Ratings and Fatigue Lifefor Ball Bearings
Load RatingsandFatigueLife
for Roller
Bearings
Radial Bearings of Ball,CylindricalRoller
and Spherical Roller Types, Metric Design:
Basic Plan for Boundary Dimensions, Tolerances and Identification Code
A 345
A 395
A 515
A 536
E 94
E 125
E 142
AGMA?
9002
for
BoresandKeyways
(Inch Series)
for Flexible Couplings
E 709
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Std 618
General
Requirements
Machines
ASMES
API
Std 614
3
ms14
1.6 ReferencedPublications
RP 500
m
Ring Joint Gasketsand Groovesfor Steel Pipe
Flanges
Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings Boiler and
PressureVesselCode,
SectionV,“Nondestructive Examination;” Section VIU, “Rules
for Construction of PressureVessels;”and
Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications’’
ForgedSteelFittings,Socket-Weldingand
Threaded
Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping
Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing
Partsfor Temperatures Upto 650’F
Flat-RolledElectricalSteels
for Magnetic
Applications
Ferritic
Ductile
Iron
Pressure-Retaining
Castingsfor Use at Elevated Temperatures
Carbon Steel Pressure Vessel Plates
for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
Ductile Iron Castings
Guidefor Radiographic Testing
Reference Photographsfor Magnetic Panicle
Indications on Ferrous Castings
Method for ControllingQuality of Radiographic Testing
Practice for Magnetic Pam‘cle Examination
AWS7
AI SI^
American Iron and Steel Institute-Material
Properties of Stainless Steel
’American BearingManufacturersAssociation, 1101 ConnecticutAvenue,
N.W., Suite700, Washington, D.C.20036.
2AmericanGear Manufacturers Association,1500 King Street, Suite20 f . Alexandria, Virginia223 14.
’American Iron and Steel Institute, 1101 17th StreetN.W., Washington, D.C.
20005.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
D1.l
Structural Welding Code-Steel
JAmericanNationalStandardsInstitute,
1 1 West42ndStreet, New York,
New York 10036.
sAmericanSociety of MechanicalEngineers, 345 East 47thStreet,New
York, New York 10017.
bAmeri~anSociety for Testing and Materials, 1 0 0 Bar Harbor Drive, West
Conshohocken, Pennsylvania 19428.
’AmericanWelding Society, 550 N.W. Le JeuneRoad,Miami,Florida
33135.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D 5Yb-ENGL L797
0732290 05b744O b03
API STANDARD
546
CENELEC*
EN 10126 Cold RolledNon-orientedElectricalSteel
Sheet on Strip Delivered in the Fully Processed State
EN 10165 Cold Rolled Electrical Alloyed Steel Sheet on
Strip Delivered in the Semi-processed State
IEP
34
38
72
79
894
Rotating Electrical Machines
Standard Voltages
Dimensions and Ourput Ratings for Rotating
Electrical Machines
Electrical Apparatus
for Explosive Gas Amtospheres
Guide for a Test Procedure for the Measurement of Loss Tangent of Coils and Bars for
Machine Windings
IEEE’”
43
85
95
100
115
286
303
429
522
841
Recommended Practicefor Testing Insulation
Resistance of Rotating Machinery
Test Procedurefor Airborne Sound Measurements on Rotating Electric Machinery
Recommended Practicefor Insulation Testing
of Large AC Rotating Machinery with High
Direct Voltage
Stana!ard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronic Tenns
Test Proceduresfor Synchronous Machines
Recommended Practice for Measurement of
Power-Factor lip-Up of Rotating Machinery
Smor Coil Insulation
Recommended Practicefor Auxiliary Devices
for Motors in Class I-Groups A, B, C, and D,
Division 2 Locations
Standard Test Procedure
for the Evaluationof
Sealed Insulation Systems for AC Electrical
MachineryEmployingForm-WoundStator
Coils
Guide for Testing Turn-to-Turn Insulation on
Form-Wound Stator Coils for AC Rotating
Electric Machines
Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry-Severe Duty
Totally
Enclosed
FanCooled (TEFC) Squirrel
Cage
Induction
Motors-Up to and Including 500 HP
ISO”
7
Pipe Threads (Pressure Type)
-C,
rue de Stassart: 35 B1050, Bruxelles, Belgium.
91ntemational Uectrotechnical Commission, 1, rue de Varembe, Geneva,
Switzerland.
loInstitute of Electrical and ElectronicsEngineen, 345 East 47th Street, New
York,New York 10017.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
15
25
68
76
228
26 1
28 1
286
773
774
775
1027
1680.1
19404
3448
3452
3453
3506
5579
7005
7483
8501
9013
9328
(ISOLDIS 15) Rolling Beanngfladial Bearings
GeneralRequirements for Competence of
Calibrationand TestLabs
(ISOLDIS 68) I S 0 General Puvose Screw
Threads
Rolling Bearings-Static Load Ratings
Pipe Threads (Non-PressureType)
I S 0 General Purpose Metric Screw Threaa3
Rolling Bearings-Dynamic Load Ratings and
Rating Life, Part 1, “Calculation Methods”
I S 0 System of Limits and Fits, Part 1, “Bases
of Tolerances, Deviations and Fits”; and Part
2, “Tables of Standard Tolerance Grades and
Limit Deviationsfor Holes and Shafts”
(ISOR 773) Rectangular or Square Parallel
Keys and Keyways
(ISOR 774)Taper Keys and Keyways
(ISOR 775) Cylindricaland 1/10 Conical
Shaft Ends
Radiographic I m g e QualityIndicators for
Non-Destructive Testing
Acoustics-TestCode
for Measurement of
Airborne Noise Rotating Electrical Machinery (2 P m )
Mechanical
Vibration-Balance
Quality
Requirements of Rigid
Rotor
Standard Industrial Liquid Lubricants-IS0
viscosity Classijkation
Non-Destructive Testing PenetrantInspection-General Principles
Non-Destructive Testing Liquid
Penetrant
Inspection-Verijìcation
CorrosionResistantStainlessSteelFasteners-Specifications
Non-Destructive Testing RadiographicPhenomenon-Basic Rules
Metallic Flanges(3 Parts)
Dimensionsfor Gaskets
Preparation of Steel Substrates(2 parts)
Welding and Allied Processes
Steel Plates and Strips for Pressure Purposes
(5 P
9691
10721
228
m)
Rubber-Recommendations for Workmanship of Pipe Joint Rings
Steel Structures: Materials and Design
Pipe Threads Part I , Dimensions, Tolerances
and Designdon
ternat national Organization for Standardization, IS0 publications are available from American National Standards Institute, i 1 West 42nd Street, New
York,New York 10036.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500
NEMA"
MG 1
NFPAi3
70
496
497M
Motors
and
SSPc'4
SP 6
Generators
Electrical
National
Code
Pressurized
Purged
andEnclosures
for Electrical Equipment
Classifcation of Gases, VaporsandDusts for
ElectricalEquipmentinHazardous
(Classified) Locations
Commercial
Blast
Cleaning
Standards
Exchanger
ManuTubular
of the
facturen Association
W e e l Structures Painting Council, 4400 Fifth Avenue, Pittsburgh, knnsylvania 15213-2683.
L5TubularExchange Manufacturers Association, 25 North Broadway, Tarrytown, New York I0591.
SECTION 2-BASIC
General
2.1.1 The equipment (includingauxiliaries)covered by this
standard shall be suitable for the specified operating conditions and shall be designed and constructed for a minimum
service life of 20 years and at least 3 years of uninterrupted
continuous operation.It is recognized that this is a design criterion and that unintenupted operationfor this period of time
involves factors beyond the vendor's
control. [ESP]
O
5
TEMAIS
l2NationalElectrical Manufacturers Association,1300 North 17thStreet,
Suite 1847, Rosslyn, Virginia22209.
'3Nationf Fire Protection Association,I Batterymarch F'ark, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.
2.1
KVA AND LARGER
2.1.2 Machines shall be designed for continuous operation
and long periods of inactivity in an atmosphere that is made
corrosive by traces of chemicals normally present in apetroleumprocessingfacilityandinanenvironmentthat
may
include highhumidity,storms,salt-ladenair,insects,plant
life, fungus, and rodents. Machines shall besuitable for operation, periods of idleness, storage, and handling at the ambient temperatures listed under Site Data on data
the sheets (see
Appendix A orB). If additional considerations are necessary
in the proposal, the purchaser shall specify them. [ESP]
DESIGN
The arrangement shall provide adequate clearance areas and
safeaccess for installation,operation,andmaintenance.
[ESPI
2.1.6 The design of piping systems shall achieve the
lowing:
fol-
a.Propersupportandprotection
to preventdamagefrom
vibration or from shipment, operation, and maintenance.
b. Properstiffnessandnormalaccessibility
for operation,
maintenance, and thoroughcleaning.
c. Installation in a neat and orderly arrangement adapted
to
the contour of the machine without obstructing access openings.
d. Elimination of air pockets.
e. Complete drainage through low points without disassembly of piping.
f. Provision for easy removal of covers for maintenance and
inspection. [ESP]
2.1.3 Control of the sound pressure level of all equipment
O 2.1.7 Electrical components and installations shall be suitfurnished shall be ajoint effort of the purchaser and the venable for the area classification specified by the purchaser on
dor. The equipment furnishedby the vendor shall conform to
the data sheets and shall meet the requirements ofNFF'A 70,
the maximum allowable sound pressure level specifiedby the
Articles 500, 501, 502 and 505 (Class, Group, Division or
purchaser. The measuring and reporting of sound pressure
Zone,andTemperatureCode),
or IEC79-1 (Zone, Class,
level data shall be in accordance with4.3.5.l .1 g.ESP]
Group, and Temperature Code) as well as local codes. The
purchaser will furnish with his inquiry any applicable local
0 2.1.4 All equipment shall be designed to run safely at the
codes or regulations.[ESP]
overspeeds specified in NEMA MG 1-21.45, 22.47, IEC 341, or to the specified trip speed (including overshoot) of the
2.1.8 Oil reservoirs and housings that enclose parts such as
connected equipment, whicheveris ,mater.
bearings, shaft seals, instmments, control elements, and terminals shall be designedto minimize contaminationby mois2.1.5 The arrangement of the equipment, including number
ture,dust,andotherforeignmatterduringperiodsof
of bearings, terminal housings, conduit, piping, and auxiliaoperation or idleness. To avoid condensation, the minimum
ries, (including the rotating elements of the exciter, the field
inlet
temperature of the bearing cooling water shallbe above
discharge resistor,
and
synchronizing
controls as applicable)
the ambientair temperature. [ESP]
shall be developed jointly by the purchaser and the vendor.
I
l
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0
S T D * A P I / P E T R O S T D 54b-ENGL 1977 I0732270 0 5 b 7 4 4 2 48b I
API STANDARD
546
2.1.9 Equipment shall be designed to permit rapid andeconomical maintenance. Majorparts such as frame components
and bearing housings shall be designed (shouldered or doweled) and manufactured to ensure
accurate alignment on reassembly.Easilyremovablecovers
shall beprovided
for
maintenance and inspection of coil end turns, the exciter, synchronizing controls and rotor windings
as applicable. [ESP]
Table 1-Voltage
or Horsepower
kVA
5004,000
500-7,000
1,000-12,000
3,500-Above
m .
Phases
3
3
3
3
(hertz)
60
60
60
60
Ratings
Motor
Voltage
2,300
4,000
6.600
13,200
Bus
Voltage
2400
4,160
6,900
13,800
2.1 .I O Every effort shallbe made to avoid requirementsfor
FW.
special tools. However, when tools and fixtures not commerkW
Phases
(hertz)
Voltage
(a)
(b)
ciallyavailablearerequiredto
disassemble, assemble, or
5
0
0
4
,
0
0
0
3
50
3,000
3,300
maintain the unit, they shall be included in the quotation and
500- 1 2,000
3
50
6.000
6,600
furnished as part of the initial supply. For multiple-unit instal3
50
10,000
4,000-Above
11,Ooo
lations, the requirements for quantities of special tools and
fixtures shall be mutually agreed upon by the purchaser and
Note 1 : Either oneof the voltage seriesa or b is used in certain countries
vendor. [ESP]
(EC38 Ed. 1983).
Note 2: For synchronousmotos with a leading power factor (overexcited)
2.1.ll When special tools are provided, theyshall be packthe recommended ratedvoltage is the nominal bus voltage. W P ]
aged in separate, rugged boxes and marked as special tools
Note 3: Motorsfor adjustable speed drive applications may have non-stanbe tagged to indicate its
for (taghtem number). Each tool shall
dard voltage ratings.
intended use. [ESP]
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6
when operated, both mechanically and
elecmcally, at rated
power, voltage, and frequency. In applications that require an
be used to avoid
overload capacity, a higher rating should
exceeding the temperature rises for the class of insulation
used and to provide adequate torque capacity. If a Service
Factor of 1.15 is specified, the motor may have a temperature
0 2.1.13 Many factors (suchas oil- or purge-piping and ductrise ofan additional 10°C (18’F) over that specified in2.3.1.1
work loads, alignment at operating conditions, supporting
when continuously operated at the service-factor power outstructure, handling during shipment, and handling and assem- put and the rated voltage and frequency.[ESP]
bly at the site) may adversely affect site performance. When
Maximum momentary overload capability
for synchronous
specified, to minimize the influence ofthese factors, the venbe
per
NEMA
MG
1-22.41
or
IEC 34-1.
generators
shall
dor shall review and comment on the purchaser’s piping and
foundationdrawing,andthevendor’srepresentative
shall
2.2.2 STATORWINDINGS
observe a check of the piping and ductwork performed by
parting the ductwork and flanges.The vendor’s representative
shall check alignment at the operating temperature
and, when O 2.2.2.1 Wheredifferentialprotection is specified or when
specifiedbythepurchaser,bothendsofeachstator-phase
specified, shall be present duringthe initial alignment check.
windingshall be brought out to the terminal housing that
[ESPI
encloses the currenttransformers (see 3.1.8 for additional
2.1 .I4
Spare partsfor the machines and all furnishedauxilrequirements). [ESP]
iaries shall meet all the criteria ofthis standard. [ESP]
2.2.2.2 Coil ends shall be braced to preventinsulation
2.2 Electrical Design
cracking and fatigue as a result of motion during operation
and starting. Thestator windings shallbe braced to withstand
2.2.1 RATINGANDVOLTAGE
an external line-line-ground shortcircuit at full load and 110
percent of rated voltage. Motor windingsshall withstand the
O 2.2.1.1 Standardratingsshall be selected. Iftherequired
starting duties specified in 2.2.6 with a life of at least SOO0
rating falls between two listed ratings, the larger listed rating
full-voltage starts. [ESP]
shall be selected. For generators, standard kilovolt-ampere
and kilowatt ratings shallbe selected. [ESP]
2.2.3 LOADREQUIREMENTS
2.2.1.2 Ingeneral,motors
are ratedinaccordancewith
2.1.12 Themachineshallperformwithin
the specified
acceptance criteria on the test stand and on its permanent
foundation. After installation, the performance of the combined units shall be the joint responsibility of the purchaser
and the vendor whohas responsibility for the train. [ESP]
Table l . Generators shall have thebus voltage rating shown.
O
2.2.1.3
Machines shall be capable of continuous operation
at rated load and temperature rise in accordance with2.3.1.1
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
2.2.3.1 Unless otherwise specified, the load torque characteristics and totalload inertia referred to the motor shaft shall
be in accordance with NEMAMG 1, Part 21 or IEC 34-1.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO STD 5Llb-ENGL 1777 I0732290 05b7Ll43 312 E
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500 KVA AND LARGER
2.2.6STARTINGCAPABILITIES
2.2.3.2 Shouldtheloadshaveothercharacteristicsthan
those listedin NEMA MG 1, Part 2 1, the purchaser shall fully
2.2.6.1 Fixed-speed motors shall have the starting capabilispecifytheloadcharacteristicsofthedrivenequipment.
These shall include:
ties in Table2. [ESP]
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0
7
a. The speed torque characteristics of the load under the most
stringent starting conditions.
b. When required, the speedtorque characteristics of the load
duringreacceleratingconditions,
the lengthofmaximum
voltage interruptions or fault related collapse, the expected
voltage at motor terminals during re-acceleration.
c. The total load inertia (Wkz) referred to themotorshaft
O
speed, where W is the rotating weight and k is the radius of
gyration. This total load inertia shall include all loads connected to themotorshaft,such as couplings, gearbox and
driven equipment. [ESP]
Note: Wk2[lb-fi’] = 23.731 Fg-m’]
1 =0.25GDz
D=2R
2.2.4VOLTAGEANDFREQUENCYVARIATIONS
Number of Starts at a
of 1.O
3
2
3
3
Note 1: The first startis a cold start.
Note 2: The starting capabilitiesfor synchronous motorsm normally a result
of an individual design for the specific load characteristics
of the driven
equipment and the electrical power system
for the most stringent conditions.
by one for
Therefore, itmay be necessary to reduce the number of starts
large, high inertia drives like gear-type
turbocompressors., and so forth. For
pumps and otherlow inertia applications, the number
of s m may be
increased to allow maximum starting flexibility
for the operation.
2.2.5STARTINGCONDITIONS
start
2.2.5.1 Unlessotherwisespecified,themotorshall
and accelerate the connected load to running speed in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 21 or E C 34-1. [ESP]
2.2.6.3 The minimum safe stall (locked rotor) time shall be
the greater of150 percent of, or5 seconds more than, the time
required to accelerate the actual driven load with the voltage
values specified under Paragraph 2.2.1.2. If these conditions
cannot be met, the vendor shall notifythe purchaser so that a
workable solution can be jointly developed. The method of
safe stall time calculation and the limits shall be described
with the proposal. [ESP]
2.2.5.2 Therequirements for startingcapability,speedtorque, and acceleration time shall be determined withfolthe
lowing information,as applicable, furnishedby the purchaser:
a. The minimum expected voltage at motor terminals under
specified inrush currents or,
b. The minimum available system short circuit inkVA,the
X / R ratio, and the minimum motor terminal voltage during
starting, withallvaluesreferenced
at themotorterminals.
[ESPI
2.2.7
PERFORMANCE
2.2.5.3 Whenthemotorspeed-torquecume
at the conditions specified in 2.2.5.2 aor b. is plotted over the load speed
torque curve, the motor developed torque shall exceed the
load torque by a minimum of 10 percent (motor rated torque
as base) at all locations throughout the speed range up to the
motor pull-in torque point. [ESP]
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Table 2-Starting Capabilities
Consecutive
2-second
jogging applications 10
seconds apart.
Consecutive stmsmotor
with
the
coasting
to
rest betweenstarts.
Consecutive startsmotor
with
the
coasting
to
rest and remainingidle for20 minutes.
Evenly
spaced
starts
firstin
hour before
continuous running.
2.2.4.1 Unless otherwise specified, the machine shall operate with a maximum voltage variation of +lo percent and a
maximum frequency variation of+5 percent and a total combined variation not to exceedf10 percent, per NEMA MG 1,
Part 21, Part 22, or IEC-34. [ESP]
O
2.2.6.2 Starting capabilities for motors different from those
shown in Table 2shall be jointly developed between the pur2).
chaser and the vendor (see note following Table
Factor Service
Capability
Where:
J = polar mass moment of inertia (kg-m’).
G = rotating(kg).
R = radiusofinertia(m).
O
Note: Typical petroleum process plant operationsare such that a motor will
have a period of initialuse of about 2 months for pump and compressor runin and initial plant operations, during which time the maximum starting
capability may be used. A need for maximum capability may also occur during
are usually longer
subsequent start-ups. Between these start-up periods, there
periods of continuous cunning.[ESP]
2.2.7.1 With their ratedvoltageandfrequency
applied,
machines shall, as a minimum, operate with the characteristics listed below. This does not apply to units started by, or
operated on adjustable speed drives. Where these limits will
have an adverse effect on other characteristics, particularly
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STDmAPIIPETRO STD 54b-ENGL
8
API STANDARD
546
efficiency,the vendor shall state the effect and recommend
preferred values.
0
a. The maximum locked-rotor current shall not exceed 500
percent of the full-load current.
b. The minimum locked-rotor, pull-in, and pull-out torques
shall not be less than the values listed in NEMA MG 1 Part
21 or IEC 34-1. [ESP]
c. Current pulsations under the actual operating conditions
shall be within the limits stated within API 618 or NEMA
MG 1-2 1.84,as specified.
2.3
0732270 05b7444 2 5 7
L777
InsulationSystems
2.3.1GENERALREQUIREMENTS
Class B temperature-rise limits apply tothe armature, field,
and exciter windings.
2.3.1.1 Allwindingsshallhave
an epoxybase,vacuum
pressureimpregnated,nonhygroscopic
insulation system,
including the stator lead connections to the windings. When
bus bars are used, they shallbe insulated. As a minimum, the
insulation system shall meet the criteria for Class F insulation: however, the allowable temperature rise above ambient,
40°C (104"F), shall not exceed that listedfor Class B insulation in NEMA MG 1, Part 21, MG 1, Part 22, ANSI (250.13,
or IEC 34-1 limits as applicable. For ambient temperatures
above 40°C (104°F) the allowable temperature rise shall be
reduced accordingly. Strand insulationshall adhere tightly to
the strand. Turn and ground wall insulation shall be resistant
to the effects of corona.The integrity ofstrand and turn insulation shall be maintained during forming, winding and VPI
treatment. [ESP]
2.3.1 2 For multiturn stator windings, additional turn insulation shall be used as required to maintain the integrity of
turn insulation in the noses
or other areas of coil deformation.
The insulation system shall be capable of withstanding the
surgetestspecified in4.3.4.2. Special provisions shall be
made to seal the leads where theyexit the coil. Coils shall be
tightly secured in their slots and securely braced outside the
slots to withstand electromagnetic and mechanical stresses
duringstart-upandundernormal
operating conditions, as
well as mechanical forces associated with out-of-phase synchronization and short-circuit conditions.[ESP]
2.3.1.3 Field-coilturninsulationshall be maintainedduringforming,winding,andcuring.Rotor
coils madefrom
rectangular wire or edge-wound strips shall be adequately
insulated and securely braced. Additional ground insulation
and blocking shall be used as required to maintain the integrity of insulation. To improve the cooling effect, individual
turns of the windings may project on particular sides or all
around the pole to formcoolingfins.Adequatecreepage
paths, distances and clearances shall be provided on all current-carrying conductors. The complete
rotor winding system
shallwithstandthemechanicalandelectrical
stresses that
occurduring start-up andundernormaloperating,surge,
as well as during
overspeed,andshort-circuitconditions,
shutdown and all tests Specified. The rotor insulation system
for motors shall be protected
by shorting out the rotor through
the exciter converter and by-pass thyristorsor by a field discharge resistor.
The insulation on field windings shall maintain
its integrity
while withstandingthe centrifugal forces and thermalstresses
at ClassFtemperaturewithoutdamage.Specialattention
shall be given to adequate supportof both coil-to-coil connections and coil-to-main-field-lead connections.
2.3.1.4 The exciter m a t u r e and exciter fieldinsulation
shall be Class F, highly
using
amoisture-and
chemical-resistant,curedmaterial.Theconductor
strands
shall be individually insulated by an enamel coating, a glass
weave, or a combination of these that is saturated with varnish to provide turn-to-turn insulation.
2.3.1.5 The total insulation system shall be impervious to
the operating conditions specified in 2.1.2. Sheared exposed
edges of insulationpartsshallbesealed.Allinsulation,
including lead insulation, shallbe impervious to attack by the
lubricating oil specified. Leads shall be braced and protected
from chafingagainstthemotorframeand
teminal box.
[=pl
2.3.1.6 All stator insulation
systems
shall
be service
proven and shall have been subjected
to thermal evaluation in
accordance with IEEE 429 or IEC 34-[ESP]
18.
2.3.2SEALEDINSULATIONSYSTEMS
2.3.2.1
StatorWindings
Stators shall have a sealed insulation system isthat
capable
of withstanding a sealed winding conformance test in accordance with NEMAMG 1-20.49. [ESP]
2.3.2.2ExciterWindings
When specified, the exciter armature and field windings
shall have a sealed insulation system, as defined by NEMA
MG 1-1.27.2.
2.4MechanicalDesign
2.4.1
ENCLOSURES
2.4.1.1
GeneralRequirements
The following general requirements apply
to enclosures:
a. Enclosure parts shall be made of cast or nodular iron, cast
steel, orsteelplate.Purchaser-approvedfiber-reinforced
materials may be usedfor parts suchas covers or nonsupportive enclosure sections. All enclosure parts shall have a mini--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
- S T D - A P I / P E T R O STD 5Yh"ENGL L777 E '0732270 05b74V5 175 E
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500 KVAAND LARGER
mum rigidity equivalent to that of sheet steel with a nominal
thickness of 3.0 millimeters( V g inch).
Table 3"achine
e. The impact of potential risks due to possible circulating
currentsintheenclosureshall
be considered for machines
usingmulti-sectionenclosuresinstalledinclassifiedlocato possible circulatingcurtions. Overheating or sparking due
rents shall be avoided, where necessary,by bonding together
the
conducting
components
in
a
secure electrical and
mechanical manner, or by the provision of adequate bonding
straps between the motor housing components.
f. When specified, machines to be installed in classified Div.
2 or Zone 2areas shall be provided with provisionsfor effective pre-start purging. [ESP]
IPCode
34-6
IEC
Drip-proof
Guarded
DPG
1.25.5 IC01 IP22
Weather protected
Type I
Type II
WP-I
WP-II
1.25.8.1
1.25.8.2
IF23
IPW24
IC0 I
IC01
Totally enclosed
Fan cooled
pipe ventilated
Waterlair cooled
Aidair cooled
TEFC
TEPV
TEWAC
TEAAC
1.26.2
1.26.6
lP44/54
IP44
IP44/54
IP44/54
IC41 I
IC3 1137
IC81W
IC61 1'
1C6164
1.26.8
1.26.9
2.4.12.3 Totally
enclosed
machines
shall
meet
the
following criteria:
Table 3 lists types of machine enclosures and the
NEMA or IEC specifications to which they shall conform.
The purchaser shall specifythe type of enclosure on the data
sheets. Enclosures shall also conformto the requirements of
2.4.1.2.2,2.4.1.2.3 and 2.4.1.2.4. [ESP]
2.4.1.2.2 Drip-proof,
weather-protected
Type
I and
weather-protected TypeII enclosures shall meet the following
criteria:
a. Ventilation and other openings shall be limited in size by
design or by metal screens in accordance with 2.4.10.5 and
3.5.1.
b. Weather-protected enclosures shall be constructed so that
any accumulation of water will drain from the motor before
reaching the levelof the windingsor other live parts.
c. When abrasive-dust conditions have been specified on the
data sheets under Site Data, electrical insulation shall be protected fromthe abrasive actionof airborne particles. This probe inadditiontothe
VPI resinandthe
tectionshall
manufacturer's standard coating.[ESP]
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
MG 1
Method of
Note: The designation used for degree
of protection consists of the lettersIP
followed by two characteristic numeralssignifying conformity withthe conditions indicated in the tables. When itis required to indicate a degree of protection by only onechamteristic numeral, the omitted numeralshall be
replaced bythe letter X. For example 1PX5 or1P2X
0 2.4.1.2.1
Note: Dripproof enclosures m not recommended for the operating conditions specified in 2. I .2 (that is outdoor operation without a protective shelter).Purchasersapplyingthisdegree
of protectionshould expect reduced
reliability (see 2.1.I 1.
MG 1
of
IIEC 34, Part 5, NEMA MG 1. Part 5
*IEC34, Part 6, NEMA MG 1, Part 6
3Shaft Driven SecondaryFan
4Auxiliary SecondaryFan
2.4.1.2 Machine Enclosures and Corresponding
NEMA orIEC Specifications
O
Desi,mtionSpecificationsDegree
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Enclosure Type
c. All theenclosure'sbolts,studs,and
other fastening
devices shall be made of corrosion-resistant materials. When
specified, AIS1300 series or IS0 3506 stainless steel shall be
used. Internal fastening devices shall use
locknuts, lock washers, locking plates, or tie wires.
d. The enclosure shall be designed to facilitate cleaning and
painting of the interior.
0
Enclosures and Corresponding
NEMA or IEC Specifications
b. Air deflectors shall be made of corrosion-resistant material
Cooling?
Protection1
NEMA
NEMA
Common
or shall have corrosion-resistant plating or treatment.
O
9
a. Designs in which the stator laminations form a partof the
enclosure or in which the stator laminations are
otherwise
exposed to external cooling
air are not acceptable.
b. Fan covers shall be made of castor nodular iron, cast steel,
cast aluminum, steel plate, or aluminum plate. Covers shall
have a minimum rigidity equivalent to that of steel plate with
a nominal thickness of 3.0 millimeters ( V g inch). Purchaserapprovedfiber-reinforcedmaterials may beused.Theair
intake opening shall be guarded by a gill or a metal screen
fastened on the outside of the
fan cover. Requirements for
grills or metal screensare covered in 2.4.10.5.
c. Sheet metal covers or wrappers used to form air passages
over the enclosure shall have a minimum rigidity equivalent
to that of steel plate with a nominal thickness of3.0 millimeters ( V 8 inch).
d.Totallyenclosedmachinesshallbeequippedwitha
plugged,threadeddrainconnectionlocatedatthelowest
point of the frame. This connection shall be shown on the outline drawing.
e.Requirementsforair-to-airheatexchangertubesarein
2.4.10.8.
f. Where an enclosure make-upair intake is requiredfor sup
plying pressurized air to the bearing seals, the intake shallbe
provided with filters suitable for the site data given on the
Data Sheets.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
API STANDARD
546
10
for drain holes. A level alarm towarn of cooler leakage shall
be provided.
0 g. A flow-sensing device shall be provided for mounting in
the water supply piping to each cooler. When specified, this
device shall have a local indicator calibrated in gallons per
minute, as well as switches activated by low and high flow.
The high-flow switch shall be used to activate an alarm. The
2.4.1 2.4 Totally enclosed water-air-cooled machines shall
low-flow switch shallbe supplied with the machine manufacmeet the following criteria:
turer’s recommended setting, below which the machine will
a. Cooling water systems shall be designed for the following
overheat and winding damage will result within 15 minutes
conditions unless the vendor notifiesthe purchaser that conof the low-flow occuirence.
flict will arise affecting performance, sizelcost and integrity
0 h. When specified, air temperature sensors shall be provided
of the cooler. The purchaser shall approve the final selection. to sense air temperature into and ofout
the coolers.
i.
Requirements
for
heat
exchanger
tubes
are in 2.4.10.8.
Velocity
over heat exchange
surfaces
1S-2.5 mk
(5-8
[ESPI
Maximum
allowable
working
pressure
5 bar (ga)
(275 psig)
g. Machines for Div. 1 or Zone 1 locations shall be certified
for that location, or arranged for purging and pressurizing
with clean, dry air or inert gas as per the requirements of
NFPA 496 or IEC 79- 13. Alternatively, totally enclosed pipe
ventilated (TEPV) construction suitable for the installation
shall be used. [ESP]
O
Test pressure (minimumof 1.5 times t h e
maximumallowableworkingpressure)
7.9 bar (ga)
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Maximum pressure drop
Maximum inlet temperature
Maximum outlet temperature
Maximum temperaturerise
Minimum temperature rise
Fouling factor on water
side
2.4.2FRAMEANDMOUNTINGPLATES
(2115 psig)
I bar
I5 psig
90°F
32T
1
49°C
20°F
17OC
30°F
11°C
20OF
0.35mz-KkW 0.002hr-ftLOF/Btu
2.4.2.1 Theframeshall beof castornodulariron,cast
steel, or welded steel plate construction with removable end
bells or end plates to permit removal
of the rotor and facilitate
replacementofstatorcoils.Theframeofthecompletely
assembledmachineonitspermanentfoundation,withthe
rotor installed and rotatingon its oil film, shall be free from
smctural resonance within55 percent of the electric line frequency and the following frequency ranges:
Note: The criterion for velocity over the exchange surfaces is intended to
minimize water-side fouling; the criterion for minimum temperature rise is
intended to minimize the use of cooling water.
b. When specified, machines shall be provided with multiple
coolers to allow one coolerto be removed from service without reducing the continuous operating capability.
0 c. The location of the cooler, orientation of the water box
inletandoutlet,materialsandconstruction
of thecooler,
cleaning requirements, and means of leak detection shall be
Leak
developedjointly by thepurchaserandthevendor.
detectors shall be provided to sense tube leakage. For double
tube coolers, these detectors shall sense inner tube leakage
and when specified, outer tube leakage.
d. Cooler designs shallbe of the water-tube type (water in the
tubes). U-tube constructionis not permitted. The construction
of the water box and header shall be such that leaking tubes O
can be readily plugged and all tubesare accessible for cleaning.
O e. The machine’s interior shall be baffled or otherwise constructed to prevent cooler-tubeleakagefromstrikingthe
windingsdirectly.Whenspecified,coolersmountedabove
the windings shall be of double-tube construction, requiring
no further baffling.Alternatively,single-tube,top-mounted
coolers with proper baffling approved by the purchaser may
be used where experience has proved this construction to be
adequate.Pedestal-mountedcoolersorcoolersmounted
underneath the winding may be of single-tube construction.
Cooler materials shallbe compatible with the water supply.
f. The machine shall be constructed so that cooler leakage
will collect and drain before reaching the level of the windings. In pressurized enclosures,a liquid seal shallbe provided
O
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
N =n
N
,k 0.20N0,
Where:
N = frequency range, in hertz.
No,,= operating speed frequency,in hertz.
n = 1,2, and 3. [ESP]
Note: Transfer of vibration from surrounding equipment
is avoided by proper
layout of the foundation, which is the responsibility of the purchaser. After
the machine is erected, the n a t d frequency of the foundation must differ by
at least S O percent fromone and two times the running-speed fiequency and
by at least &20 percent from one and two times the electric line frequency.
[ESPI
2.4.22 The stress values used in the design of
the frame
shall not exceed the maximum allowable stress criteria specified in Section VIII, Division I, of the ASME Code or IS0
10721 for the material used. The conditions evaluated shall
haninclude short circuits, out-of-phase synchronism, thrusts,
dling, and specified seismic loading. [ESP]
2.4.2.3 The h e includingtransitionbase,
if supplied
with the machine, and the bearing supports shallbe designed
to have sufficient strength and rigidity
to limit changes of
alignment caused by the worst combination of torque reaction, conduit and pipingstress, magnetic imbalance, and thermal distortion to 0.05 millimeter (0.002 inch) at the coupling
flange. (Thisis not to be confused with the normal repeatable
thermalgrowthbetweenambientandoperatingtemperatures.) [ESP]
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O STD Sqb-ENGL L997:a
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS
MACHINES-500
0732290 OSb74Y7 TbA
KVA AND LARGER
11
2.4.2.4 Frames on
horizontal
machines
shall
be
rigid
enough to permit the machine to be moved by the use of the
[ESP]
lateral, axial, and vertical jackscrews.
The epoxy primer shall be compatible with epoxy grout.
The
purchaser shall submitto the vendor the specificationsfor the
epoxy primer. [ESP]
2.4.2.5 Horizontalmachinesshallbeequippedwithvertito facilitate alignment. If
cal jackscrews appropriately located
size and weight prohibit the use of jackscrews, other provisions shall be made for vertical
jacking. [ESP]
2.4.2.7.5 Anchorboltsshallnotbeused
machine to the mounting plates.[ESP]
O
2.4.2.6 Whenspecified,themachine
with soleplatesor a baseplate.[ESP]
2.4.2.7 The term mounting plate refers
and soleplates. [ESP]
2.4.2.7.6 Mounting plates that are to be grouted shall have
50-millimeter-radiused (Zinch radiused) outside comers (in
the plan view). Mounting surfaces that are not to be grouted
[ESP]
shall be coated with a rust preventative.
shall befurnished
to both baseplates
2.4.2.7.7 Mounting plates shall be designed to extend at
least 25 millimeters (1 inch) beyond the outer sides of the
machine feet. [ESP]
2.4.2.7.1 Mountingplatesshallbeequippedwithvertical
jackbolts to permit leveling of the mounting plates.
[ESP]
a. For baseplates, a minimum 16 millimeter( V 8 inch) diameter jackbolt hole shall be located 100 millimeters (4 inches)
from each anchor bolt hole along the same centerline as the
anchor bolt holes.
b. For soleplates, a minimumof 4 jackbolt holes shall be supbe designed for a minimum of 16 milplied. These holes shall
limeter ( V 8 inch) jackbolt and shall be located in each comer
of the soleplate. In addition, for soleplates longer than 0.9
meters (3 feet) two additional jackbolt holes shall be instalied
in the soleplateat midspan with theircenterlines similar to the
comer jackbolt holes.Soleplates1.8meters
(6 feet)and
0.9 meters (3 feet)
longer shallhaveamaximumspanof
between jackbolt holes on each side of the
soleplate.All jackbolt holes shall be located a minimum of 100 millimeters (4
inches) from the anchor bolt holes.
c. Jackbolt holes shall be drilled and tapped a length equal
to
the diameter of the jackbolt. The soleplate shall be counterboredatthe
jackbolt holelocations to adiameterlarge
enough to allow the use of a socket drive over the head of the
jackbolt. The depth of the counterbore shall be equal to the
thickness of the soleplate minus the diameter of the jackbolt.
2.4.2.7.3 When centerline supports are provided, they shall
be designed and manufactured to permit the machine to be
moved by using the horizontal jackscrews.[ESP]
0
2.4.2.7.4 When epoxy grout is specified on the data sheets,
the vendor shall commercially sandblast, in accordance with
SSPC SP 6 or IS0 8501,allthe grouting surfaces ofthe
mountingplatesandshallprecoatthesesurfaceswitha
catalyzedepoxyprimerappliedtodegreasedwhitemetal.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
2.4.2.7.8 The vendor of the mounting plates shall
furnish
AIS1 300 or IS0 3506 series stainless steel shim packs at
least 3.0 millimeters (I/* inch) thick between the machinefeet
andthemountingplates.Allshimpacksshall
straddle the
hold-down bolts. [ESP]
2.4.2.7.9
[ESPI
Anchor bolts will be furnished by the purchaser.
2.4.2.7.10 Fasteners for attaching thecomponents to the
mounting plates and jackbolts for leveling thesoleplatesshall
be supplied by the vendor. [ESP]
2.4.2.7.11 The horizontal and vertical jack bolts shall be
16 millimeter M16 I S 0 68 (Vs inch minimum diameter with
UNC threads). [ESP]
2.4.2.8 Frame mounting surfaces on a horizontal machine
shall be machined on a common plane parallel to a horizontal
plane through the theoretical centerline. The mounting surfaces shall be machined within 0.13 millimeter (0.005 inch)
of a plane through the lowest foot, and each foot shall be parallel to that plane, in the transverse or longitudinal direction,
within 0.17 millimeter per meter (0.002 inch per foot). The
upper and lower surfaces of bearing pedestals and mounting
plates shall be machined parallel. [ESP]
2.4.2.9 The mounting surface on a vertical motor shall be
machined perpendicular to themotor’s centerline, and this
surface shall not deviate from that perpendicular plane
by
more than 0.17 millimeter per meter (0.002 inch per foot).
[ESPI
2.4.2.1 O The machined finish of the mounting surface
shall
notexceed 6.4 micrometers (250 microinches)arithmetic
Hold-down or foundation bolt holes
average roughness (R).
shall be drilled perpendicular to the mounting surfaceor surfaces and, when the machinedsurface is a castor other unmachined, uneven surface, spot-faced to a diameter three times
that of the hole diameter. [ESP]
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2.4.2.7.2 To assist in machinepositioning,themounting
plates shallbefurnishedwithhorizontal
jackbolts (for
machine movement in the horizontal plane) the same size as
or larger than the vertical jackbolts. The lugs holding these
jackscrews shall be attached to the mounting plates so that
they do not interfere with the installation or removal of the
drive element and the installation or removal of shims used
for alignment. [ESP]
to fasten the
2.4.2.11 Theframesupport or supportsshallbeprovided
with two pilot holesfor dowels. The holes shall be
as near the
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
vertical as is possible and shallbe located to provide adequate
space for field drilling, reaming, and placement of dowels.
Unlessotherwisespecified,onlythesupportsormounting
feet onthe drive end of horizontal machines shall
be doweled.
Vertical machines shall havea rabbeted fit to the base and two
dowels. [ESP]
2.4.2.12 Alignmentdowelsorrabbeted fits shall be provided to facilitate disassembly and reassemblyof end bells or
plates, bearing-housing mounting plates, and bearing housings. When jackscrews are used as a means of parting contactingfaces,one
of thefacesshall
be counterbored or
recessed to prevent a leaking joint or an improper fit caused
by marring of the face. [ESP]
2.4.3.3.1 The details of threading shall conform to ASME
B1.l or IS0 68 and IS0 261. [MSP]
2.4.3.3.2 Cap screws
shall
be supplied
on
all
frame
connections except oil piping, unless studs
are specifically
approved by the purchaser. [MSP]
2.4.3.3.3 Adequate clearance shall be provided at bolting
locations to permit the use of socket box
or wrenches. [MSP]
2.4.3.4 Openings for pipingconnections,exceptbearing
oil inlet lines, shallbe at least 20 millimeters (3/4 inch) nominal pipesize. All pipeconnectionsshall
be flangedor
machined and studded. Where flanged
or machined and studin sizes
dedopeningsareimpractical,threadedopenings
through
40
millimeters
(1
inches)
nominal
pipe
size,
shall
2.4.2.13 Whentapereddowelpinsareprovidedbythe
vendor, the top end
of the dowel shall have an undercut shank be fitted in accordance with 2.4.3.4.1 through 2.4.3.4.3 unless
otherwise specified. [MSP]
threaded to the nominal diameter nearest the dowel’s outside
diameter. Thefirst two threads shallbe machined off, and the
2.4.3.4.1 A pipenipple,preferablynotmorethan
150
shank shall be beveled to prevent damage when the pin
is
millimeters
(6
inches)
long,
shall
be screwedintothe
driven. A hex nut shall be provided with each pin. [ESP]
threaded opening.
O 2.4.2.14 Liftinglugs,throughholes,
or eyeboltsshall be
2.4.3.4.2 Pipe nipples shallbe a minimum of Schedule 80.
providedforliftingmajorcomponentsandtheassembled
machine. Any special mechanisms for lifting major compo2.4.3.4.3 Tappedopeflingsandbosses
for pipethreads
nentsand the assembledmachineshall be supplied in the
ASME B 16.5 or IS0 7005.
shall conform to
quantities shown on thedata sheets. [ESP]
2.4.3.5 Pipingflangesshallconform
to ASME B16.2 or
2.4.2.15 Allfabricatedweldedstructuralsteelshallbe
IS0 7483 or IS0 9691 or B16.5 as applicable, exceptas specpost-weld stress relieved. This does not apply to sheet metal
ified in 2.4.3.5.1 and 2.4.3.5.2.
components. [ESP]
2.4.3.5.1 Cast iron flanges shallbe flat faced and shall have
O 2.4.2.16 When specified, an axial stator shift shall be proa minimum thickness of Class 250 for
sizes 8 inches and
vided. [ESP]
smaller.
Note: Stator shift is where the statorassembly is axially relocatedon the soleplate or base without removing the outboard bearing to expose the rotor poles
to facilitate maintenanceor removal.
2.4.3
O
FRAME CONNECTIONS
2.4.3.1 Unless otherwise specified, inlet and outlet connecair, lubrication,
tions for fieldpiping,includingthosefor
cooling medium, instrumentation, conduit, bus ducting, and
drains, shall have the vendor’s standard orientation and size,
except that sizesof 1V4, 2V2, 3V2,5,7, and 9 inches shall not
be used. [ESP]
2.4.3.2 Tapped openings not connected to piping shall be
plugged with solid round head steel plugs furnished
in accordance with ANSI B16.11 or IS0 2229. Plugs that may later
requireremovalshall
be of corrosion-resistantmaterial.
Threads shall be lubricated.Tapeshallnot
be appliedto
threads of plugs inserted into oil passages. Plastic plugs and
threading arenot permitted. [MSP]
2.4.3.3 Boltingandthreadingshall
fied in 2.4.3.3.1 through 2.4.3.3.3.
be furnished as speci-
2.4.3.5.2 Flat-faced flanges with full raised-face thickness
are acceptableon fiames other than cast iron.
2.4.3.6 Machinedandstuddedconnectionsshallconform
tothefacinganddrillingrequirements
of ASME B16.1,
nuts shall be furnished
B16.5 or IS0 7005-2.Studsand
installed.
2.4.3.7 Tapped openings and bosses for pipe threads shall
conform to ASMEB 16.5. pipe threads shall be taper threads
conforming to ASMEB 1.20.1 or IS0 7 or IS0 228.
2.4.3.8 Openings for duct connections shall be flanged and
bolted. Connection facings shall be adequate to prevent leakage with proper gaskets and bolts. Unless otherwise specified,
be provided by’thevendor.
gaskets and bolts shall
2.4.3.9 Studded connections shall be furnished with studs
installed. Blind stud holes in casings shall be drilled deep
enough to allowa preferred tap depth,of 1V 2 times the major
diameter of the stud.The first 1V 2 threads at both ends of each
stud shallbe removed.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO STD Sllb-ENGL L777
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS
MACHINES-500
m
0732290 0 5 b 7 4 l l 9 830 .P
KVAAND URGER
13
o m 2.4.4 EXTERNAL FORCES AND MOMENTS
observedbyradialvibrationprobes,thecombinedtotal
6
electrical
and
mechanical
runout
shall
not
exceed
Frames andhousingsaregenerallydesigned
to accept
micrometers (0.25 mils).Iftherunout
is greaterthan 6
small external forces and moments from duct, conduit, and
micrometers (0.25 mils)and less than 25 percentofthe
piping connections. If the auxiliary equipment (that is, ductmaximum
allowed
peak-to-peak
unfiltered
vibration
ing, coolers, silencers, and filters) is not supplied by the venamplitude (refer to Figure l), then an additional burnishing
dor, it is the purchaser’s responsibilityto specify on the data
operation shall be performed. If after a second burnishing
sheets the external loads expected to be imposed on the enclooperation the runout is less thanor equal to 25 percent of the
sures from this equipment. The vendor shall design the frame
maximum allowed peak-to-peak unfiltered vibration then that
to accept the specifiedloads, including those from the bearing
For areas to be
shall constitute an acceptable runout level.
housings. The vendor shall provide the following informaobserved
by
axial-position
probes,
the
combined
total
tion, as required on the purchaser’sdata sheets:
13
electrical
and
mechanical
runout
shall
not
exceed
a.Maximumallowableexternal
forces andmoments,if
micrometers (0.5 mil). [ESP]
applicable.
W 2.4.5.1.4 The
shaft
forging
shall
be
ultrasonically
b. If expansion joints are required for thermal expansion or
inspected before the rotating element is assembled (see4.2).
isolation from vibration, information and recommendations
[ESPI
about thejoints. [ESP]
2.4.5.1.5 Shaft extensions at coupling fits shall conform to
2.4.5ROTATINGELEMENT
the requirements ofM I Standard 671 for tapered extensions
and AGMA 9002 or IS0 W 7 3 , IS0 W774 and IS0 W 7 5
2.4.5.1 General
for cylindrical extensions. Surface finish of the shaft
for a
hydraulic mounting or removal design coupling hub shall be
O 2.4.5.1.1 The
rotatingelementshallbedesignedand
0.8 micrometers (32 microinches) R, or better at thehub
constructed to withstand the starting duties specified in 2.2.6
mounting area. [MSP]
with a fatigue life of at least
5,000 full-voltage starts or as
specified by the purchaser. [ESP]
2.4.5.2 Assembly
2.4.5.1.2 Foralltwopolemachines,andallmachines
2.4.5.2.1 Onlaminatedpoles,laminatedpoleshoes,and
operating above the first lateral critical speed, the shaft shall
laminatedcylindricalrotors, the laminationsshallhaveno
be one-piece,heattreatedforged
steel, suitablyground.
burrs larger than 0.076 millimeter (0.003 inch). Laminations
Suitable fillets shall be provided at all changes
in diameter
shall be distributed to minimize uneven buildup and evenly
and
keyways.
in
Welded
shaft
and
bar
shaftkpider
distributemagneticpropertiesin
gain orientation.The
construction is not allowed.
For machines operating below the first lateral critical speed method of assembly shall prevent scoring of the shaft surface,
assure positive positioning, and minimize bowing (all nonand 1,800 rpm or less, a hot-rolled shaft and a welded shaft
transient torque conditions shall be transmitted via rotor core/
and bar construction may be used provided that the vendor
can demonstrate that this construction meets the requirements shaft interference fit).
No shaft-straighteningtechniqueispermittedduring
or
of 2.4.10.3.5and 4.3.3, and also has a minimum of two years
after fabrication of the rotor.Shaft repair by plating or metal
of successful operating experience with such a design. This
spray is not allowed unless approvedby the purchaser. [ESP]
design shall meet the weld quality requirements of 4.2.2.3.2
and the magnetic particle inspection requirements of 4.2.2.4.
2.4.5.22 Machines
with
fabricated-bar
amortisseur
[ESPI
windingsshallbefurnishedwithcopper,copperalloy,
or
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
aluminum ban and end rings(see 6.1.9).
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2.4.5.1.3 When
noncontacting
radial
vibration
and/or
axial-position probes are furnished, or when provisions
for
probes are requiredas described in 3.8, the rotorshaft sensing
areas tobe observed by radial-vibrationprobesshallbe
concentric with the bearing journals. All shaft sensing areas
(both radial vibration and axial position) shall be free from
stencil and scribe marks or any other surface discontinuity,
such as an oil hole
or a keyway, for a minimum of one probetip diameter on each side of the probe. These areas shall not
be metalized, sleeved,or plated. The finalsurface finish shall
not exceed 0.8 micrometer (32 microinches) R,, preferably
obtained by honing or burnishing.These areas shall be
properly demagnetized or otherwise treated. For areas to be
2.4.52.3 Retaining rings without circumferentialjoints are
required for motorsintended to operate at synchronous
speeds greater than or equal to 1 ,O00 revolutions per minute.
Retainingringmaterialshallnot
be susceptibleto stress
crackingdue to exposure to moisture,chlorides or other
airborne contaminates. [ESP]
2.4.5.2.4 To ensure good heat transfer to the rotor core and
to limit vibrationandfatigueofbars,allbarsshallbe
be
maintainedtightly in their slots. Therotorcageshall
maintained centered (e.g. swedged, center locked or pinned)
to prevent axial movement. [ESP]
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
API STANDARD 546
fan, blade-to-disk intersections, keyways, and shaft section
fans shall be
changes. A11 accessible areas ofweldson
subjected to magnetic particle or liquid penetrant inspection.
[ESPI
2.4.5.2.5 The method by which the bars are attached to the
current-carryingend ring shall be selected to minimize
localized heating andthe nonuniform stresses that result. The
bars shall be radially supported as necessary in the currentcarrying end ring to prevent the braze or weld from being
overstressed and maximize the joint contact area. The metal
joining material shall not be subject to attack by hydrogen
sulfide (that is, it shall be free from phosphorus). Inert-gas
welding,inductionbrazing,and multi torchfull circle gas
brazing are the acceptable methods. Outward bending of the
ends of the rotor bars and articulation of the shorting ring
shall be limited by design, material selection, or shrunk-on or
fitted nonmagneticmetallic retaining rings (see 6.1.9). [ESP]
2.4.5.2.13 Iffield-windingbracesareinstalledininterpolar spaces of salient-pole machines, to avoid excessive hot
spots, they shall be located so that the fan can draw cooling
air
through
the
interpolar spaces
without
perceptible
reduction of airflow.
2.4.5.2.14 Fieldpolesformachineswitha
rotor spider
design shall be mounted and secured in a mannerto prevent
unduestressesonmountingboltswhichcan
result in
premature failure. Bolt hole diameters in the spider and bolt
clearancesshallbe
sized to ensure that the boltsremain
properlycenteredunderallconditionsofinstallationand
operation.
2.4.5.2.6 The material and processesused to fabricate
copper and copper alloybars and end rings shall be selected
to minimize hydrogenembrittlement.[ESP]
O
2.4.5.2.7 Rotors shall be designed to withstand overspeeds
(see 2.1.4).
without
permanent
mechanical
deformation
Overspeed requirements morestringent than those of NEMA
MG 1 or IEC 34-1, will be specified by the purchaser.[ESP]
2.4.6
2.4.6.1
2.4.5.2.10 Fans may be inteamally cast with the end rings
or separately mounted. Separable fans shall be permanently
indexed angularly and axially and mounted
by one ofthe
following methods:
a. Split hub on shaft.
b. Bolted or welded to the rotor retaining ring or to the field
winding support.
c. Shrink fit or directly bolted onshaft or hub.
d. Spider or endplate mounted.
Slipfitted fans securedto the shaft by means ofset screws
only are not acceptable. Removaland reassembly of the fans
on the rotor shall not change the rotor balance enough to
exceed the allowable residual unbalance limits.[ESP]
2.4.5.2.11 Fans shall be capableofbeingbalancedin
accordance with 2.4.6.3. Welding is not an acceptable means
of balancing a fan. [ESP]
2.4.5.2.12 Formachineshaving
fans withtipspeeds in
excess of 76 meters per second (15,ooO feet per minute), the
designofthestressedpartsof
fans shallincludeproper
evaluation of stress concentrationfactors (SCF) forthe
geometry. The design of stressed rotating parts shall include
fillets that will limit the SCF. Areas of concern include the
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Resonances
2.4.6.1.1 Lateralnatural frequencies whichcanlead
to
resonanceamplification of vibrationamplitudesshall
be
removedfromthe
operating speedfrequencyandother
significant exciting frequencies (see 1.5.1 1) by at least 15
percent.Machinesintended
for continuousoperation on
adjustable speed drives shall meet this requirement over the
specified speed range.[ESP]
2.4.5.2.8 Theend
ring and bars shallbereplaceable
without damageto air passages or laminations.
2.4.5.2.9 Rotorswithremovablesolidpoleheadsshall
have easily removable field cgils. The bolts that retain the
laminated or solid pole heads shall be secured by a method
that aIlows easy removal of the bolts andis approved by the
purchaser.
DYNAMlCS
O
2.4.6.1 .2 If the machineis to be supported in the fieldby a
structure other than a massive foundation, the purchaser will
specify this on thedata sheets, and the vendor shall supply
the
so thata
followingdata, as a minimum, to the purchaser
systemdynamic analysis can be madeandanadequate
foundation designed:
a. A detailed shaft section model with
masses, mass elastic
data including mass and rotational inertia
(WP),
shaft section
lengths, and inner and
outer diameters.
b. Fortheminimumandmaximumdesignbearingclearances and maximum oil
operating temperature, an eight-coefficient bearing model with damping and spring constants.
c. Horizontal and vertical bearing-housing stiffness.
Note 1: The rigidity of a foundation is a relative quantity. It must be compared with the rigidity of the machine bearing system. The ratio of bearinghousing vibration to foundation vibration is a characteristic quantity for the
evaluation of foundation flexibility influences. One indicationthat a foundation is massive is ifthe Vibration amplitudes of the foundation (in any direction) near the machine feet or base frame m less than 30 percent of the
amplitudes that could be measured at the adjacent bearing housing in any
direction.
Note 2: A massive foundation is recommended. The natural frequencies of
the foundation after
the machine is erected must differ byat least 520 percent
from one andtwo times the running-speed frequency andby at least S O perCent from one and two times the electric linefrequency.
Note 3: See API Recommended Practice 684 and Recommended Practice
686 for additional information.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
14
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500 KVA AND LARGER
2.4.6.2
Dynamic Analysis
In Customary units,
2.4.6.2.1 When specified, a rotor dynamic analysis shall be
performed by the motor vendor in accordance with 2.4.6.2.2.
The vendor shall identify the foundation data required from
the purchaser to perform this analysis. [ESP]
L,. =
in milsor micrometers peakto peak.
N = operatingspeednearestthecritical
of concern, in
revolutions per minute.
This unbalance shall be no less than two times the unbalance definedby the following equation:
In SI units,
a. Foundation stiffness and damping.
b. Support (base, frame, bearing-housing, and bearing tilting
padorshell)stiffness,mass,anddamping
characteristics,
including effects of rotational speed variation. The vendor
shall state the assumed support system values and the basis
for these values (for example, tests of identical rotor support
systems, assumed values).
c. Bearing lubricant-film stiffness and damping characteristics including changes dueto speed, load, preload, oil temperatures, accumulated assembly tolerances, and maximum to
minimum clearances.
d.Startingconditions,operatingspeedranges(including
agreed-upon testconditions if different fromthose specified),
trip speed, and coast-down conditions.
e. Rotor masses, including the stiffness, and damping effects
(for example, accumulated fit tolerances).
f. Mass moment of the coupling half.
g. Asymmetrical loading (for example, eccentric clearances).
h. For machines equipped with antifrictionbearings, the vendor shall state the bearing stiffness and damping values used
for the analysis and either the basis for these values or the
assumptions madein calculating the values. [ESP]
In SI units,
L, = 2 . 5 . 4 d F
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
12,000
L,. = vibrationlimit(amplitudeofunfilteredvibration),
2.4.6.2.2.1 The
damped
unbalanced
response
analysis
shall includebutshallnotbelimited
to the following
considerations:
a. A plot and identification of the mode shape at each resonant speed from zeroto trip, as well as the next mode occurring above thet i p speed.
b. Frequency, phase, andresponseamplitude
data atthe
vibration probe locations through the range of each critical
speed, using the following arrangement of unbalance for the
particular mode. This unbalance shallbe sufficient to raise the
displacement of the rotor at the probe locations to the vibration limit defined by the following equation:
/G
Where:
2.4.6.2.2 When
specified,
the
vendor
shall
provide
a
damped unbalanced response analysis for each machme to
assure acceptable amplitudes of vibration at any speed from
zero to trip. [ESP]
2.4.6.2.2.2 As minimum,
a
the
damped
unbalanced
response analysis shall include the following:
15
U, = 6,350WfN
(4)
In Customary units,
= 4WfN
(5)
Where:
= input unbalance from the rotor dynamic response
analysis, in gam-millimeters (ounce-inches).
W = journal static weight load, in pounds, or for bend-
ing modes where the maximum deflection occurs
at theshaft ends, the overhung weight load(that is,
the weight outboard of the bearing), in kilograms
(pounds).
N = operating speed nearest the critical of concern, in
revolutions per minute.
The unbalance weight or weights shall be placed at the
locations that have been analytically determined to affect the
particular mode most adversely. For translatory modes, the
unbalance shall be based on both journal static weights and
shall be applied at the locations of maximum displacement.
be based on thejourFor conical modes, each unbalance shall
nal weight and shall be applied at the location of maximum
displacement of the mode nearest the
journal used for the
unbalance calculation, 180 degrees out of phase.
c. Modal diagrams for each response in Item b above, indicating the phase and major-axis amplitude at each coupling
engagement plane, the centerlines of the bearings, the locations of the vibration probes, and each seal area throughout
the machine.
d. When an unbalanceresponsetest is specified (4.3.5.4),
additional unbalance weightsof 4U, (see Equation 4) shall be
placed at the balance planes in phase and
also 180 degrees out
of phase for correlation with the test data.
e. A stiffnessmap of theundamped rotor responsefrom
which the damped unbalanced response analysis specified in
Item c above was derived. This plot shall show frequency versus support system stiffness, with thecalculated support system stiffness curves superimposed.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D * A P I / P E T R O STD 5llb-ENGL L777 M 0732290 0 5 b 7 9 5 2
325 œ
16
API STANDARD
546
f. For machines whose bearing support system stiffness values (excluding the oilfilm) are less than or equal to 3.5 times
the bearing oil film stiffness values, the calculated frequencydependentsupportstiffnessanddampingvalues(impedances) or the values derived from modal testing.The results
of the damped unbalancedresponseanalysisshallinclude
Bode plots thatcompareabsoluteshaftmotionwith
shaft
motion relative to the bearing housing.[ESP]
Note: For machines rated at less than or equal to 1,800 rpm it may be necessary to incrase the weightof the added unbalance weights toget a sufficient
unbalance response.
2.4.62.3 When
specified,
the
mechanical-equipment
vendor, the electrical equipment vendor,or both shall perform
a steady-state and transient torsional and
stress analysis of the
electrical and mechanical equipment, including gears, motordrivenpumps,andfan-orturbine-assistedunits.The
mechanical-equipmentvendorshallberesponsible
for the
completeandsatisfactoryperformanceoftheunits.The
electrical equipment vendor
shall be responsible for providing
the physical data required for the torsional analysis to the
purchaser or mechanical-equipment vendor, as specified and
in a timely mannerto allow for any system modification that
might be necessary (see 1.4). Thetorsional analysis shall
be limited to the following:
include but shall not
a. A complete description of the method used to complete
the analysis.
b. A graphic display ofthe mass-elastic system.
c. A tabulation identifying the mass moment and torsional
stiffness for each component identified in the mass-elastic
system.
d. A graphic display or expression of any torsional excitation
versus speedor time.
e. For the starting torsional study, the motor speed torque
curveand the twice slip frequencypulsatingtorquecurve
shall be furnished for both rated voltageat an infinitebus and
the minimum starting conditions.
f. A graphic display of torsional critical speeds and deflections (a mode shape diagram).
The torsional analysis shall confirm that within
the operating speed range, the frequency ofthe torsional modes of the
complete rotating train is at least 15 percent removed from
any important excitation frequencies including both one and
two times the line frequency. For trains with adjustable-speed
drivers, the operating speed includes operation up to the trip
speed. If this requirement cannot be achieved, calculations
shall be made to determine the maximum stresses, the frequency at which they occur, and the fatigue life of each elementin the train. These calculations shall be given to the
purchaser and to the mechanical-equipment vendor,the elecmcal equipment vendor, or both for approval. For adjustable
speed drives, the torsional analysis shall also verify that the
calculated shaft torque at any resonance points upto the max-
maximum
imum operating speed does not exceed the allowed
stress. [ESP]
2.4.6.3
Balancing
2.4.6.3.1 Allrotorsshall be dynamicallybalanced in two
at speeds in
or more planes. When specified, rotors operating
excess ofthefirstactuallateralcriticalspeedshall
be
balancedin at least threeplanes,includinga
rotor center
plane. When a keywayis provided for a coupling hubor fan,
the rotor shall be balancedwiththekeywayfittedwitha
crowned half-key, or its dynamic equivalent,to fill the usable
length of theshaft keyway. [ESP]
2.4.6.3.2 Balance weights addedto the final assemblyshall
be readily removable and replaceable and madeof AIS1 300
series stainless steel or apurchaser-approvedcorrosionresistant material. If parent metal isto be removed to achieve
dynamic or static balance, it shall be drilled out in a manner
that maintains the structural integrity of the rotor and does not
causeharmful
or distortivehot
spots duringoperation.
Chiseling, sawing, or torch burning is not permitted. The use
of solder or similar deposits for balancing purposes is not
acceptable. [ESP]
2.4.6.3.3 Rotorbalancing shall not be accomplished by
on the fan blades. After final
addingbalanceweights
balancing of two-poleandfour-pole rotors, the fans, and
other removable rotor components shall beinstalledand
component (step) balanced. [ESP]
2.4.6.3.4 When
specified,
balanced
a half-coupling
furnished by the purchaser shallbe mounted on the rotor, and
be rechecked. Any increasein
the rotor balanceshall
unbalance shall be reported to the purchaser.Any corrections
to the rotor balance shall be mutually agreed upon by the
purchaser and the machinevendor.Anycorrections to the
be mutuallyagreedupon
by the
couplingbalanceshall
[ESP]
purchaser, coupling vendor and machine vendor.
Note: Excessiveradial shaft runout can cause high vibration after a balanced
coupling has been mounted onthe rotor. Shaft-extension radial runout should
be checked against the vendor's drawings prior to making any corrections.
[ESPI
2.4.6.3.5 For the finalbalancingoftherotorin
the
balancing device, the maximum allowable residual unbalance
in the correction plane (journal) shall be calculated from the
following equation:
In SI units,
ffB=
In Customary units,
= 4wrINmc
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
6350W,/Nrnc
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO S T D 5qb-ENGL 1777 m 0732290 05b7453 2bL m
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500 KVA ANO LARGER
Where:
shall
machines
vertical for bearings
Thrust
c.
be rated for
ABMA Ll0 life of 5,000 hours (minimum continuous service
at 200 percent of the maximum up and down thrust the load
may develop during starting, stopping or while operating at
any capacity on the rated performance curve). [ESP]
UB = residualunbalance,ingram-millimeters(ounceinches).
W, = journal static loading, determined from the mass
distribution in therotor, inkilograms(pounds).
(Typically one-halfrotor weight)
N,, = maximumcontinuous speed, in revolutionsper
minute.
2.4.7.3 Hydrodynamicradialbearingsshallbesplit
for
or pad
ease of assembly, precision bored, and of the sleeve
type, with steel- or bronze-backed babbitted replaceable liners, pads, or shells. These bearings shall be equipped with
antirotationdevicesandshallbepositivelysecuredinthe
axial direction. The bearing design shall suppress hydrodynamicinstabilitiesandprovidesufficientdamping
to limit
rotor vibration to the maximum specified amplitudes while
or unloadedatspecified
themachineisoperatingloaded
operatingspeeds,includingoperation
at anycritical frequency if that frequency is a normal operating speed. The
bearings on each end of horizontal machines shall be identical.Thedesignofthebearinghousingshallnotrequire
removal of the lower half of end bellsor plates, ductwork, or
the coupling hubto permit replacementof the bearing liners,
pads, or shells. Bearing temperatures measured with bearing
93°C (200°F)at
metal temperature detectors shall not exceed
rated operating conditions. [MSP]
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Abalancingdeviceis
either aconventionalbalancing
machine or the actual machine frame assembly withthe rotor
is used as abalance
installed.Whenthemachineframe
device,theresidualunbalanceoftherotorshall
be determined in accordance with2.4.6.3.6and AppendixC.[ESP]
Note: Appendix C provides a method of determining the residual unbalance
machine sensitivremaining in the completely assembled rotor and balancing
ity check.
2.4.6.3.6 Where a rotoris unsymmetrical, or the correction
planes are unsymmetricallylocated, the allocationof residual
unbalancebetweenthecorrectionplanes
by reference to
this case the
journal static loading may not be appropriate. In
proportionate
allocation
of
residual
unbalance
to the
correction planes should be determined by reference to I S 0
1940/1. However, the total residual unbalance should be less
the IS0
than 4W/Nmc,where W is the rotor mass, and not
1940/1 balance grade. [ESP]
2.4.6.4
2.4.7.4 Ball-typethrustbearingsshallbe
of theduplexmatched, single-row, 40-degree, angular-contact type (Series
7000) installed backto back. A spherical roller thrust bearing
may be used for high thrust loads. [MSP]
Vibration
2.4.7.5 Thrustbearingsforverticalmachinesshallbe
on
top and preloaded. Multiple bearings to accommodate thrust
in the same direction shall notbe permitted. [MSP]
Machines shall be designed so that they meet the acceptance criteria stated in 4.3.3. [ESP]
2.4.7BEARINGSANDBEARINGHOUSINGS
O
Note: Spherical roller bearingsoften have springs designedto compress with
the down thrust and if the thrust
is less than design, the rotor rides higher than
normal and there will be increased vibration during no load testing. Vendor
shall notify the purchaser on the proposal data
sheet if this condition will
exist.
2.4.7.1 Unlessotherwisespecified,hydrodynamicradial
bearings (sleeveor tilting pad,for example) shall be provided
on all horizontal machines.
2.4.7.6 Antifriction bearings shall be retained on the shaft
and fitted into housings in accordance with the requirements
of ABMA Standard 7 or IS0 286-1 or 286-2; however, the
device used to lock ball thrust bearings to the shaft shall be
restricted by a nut with a tongue-type lockwasher, for example, Series W per ABMA Standard8.2. [MSP]
Note: To limit bearing babbitt wear, bearings and lubrication should
be evaluated for applications of hydraulic jackmg means when applying hydrodynamic bearings in machines whichrequire multiple starts per day. @SPI
O
2.4.7.2 Antifrictionbearingsshall
beused
for vertical
machines and, when specified, for horizontal machines, provided that the following conditionsare met:
a. The dN factor is less than 300,000. [The dN factor is the
product of bearing size (bore) in millimeters and the rated
speed in revolutions per minute].
b. Standard antifnction bearings meet an ABMA L,,rating
life of either 100,000 hours with continuous operation
at rated
loads
conditions or 50,000 hours at maximum axial and radial
and rated speed. (TheL,,rating life is the number of hours at
rated bearing load and speed that 90 percent of a group of
or exceed before the firsteviidentical bearings will complete
dence of failure. See ABMA Standard 9 or Standard l l , as
applicable orI S 0 281 or I S 0 76).
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
17
2.4.7.7 Except for the angular-contact bearings and lower
guidebearingsinverticalmachines,antifrictionbearings
shall have an internal clearancefit equivalent to ABMA Symbol 3, as defined in ABMA Standard 20 or IS0 15, 492, or
5753. Single- or double-row bearings shall be of the Conrad
type. Filling-slot (maximum-load) antifriction bearings shall
not be used. [MSP]
2.4.7.8 Bearings shall be electrically insulated. A shorting
device shall be provided in the bearing housing on the drive
end. For double-end drivers, the coupling on one end also
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO STD Sqb-ENGL L777
API STANDARD 546
2.4.7.10.2 Thrustloads
for diaphraagm- anddisk-type
couplings shall be calculated on the basis of the maximum
allowable deflection permittedby the coupling manufacturer.
[MW
shall be electrically insulated and the bearing housing shorting device provided on the oppositeend. [ESP]
2.4.7.9 Hydrodynamic thrust bearings for vertical
machines shall beof the babbitted multiple-seDrnent type.
Tilting-pad bearings shall incorporate a self-leveling feature
which assures that each segmentcarries an equal share of the
thrust load. With minor variation in pad thickness, each pad
shall be designed and manufactured with dimensional precision (thickness variation) that will allow interchange of individual pads. The thrust collar shall be replaceable. Fretting
and axial movement shall be prevented either by positively
locking the collar to the shaft or by another method. The
thrust faces of the collar shall have a surface finish ofnot
more than 0.5 micrometer (16 microinches) R, and the total
indicated axial runout ofeither thrust face shall not exceed12
micrometers (0.0005 inch). Split thrust collars are not acceptable. [MSP]
2.4.7.1 1 Bearinghousings for pressure-lubricatedhydrodynamicbearingsshall be arranged to minimizefoaming.
The drain system shall be adequate to maintain the oil and
foam level below shaft end seals and to allow a sufficient oil
level for oil-flinger-disk or oil-ring operation.
For all hydrodynamic bearings, when the inlet oil temperatureis 49°C (12OoF), theriseinoiltemperature(inlet
to
drain) shall not exceed 28°C (50°F) under the most adverse
specified operating conditions. When the inlet oil temperature
to
exceeds 49°C ( 120"F), special consideration shall be given
rise.
bearing design, oilflow,andallowabletemperature
[MSPI
O
O
2.4.7.10 Hydrodynamic
thrust
bearings
for vertical
machines shall be sized for continuous operation at no more
than 50 percent of the bearing manufacturer's continuous catalog rating. In addition to thrust from therotor weight, maximumaxialforcefromthedrivenequipmenttransmitted
through the coupling shall be considered a part ofthe duty of
any thrust bearing. The momentary down thrust capability
shall remain within the bearings catalog rating. Conservative
thrust bearing ratings are required due to possible inaccurate
pump thrust data. [MSP]
Note: Operating thrust bearings at 50 percent of the rating will cause an oversize bearing to be used. This will mult in an increase in the bearing losses.
2.4.7.10.1 Fornonaxially
locating gear- or spline-type
couplings, where sliding may take place at the tooth mesh,
the transmitted external axial force shall be calculated from
the following equation:
In SI units,
F = 19,095p-P r
Nrd
(8)
In Customary units,
Where:
F
P,
N,
d
=
=
=
=
external force, in kilo-newtons (pounds).
rated power, in kilowatts (horsepower).
rated speed, in revolutions per minute.
gear tooth PitchCircle Diameter (PCD) in millimeters (inches) (Use d = 2 times the shaft diameterif
coupling details are unknown).
C L = coefficient of friction at the gear teeth. (use p =
0.25 unless a definite valueis available).
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
2.4.7.1 2 On horizontal machines, bearing housings for oillubricated non-pressure-fed bearings shall have oil reservoirs
of sufficient depthto serve as settlingchambers. The oil sump
temperatureshallnotexceed
82°C(180"F), basedonthe
specified operating conditions and an ambient temperature
of
40°C (104°F). The housings shall be provided with tapped
andpluggedfillopenings
at least]/,-inchNationalPipe
Thread 0 in size which conforms to IS0 7 or IS0 228.
The return line connection on the bearing housing shall be
sized to meet the requirements of2.4.8.8.2 return line sizing.
When specified, the housings shall be equipped with constant-level sight-feed oilers at least 0.25 liter (8 ounces) in
size, with a positive level positioner (not a set screw), transparentcontainers(notsubject
to sunlight- or heat-induced
opacity or deterioration), protective wire cages, and supplemental support in addition to the piping. A permanent indication of the proper oil level shall be accurately located and
clearly marked on the outside of the bearing housing with
permanentmetaltags,marksinscribedinthecastings,
or
another durable means. If the oil-level indicator breaks accidentally, the resulting drop in oil level shall notresult in loss
of bearing lubrication, that is, reduction of the oil level below
the level requiredfor oil-ring operating.[ESP]
2.4.7.13 Housings for ring-oil-lubricated bearings shall be
providedwithplugged
ports positioned to allowvisual
inspection of the oil rings while the equipment is running.
This is not requiredon TEFC enclosures.[ESP]
2.4.7.14 The requirements of 2.4.7.14.1 through 2.4.7.14.4
apply when oil mist lubrication or oil mist purging is specified.
2.4.7.14.1 Anoilmist
inlet connection, ]/,-inchnominal
pipe size, shall be provided in the top half of the bearing
housing. The pure-or purge-oil mist fitting connections shall
be located so that oil mist will flow through the antifriction
bearings. [MSP]
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
18
m
0732270 05b7115'i LTB
2.4.7.14.2 A ventconnection,’/,-inchnominalpipesize,
shall be provided on the housingor end cover for each of the
spaces between antifriction bearings and the housing shaft
closures. [MSP]
2.4.7.14.3 Whenpure- or purge-oilmistlubricationis
specified,shielded or sealedbearingsshallnotbeused.
[MSPI
300 series stainless steel or 90-10 copper nickel with welded
or brazed joints without internal fittings. Coils shall have a
nominal thickness ofat least 1.0 millimeters (0.042 inch) and
a diameter ofat least 12.0 millimeters( V 2 inch). [MSP]
o B 2.4.7.1 9 Whenspecified,bearing-oiltemperatureindicators shall be provided on the bearing housing of nonpressureloss of
fed bearings. If the sensor cannot be removed without
oil, a themowell shall be provided. [MSP]
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2.4.7.14.4 When pure-oil mist lubrication is specified, oil
rings or flingers (if any) and constant-level oilers shall not be 2.4.7.20 At ambient temperature, the fit between the outprovided, and a mark indicating the oil level is not required.
be line
side of the bearing shell and the bearing housing shall
However, when purge- or condensing-oil mist lubrication is
to line (zero clearance) and shall preferably
be a light interferspecified, these items shall be provided and the oiler shall be
ence fit. [ESP]
piped so that it is maintained at the internal pressure of the
O 2.4.7.21 Shaft seals shall be designed as follows:
bearing housing. [MSP]
a. Frame shaft seals shallbe of nonsparking materials, of the
2.4.7.15 Bearing-housingmountingsurfacesshall
beflat
split type to allow replacement without removal of the rotor
and in the same plane, machined perpendicular to or parallel
or coupling, and centerable about the shaft. Where aluminum
with the bearing bore, as required. [MSP]
0.2 percent.
is used, it shall have a copper content of less than
2.4.7.16 Bearinghousingsshall be positivelylocated by
Where end-shield-supported bearings are used,the inner seal
cylindrical precision dowels or rabbeted fits. Bearing housshall be maintained at atmospheric pressure.Pressure balancings and support structures shall be designed so that, upon
ing from the cooling fan shall be by use of copper or steel
assembly, none ofthe air-gap measurements taken inat least
tubing, unless other materials are approved bythe purchaser.
three positions (spaced 90 degrees apart) at each end of the
Seals shall be designed to minimize the entry of fumes, dirt,
stator deviates from the limits given below for the stator gap, and other foreign materialinto the stator housing. When
specas defined by the following equation:
ified, seals shall be constructed so .that a purge gas can be
introduced. If possible,self-aligningsealsshallbeused.
D = [(H - L)/A]100
(10)
When specified the shaft seals shall be fabricated from electrically non-conducting materials.
Where:
b. Bearing
housings
for
horizontal
machines
shall
be
equipped with split labyrinth-type end
seals and deflectors
D = percentage deviation.
where the shaft passes through the housing. Lip-type seals
H = highest ofthe readings at one end of the stator.
shall not be used. The deflectors shallbe made of non-sparkL = lowest of the readings at the same end of the stator.
ing materials.
A = average of the readings at the same end of the stator.
The air gap between the exterior of the rotor and the interior of the stator mustbe measured at both ends of the stator.
Measurements should be taken at the same positions on both
10 percent of
ends. The percentage deviation shall not exceed
the mainair gap, or15 percent of the exciter air gap. This data
shall be recorded and made part ofthe final report. To allow
for accurate measurement, stator surfaces at the measuring
positions shall befree from resin buildup.[ESP]
2.4.7.1 7 Bearing housings shall be machined for mounting
vibration detectors as described in 3.8. [ESP]
2.4.7.18 Sufficientcooling,includinganallowancefor
fouling, shall be provided to maintain the oil temperaturesin
accordance with 2.4.7.3, 2.4.7.11, and 2.4.7.12. Where water
cooling is required,water jackets shallhaveonlyexternal
connections between the upper and lower housing
jackets and
shall have neither gasketed nor threaded connection
joints,
which may allow water to leak into the oil reservoir. If cooling coils and external fittings are used, they shall be of AIS1
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
The design of the deflectors shall effectively retain oil in
the housing and prevent entry
of foreign material into the
housing. No oil shall leak past the seals, during both stationary andoperatingconditions,while
circulating lube oil.
[ESPI
2.4.8
LUBRICATION
2.4.8.1 Unlessotherwisespecified,bearingsand the bearing housing shall use hydrocarbon oil and shall be arranged
for a flinger- or ring-type lubrication system in accordance
with the bearing manufacturer’s recommendations for using
hydrocarbon oil. [ESP]
2.4.8.2 Oil flinger disks or oil rings shall have a minimum
submergence of 6 millimeters (Il4 inch) above the lower edge
of a flinger or above the lower edge of the bore
of an oil ring.
Oil slingers shall have mounting hubs to maintain concenmcity and shall be positively secured to the shaft. An oil r i n d
flinger shallbe provided and sized to prevent bearing damage
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
42
Horizontal
runs
shall
slope
continuously,
at
least
millimeters per meter( V 2 inch per foot), toward the reservoir.
If possible,laterals(notmore than oneinanytransverse
plane) should enter drain headers at 45-degree angles in the
O 2.4.8.3
When specified for oil-flinger-disk lubricated beardirectionoftheflow.Nonconsumablebackupringsand
ings, thermostatically controlled heating devices shall be probe capable
sleeve-type joints shall notbe used. Oil filters shall
vided in the bearing housings. The heating devices shall have
of withstandingthespecifiedoil-supplyheaderpressure.
sufficient capacityto heat the oil in the bearing housing from
Pressure piping downstream of oil filters shall be free from
the specified minimum site ambient temperature to the veninternalobstructionsthatcouldaccumulate
dirt. Unless
dor's minimum required temperature in4 hours. The thermootherwise specified, oil-supply piping and tubing, including
static
enclosure
shall
compatible
be
with
the
area
fittings (excluding slipon flanges), shall be AIS1 300 series
classification requirements. (Referto 2.4.8.8.8 for heat-denstainless steel. [MSP]
sity limitations). [ESP]
O 2.4.8.4
Where a pressurized or circulating lubrication sys- O 2.4.8.8.3 When specified, a mainoilpumpdrivenbythe
tem is required by a gear, the mechanical equipment, or both, electrical equipment shaft andoil rings or flinger discs shall
beprovided for shutdownandemergencyoperation.See
the electrical equipment bearing oil maybe supplied from
2.4.8.8.5 for start-up considerations. [ESP]
that system, when specified. The purchaser will specify the
supplier of the complete lubrication system. [ESP]
2.4.8.8.4 Oil pumps shall be positive displacement pumps
e 2.4.8.5 Whereoil is supplied from a commonsystem to
(rotary screwor gear type). Unless the oilpump or pumps are
two or more machines (such as a compressor, a gear, and a
enclosed in a reservoir, they shall have steel cases. [MSP]
motor), the oil's characteristics will be specified on the data
Pump performance curves shall confirm less than 15 percent
sheets by the purchaser on the basis of mutual agreement with loss of flow withpressure increaseof 6.8 bar (100 pounds per
all vendors supplying equipment served by the common oil
square inch). Pumps shall be foot mounted and close coupled
may be
to C face motorto avoid alignment problems. (Pumps
system. [ESP]
C
face
vertical
motor
if
vertical
type
close
coupled
to
Note: The usual lubricant employed in a common oil system is a hydrocarsubmerged in reservoir.) Each pump shall have an external
bon oil that corresponds to IS0 Grade 32, as specified in IS0 3448.
reliefvalvemounteddownstreamofthe
pump toavoid
2.4.8.6 The vendor shall state in the operating manual the
damage to console components (internal relief valves are
not
amount of lubricating oil required and the specifications for
a maximumspeedof
acceptable).Pumpsshalloperateat
the oil. [MSPJ
1,800 rpm. Motors shall bein accordance withIEEE 841.
2.4.8.7 When specified, pressurized oil systems shall con0 2.4.8.8.5 When
specified, a separately
driven,
form to the requirementsof API Standard614. [ESP]
automatically controlled standby pump shallbe provided for
e 2.4.8.8 When pressure lubrication systems for the machine
equipment that will operate at idling speeds or will require
other than those describedin API Standard 614 are specified,
rapid starting.
they shall consist of an oil pump or pumps
(2) with a suction
strainer, a supply-and-returnsystem, an oilcooler(when
O 2.4.8.8.6
An oil cooler shall beprovided to maintainthe
required), a pressure control valve, a flow sight glass, a fulllube-oil supply temperature at or below 50°C (120'F). The
flow filter or duplex filter, a low lube-oil pressure shutdown
cooler shall be of a water-cooled, shell-and-tube type orof a
switch, a pressure switch to start the second pump (if specisuitable air-cooled type, as specified. Shell-and-tube-coolers
fied), a pressure switch for alarm (if specified),
a temperature
shall have wateron the tube side.A removable-bundle design
switch for high temperature alarm, a low level alarm switch,
is required for coolers with more than 0.46 square meter (5
pressure indicators downstream of each pump and at the oil
square
feet)
of surface,
unless
otherwise
specified.
outlet, temperature indicators at the oil reservoir and downshall be
in
accordance
with
Removable-bundlecoolers
stream oftheoilcooler,
a differentialpressureindicator
TEMA Class C and shall be constructed with a removable
of
across thefilterorfiltersand
a fulllengthlevelindicator
channel cover. Tubes shall not have an outside diameter
2.4.8.8.1
mounted onthereservoir.Therequirementsof
less than 16 millimeters ( V 8 inch), and the tube wall shall not
through 2.4.8.8.9 shall apply. [ESP]
have a thickness of less than1.25 millimeters (0.049inch). Ubend tubes are not permitted. The vendor shall state the lube2.4.8.8.1 Oil-containing
pressure
components
shall
be
oil pressure at the cooler outlet so that the purchaser can
steel. [ESP]
providewateratlowerpressure,ifdesired,
to prevent
contamination of the lube oil in the event of cooler failure.
2.4.8.8.2 Oil return lines shall be sized to run no more than
The cooler shallbe equipped with vent anddrain connections
half full andshall be arrangedtoensuregooddrainage
(recognizing
the
possibility
on the oil and water sides. The vendor shall include
of foaming
conditions).
in the
during coastdown without forced lubrication. If oil rings are
not practical, as with tilting pad bearings, the vendor shall
advise and obtain approval from the purchaser. [ESP]
*.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD*API/PETRO STD 54b-ENGL L997 M 0732270 0 5 b 7 9 5 7 707
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHlNE"500
proposal complete details of any proposed air-cooled cooler.
Internal oil coolers are not acceptable. [MSP]
Oil cooler shall have a carbon steel
shell, 304SS or copper
nickel tubes (asspecified), and tube sheets of 304SS or copper nickel (asspecified).
KVA AND LARGER
m
21
heaters shall haveabuilt-inthermostattocontrol
the heat
outputanda NEMA 7 enclosureforhazardouslocations.
Heater elements shallbe Incoloy. Heaters of less than 7.5 kW
shall be the screw plug type. Larger heaters shall be flanged
type. Steam coils (if used) shall be removable for service and
or thermal
operate in a suitable heating medium (i.e. glycol
fluid).
2.4.8.8.7 Full-flowfilterswithreplaceableelementsand
filtration of 10 microns nominal or finer shall be supplied.
2.4.8.8.9 AnAIS1 304 series stainless steel oil reservoir,
The filters shall be located downstream of the cooler. For
separate from the base, shall be supplied with the following
positive displacement pumps, filter cases and heads shall be
characteristics and appendages unless otherwise specified:
suitable for operation at a pressure not
less than the relief
valve setting. Filters that have covers weighing more than 16
a.Thecapacitytosettlemoistureandforeignmatteradekilograms (35 pounds) shall have cover lifters. Filters shall
quately, to avoid frequent refilling, and to provide adequate
not be equipped with a relief valve or an automatic bypass.
allowance for system rundown.
Filter cartridge materials shall be corrosion resistant. Metalb. A retention time of 8 minutes, based on normal flow and
meshorsintered-metalfilterelements
are notacceptable.
total volume below the minimum operating level.
Flow shall be from the outside toward thecenter of the filter
c.Rundowncapacitythatincludestheoilcontainedin
all
cartridge. When the filter design requires cartridges stacked
components, bearing andseal housings, controlelements, and
two or more high, a center post and aforcap
the top cartridge
vendor-furnished piping thatdrains back to the reservoir. The
shall be used to secure the cartridgesto the bottomof the filter
rundown capacity shall also include an allowance of at least
housing. If the cartridge-to-caruidgejoint isnot self-aligning,
10 percentfor the purchaser's interconnecting piping.
a collar shall be used between the stackedcartridges to ensure
d. Provisions to eliminate airand to minimize flotation of
alignment. The pressure drop for clean filter elements shall
foreign matter to the pump suction (i.e. baffles between the
not exceed 15 percent of the total allowable dirty pressure
oil inlet and the pump suction and wire mesh
stminers for
drop, or 0.34 bar (5 pounds per square inch) at an operating
each pump).
temperatureof38°C
(IOOOF) andnormalflow.Cartridges
e. Fill connections, levelindicators,andbreathers
suitable
shall have a minimum collapsing differential pressure of 4.8
for outdoor use.
bar (70 pounds per square inch). The filtershall be equipped
f. Slopedbottoms,connections for complete drainage and
withavalvedventandclean-anddirty-sidevalveddrain
drain valve (ball type).
connections.Thedirty-sideconnections
shall belocated
g. Cleanout openings as large as is practicable.
lower inthehousingthanthefilter
element or cartridge
h. An interior that has been descaled and protected from rust
support base. Where a specific filter element is desired, the
by the manufacturer's approved process. (A permanent surpurchaser will specify the manufacturer and model number of face coating shall notbe applied without the purchaser's spethe element. When specified, duplex filters with a constantcific approval.) [MSP]
flow switch valve (carbon steel construction with a S S plug)
i. Minimum 7 gauge [4.6 millimeter (0.18 inch)] wall thickshall be provided. [MSP] The filter housing shall be carbon
ness.
steel or 304SS constructionas specified.
2.4.8.8.10 Piping, hand valves, andor tubing shall be 304
Note: Micron particle size implies the shape of a spherical bead; thus, a 1 0 or 316SS construction.Tubing fittings shallbe 316SS. Piping
micron particle is a sphere with a diameter of 10 microns. Within the eleshall be a minimum of Schedule 40, socket welded if 1 inch
ment's recommended maximum pressure drop, 10 microns nominal implies
that the efficiency of the filter on particles that are 10 microns or larger in
or less diameter and butt welded
if larger. Tube wallthickness
diameter will be no less than 90 percent for t h e life of the element. Absolute
shall be aminimumof
2.4 millimeters (0.095 inches).
micron particle ratings are different. A micron-absolute filter rating implies
Flanges for larger than 1 inch pipe to be 304SS weld neck
a filter ratthat no particles of the rating sizeor larger will pass; for example,
ing may be. 10 microns nominal and 15 microns absolute. [MSP]
type. Slip-on flanges are not acceptable. Console vendor to
ASME B3 1.3 and
submit welder qualifications for piping per
O B 2.4.8.8.8 When
specified,
removable
a
steam-heating
for welding of reservoir. Weld samples to be submitted with
elementexternaltotheoilreservoir
or athermostatically
qualifications for approval.
controlledelectricimmersionheatershall
be providedfor
heatingthechargecapacityofoilbeforestart-up
in cold
2.4.8.8.11 Console to be submitted to cleanlinesstest as
weather. The heating device shall have sufficient capacity to
specified in API614. Console to be run tested for a minimum
heat the oil in the reservoir from the specified minimum site
of 4 hoursafter successful completion of thecleanliness test.
ambient temperature to the manufacturer's required start-up
Certifiedtestreportis
to besubmittedtopurchaserwith
temperature within 4 hours. If an electric immersion heateris
settings for valves, switches and other applicable items noted
used, it shall have a maximum watt density of 2.3 watts per
on the test report form. Purchaser may choose to witness tests
square centimeter (15 watts per square inch). [MSP] Electric
as noted on the purchase order,or data sheets.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
~~
2.4.10.1.1 Minor parts that
are
not
identified
(such
as nuts,
springs, washers,gaskets,andkeys)shallhavecorrosion
resistance equal to that of specified parts that will operate in
the sameenvironment. All hardwareused for thepurchaser
interface shallbeinaccordancewith
applicable local
standards. [ESP]
e 2.4.10.1.2 Thepurchaser willspecifyanycorrosive agents
presentintheenvironment,including
constituents thatmay
cause stress corrosion cracking. [MSP]
2.4.10.1.3 Where mating parts such as studs and nuts of
18-8 stainless steel or materialshavingsimilar
galling
tendencies are used, they shall be lubricated with a suitable
antiseizurecompound. [MSP]
defective material has been removed.
not covered
by ASm
purchaser,s approval. [MSPl
2.4.102.4 Fullyenclosedcoredvoids,includingvoids
closedbyplugging,areprohibited.[MSP]
m
2.4.10.2.5 Nodulariron castings shall be producedin
accordancewith ASTM A 395. Thegradeshallbespecified
bythevendor. [MSPI
2.4.1 0.3 Welding
2.4.1 0.3.1 Structural welding, including weld repairs,shall
be performedbyoperatorsandproceduresqualifiedin
accordancewith AWS D1.l and IS0 Catalog 25.160.10
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
All necessary repairs
shall be subject to the
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D Sqb-ENGL L777 m 0732270 0 5 b 7 q 5 7 7 8 T m
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS
MACHINES”500
through 25.160.50. Otherweldingcodesmay
specifically approvedby the purchaser. [MSP]
23
KVA AND LARGER
2.4.1 0.7
be usedif
Stator Lamination Core Plate
2.4.10.3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the review
of all repairs and repair welds
to ensure thatthey are properly
heattreatedandnondestructivelyexaminedforsoundness
and compliance with applicable qualified procedures. [MSP]
Stator lamination core plate shallbe of at least C-5 quality
in accordance with ASTM A345, or EN 10126 / EN10165.
C3 quality plate shall not be used dispersed or as a coating
be capable of
overC5qualityplate.Thestatorcoreshall
withstanding winding burnoutfor rewind at a temperature of
400°C (750OF)without damageor loosening. [ESP]
2.4.10.3.3 All
butt-welds
shall
continuous
be
fullpenetration welds. [MSP]
2.4.1 0.8
Heat Exchangers
OD
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Heat exchanger tubes shall be constructed
as follows:
2.4.10.3.4 Intermittent
welds, stitch welds,
and
tack
welds
O a. Ar-to-air exchanger tubes used in the tube-type machines
are notpermittedonanystructuralpartofthemachine,
shall be made of copper, copper-based alloy, aluminum, aluincluding the outer enclosure. If specifically approved by
the
minum alloy containing no more than 0.2 percent copper, or
purchaser, however, intermittent welds may be used where
significant problem-free operating experience exists and well- AISI 300 series stainless steel.
0 b.Unless otherwisespecified,water-to-airheatexchanger
established design procedures are available. [MSP]
tubes shall be not less than 16 millimeters (.625 inch) diame2.4.10.3.5 Weldingof or to shafts isnotacceptablefor
ter and 1.25 millimeters (18 BWG) wall thickness made of
balancingpurposes,
onfinishedshafts,
or ontwo-pole
90-10Cu-Nimaterial.Purchaserhastheresponsibilityto
machines. Any shafts or spiders subjectedto welding shall be
for compatibility.
have cooling waterchemistrychecked
post-weld stress relieved prior
to finish machining. [ESP]
[”I
I
l
2.4.1 0.4
For specified operating temperatures below -29°C(-20°F),
steels shallhave, at thelowestspecifiedtemperature,
an
impactstrengthsufficienttoqualifyundertheminimum
Charpy V-notch impact energy requirements of SectionVIII,
Division 1, UG-84, of the ASME Codeor IS0 9328 requirements. For materials and thicknesses not covered
by the code,
the purchaser will specify the requirements
on the data sheets.
Theuseof ASTM A515 or IS0 9328 steel is prohibited.
[MSPI
2.4.10.5 Protective Grills
or Metal Screens
Protective grills or metal screens shall be fabricated from
300 series
not less than1.25-millimeter(0.049-inch)AISI
6 millimeters
stainless steel with a maximum mesh of
inch).
,
0
2.4.1 0.6
2.4.11NAMEPLATESANDROTATION
Low Temperature
Fans
Fan systems, blades, and housings shall be designed
to prevent sparking as a result of mechanical contact or static discharge. They shall be constructed to minimize failure from
corrosion or fatigue. Materials thatare typically usedare: aluminum(withacopper
content of less than0.2 percent),
bronze, reinforced thermosetting conductive plastic (to bleed
off static charges) or epoxy coated steelfans. When specified,
the vendor shall demonstrate to the purchaser’s satisfaction
that the nonsparking qualities and durability required
are p r e
vided by the fan system. [ESP]
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
0
ARROWS
2.4.1 1.1 Nameplates and rotation arrows shall be of AISI
300 series stainless steel or of nickel-copper alloy (Monel or
its equivalent),as specified, securely fastenedby pins of similar material, and located for easy visibility. [ESP]
2.4.11.2 Asaminimum,thedatalistedbelow
clearly stamped on the machine’s nameplate(s).
shall be
a. Vendor’s name.
b. Serial number.
c. Horsepower, kVA or kW.
d.Voltages.
e. Phase.
f. Rated power factor.
g. Frequency, in hertz.
h. For antifriction bearings,themanufacturerandmodel
number.
i. For flood-lubricated bearings, the oilflow rate, in liters per
minute (gallons per minute).
j. For pressure-lubricated bearings, the oil pressurerequired,
in Newtons per square millimeter (pounds per square inch
gauge).
k. Full-load amperes (FLA).
1. Locked-rotor amperes (LM).
m. Full-load speed, in revolutions per minute.
n. Rated main-field current.
o. Rated main-field voltage.
p. Time rating.
q. Temperature rise, in de-grees Celsius; the maximum ambient or cooling-air temperature for whichthemachinewas
designed; andthe insulation system’s designation.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D = A P I / P E T R O STD Sqb-ENGL L977 m 0732290 05b7qb0 qTL m
API STANDARD546
24
r. Servicefactor.
s. Starting limitations.
t. Location of the magnetic center, per2.4.9.3. in millimeters
(inches) (from the drive-end bearing housingon a horizontal
machine witha sleeve bearing).
u. For machines installedin Class I or Class II, Division 2 or
Zone 2 locations,labeling or markingrequirements
as
required in NFPA 70 or IEC 79-10.
Note: The T Code designationsof the two systems may not be. identical
v. Enclosure type.
Total machine weight and rotor weight.
x. Year of manufacture (for example:1996).
y. Location of manufacture.
W.
2.4.1 1.3 Separate connection dia,ms or data nameplates
shall be located near the appropriate connection box for the
following:
a. Machines with more than three power leads.
b. Space heaters (operating voltage and wattage).
c.Temperaturedetectors(resistance,
in ohms, or junction
tYpe).
d. Wbration and position detectors (manufacturer and model
number.)
e. Connections of proper rotation (including bidirectional).
f. Currenttransformersecondaryleads(whenprovided),
with polarity marks. [ESP]
e 2.4.11.4 Whenspecified,thepurchaser’sidentification
information shall be stamped on a separate nameplate. [ESP]
SECTION 3-ACCESSORIES
3.1 Terminal Boxes
O
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3.1.1 Terminalboxesandauxiliaryequipmentenclosures
shall be constructed of cast or nodular iron, cast steel, cast
aluminum, steel plate, or aluminum plate with a minimum
rigidity equivalent to that of steel plate witha nominal thickness of 3.0 millimeters ( V 8 inch). Minimum dimensions and
in
usablevolumesshallnotbe
less thanthosespecified
NEMA MG 1 or IEC 72. When specified, larger boxes shall
be provided for special cable teminations and other devices.
[ESPI
O
e 3.1.4 As a minimum, terminal boxes and auxiliary equip
for IP-54
mentenclosuresshallmeettherequirements
weather protection and for the area classification shown on
the data sheets.(See IEEE 303 for ClassI, Division 2 or IEC
79 for Zone 2 areas.) The terminal boxes shallbe suitable for
conductor entryas specified on the data sheets. Each terminal
box shall havea bolted, gasketed cover that
is fully accessible
from the front and arranged for convenient access. (Explosion
be gasketed
unless
specifically
proof
boxes
shall
not
be moisapproved by the purchaser.)The terminal strips shall
be provided
ture resistant. All vertical gasketed surfaces shall
be
with a dripshieldatthetop.Thegasketmaterialshall
impervious to oil attack. [ESP]
3.19 When specified, the terminal box for the main phase
terminations shall be capable of withstanding the pressure
build-up resulting from a three phase fault of 50 percent of
3.1.5 Groundingforfieldwiringinsidetheterminal
box
the specified maximum available MVA (one-half cycle after
shall conform to the requirements
of NEMA MG 1, Part 11 or
fault inception) for a duration of 0.1 second. For motors fed
IEC 72. [ESP]
from fused motor starters, the box withstand capability shall
e 3.1.6 When specified, a terminal box shall be supplied with
becoordinatedwiththe14(ampere-squaredseconds)letthe following items:
through energy specifiedon the data sheet.If a rupture disc is
used to relieve pressure build-up,it shall not compromise the
a. Thermal insulation on the interior top side.
environmental rating of the box and the discharge from the
b. Space heaters.
pressure release shallbe directed away from the possible perc.Drains.
sonnel traffic. [ESP]
d.Breathers.
3.1.3 For machines ratedat 601 volts and higher, accessory
e. Provisions for purging.
leads shall terminatein a terminal box or boxes separate from f. Removable links for deviceor winding isolation.
the machine terminal housing. However, secondary connecg. Adequate spacefor termination of shielded cables.
tions for current and potential transformers located
in the terh. Universal bushing studs or receptacles.
minalhousingarepermitted
to terminateinthe teminal
i. Arresters and surge capacitors.
leads or buses by a
housing if they are separated from power
j. Differential and phase current transformers.
suitable physical barrier to prevent accidental contact. For
k. Silver or tin-plated bus connections.
machinesrated at 600 voltsandlower,thetermination
of
1. Potentialtransformers.
leads of accessoIy items that normally operate50atvolts root
m. Ground bus. [ESP]
mean square or less shall be separated from other leadsby a
suitable physical barrier to prevent accidental contact
or shall
3.1.7 Whensurgeprotection
is provided in accordance
be terminated in a separate box. [ESP]
with 3.6.2, a low-impedance ground path shall be provided
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
I
STDDAPI/PETRO STD 54b-ENGL 1997 m 0732270 0 5 b 7 4 b L 338
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500
between the surge protection and the stator core. This lowNo. 4/0
impedance path maybe provided by running a copper
AmericanWireGauge(AWG)wire
in parallelwiththe
machine leads. This wire shall be as short as practical and
shall bond the stator core to the terminal box by means of
compression fittings at the ground point,as specified in 3.1.5.
This additional wire shall not be used for machines with a
separate mounted terminal box. In this case the ground connection in the terminal box shall be grounded directly to the
plant’s groundgrid. [ESP]
25
at 0°C (32°F). These elements shall have tetrafluoroethyleneinsulated, stranded, tinned copper wire leads
at least 22 AWG
in size. The leads shall meet the requirements of
NFPA 70 or
IEC 79. [ESP]
O
Note: Direct connection of the stator core or frame and a separate mounted
terminal box to ground can create a closed ground loop where voltages CM
be induced by magnetic stray fields of the machine. Due to the low impedance, small induced voltages can result in harmful high currents.
O
KVA AND LARGER
3.1.8 Whendifferentialcurrenttransformersareprovided
in accordance with 3.6.3 and secondary leads are specified,
the leads shall be routed, in a workmanlike manner, away
o
from high-voltage motor leads and protected by a physical
barrier to prevent accidental contact. These leads shallbe terminated at an appropriate shorting and grounding terminal
block housed in an auxiliary box. The auxiliary box shall be
accessible without removal of the stator terminal box’s cover.
When self-balancingcurrent transformers are furnished, both
ends of each stator winding shall be brought out to the terminal box, and removable links shall be used to allow access to
each end of the phase windings. Each link shall be installed
so that it can be removed without disturbing other parts and
connections. [ESP]
3.2.1.2 Unlessotherwisespecified,two
sensing elements
per phase shall be installed, suitably distributed around the
circumference in the stator windingslots. When specified one
lead of each of these elements shall be grounded in the terminal box. [ESP]
3.2.2 To prevent damage, the leads for alldetectors shall be
protectedduringmanufactureand
shipment. Thevendor’s
drawings shall show the location and number of each sensing
element in the stator winding and its connection point on the
terminal strip. [ESP]
3.3
BearingTemperatureDetectors
3.3.1 Whenspecified,bearingtemperature
detectors shall
be provided in machines with hydrodynamic radial and thrust
bearings. Detectors shall be installed so thattheymeasure
bearing metal temperature. Bearing temperaturesensors shall
be provided in accordance withM I Standard 670 unless otherwise specified. [ESP]
Note: Adoption of API Standard 670 requires two sensors per bearing for
most bearings. If two temperature detectorsare required, the use of dual element sensors should be considered where space is limited.
3.3.2 Where insulated bearings are specified, bearing tem3.1 -9 Wiring and terminal blocks in all terminal boxesshall
perature
detectors shall be installed in such
way
a that they do
be clearly identified. The method
for marking the wiring shall
not
violate
the
integrity
of
bearing
insulation.
[ESP]
be a stampedterminal of the heat-shrinkable type. The terminal blocks shall be permanently and suitably stamped. Stator
leads shall be identified in accordance with NEMA MG 1 or
3.4 SpaceHeaters
IEC 34-8. Current transformerleads shall have polarity idenO 3.4.1 Whenspecified,machinesshallbeequippedwith
tification marhngs atthetransformerand
at theterminal
completely wired space heaters with leads brought out to a
block in theauxiliary terminal box. All wiring markings shall
agree with the notations on the special nameplates required
separateterminalbox.Heaterswithexposedelementsare
prohibited. The heaters’sheath material shall be as specified.
by 2.4.1 1.3.[ESP]
The heaters shall be installed inside the enclosure in a loca3.1.1 O All wiring shall have insulation that is impervious to
tion suitable for easy removal and replacement. Heaters shall
oil attack. [ESP]
be located and insulated so that they do not damage components or finish. [ESP]
O 3.1.1 1 A terminal head or boxes, as specified, shall be supplied for each bearing-vibration sensing unit and each temO 3.4.2 Spaceheatersshallbelowpowerdensity,one
or
perature sensing unit’sterminationswiththeexception
of
three
phase,
with
a
frequency
and
voltage
as
specified,
with
stator RTDs which shallbe in a separate terminal box. [ESP]
all live parts covered. [ESP]
3.2 WindingTemperatureDetectors
e
O
3.2.1 Windingtemperature
detectors shallbesupplied
when specifiedor when required by 3.5.5. These devices shall
be resistance temperaturedetectors (RTDs). [ESP]
3.2.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, RTD elements shall be
platinum, three-wire elements with a resistance of 100 ohms
3.4.3 Space heaters shall be arranged so that heat is radiated from both sides to provide uniform heatingof the stator
windings. The heaters shall maintain the temperature of the
motor windings at approximately5°C (41O F ) above the ambient temperature. The surface temperature of the heater elements shall not be greater than 200OC(392OF) or the value
listed on the datasheet. [ESP]
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D m A P I l P E T R O S T D 54b-ENGL L997
0732290 05b74b2 274
m
API STANDARD 546
26
3.5
m
Screens and Filters
3.6.2.2 Whenspecified,metal-oxidesurgearrestersshall
be furnished and shall be installed in the terminal box. The
3.5.1 Whenairflow inlet andoutletscreens are provided,
connection leads to the arresters shall be at least No. 410
see2.4.10.5for
material.Thescreenholdersshall
be
AWG, shall have only gradual bends, if any, and shall be as
designedtopermiteasyremovalandreplacement
of the
short as possiblewith the total lead length(line-side and
screenswhilethemachine
is running,exceptwhenthe
ground-side combined) on each arrester not to exceed 0.6
screens are located downstream of the airffow through filters. meters (2 feet) The surge arresters shall be rated for the system voltage andthe method of system grounding specified on
[ESPI
the data sheets. (See3.1.7 for bonding requirements.)[ESP]
e 3.5.2 When specified, provisions for future airflow inlet filtypes andsizesshall beavailable as an
tersinstandard
O 3.6.3DIFFERENTIALCURRENTTRANSFORMERS
optional item for Weather Protected Type
I or IP23. [ESP]
When specified, differential-protection current transfonn3.5.3 Provisionsfor future airflowinletfilters in standard
ers shall be provided. The purchaser will advise the vendor
of
types and sizes shall be furnished in all machines having an
the size, type,and source of supply of the current transfonnopenventilationsystem(freeflow
of externalcooling
ers. (See 3.1.8 for installation requirements.) [ESP]
air).[ESP]
3.5.4 When filters are specified, they shall be of the permanent type and shall meet the service requirements indicated
on the data sheets. Filters shall be constructed of AIS1 300
series stainlesssteel. [ESP]
0 3.5.5
3.6.4SYNCHRONIZING
AND CONTROLDEVICES
3.6.4.1 The vendor shall provide the necessary rectification
devices between the exciter's AC output and the main field.
The method of field application and synchronization shallbe
described by the vendor in the proposal and shall be jointly
agreed uponby the purchaser and the vendor.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
O
O
When filters or provisions for future filters are specified,windingtemperaturedetectorsshallbeprovided
in
accordance with 3.2. Connections shall be furnished for a e 3.6.4.2 Whenspecified, a freestandingcontrolpanelshall
specified device to measure the pressure drop across the filbe supplied for mounting the control and protective devices
ters. [ESP]
listed on the accessory equipment section of the data sheet.
As an alternative tothis, individual components shall besup
3.5.6 Replacement and servicing of the filters shall be easplied as indicated on the section of the data sheet for mountilyaccomplishedwhilethemachine
is running,without
ing and wiringby others. [ESP]
allowing the intrusion of airborne dirt or debris. [ESP]
3.6
Alarms and Control Devices for
Machine Protection
3.6.1
SWITCHES
O
O
3.7 GroundConnectors
Visible ground pads shall be provided at opposite comers
of the machine frame. A ground connection point shall be
provided by drilling and tapping the frame for
a 12.0 millimeter thread bolt [ESP]or '/,-inch national coarse. (NC)
Alarmandcontroldevicesshallbeequippedwithsinglepole, double-throw switches with a minimum rated capacity
3.8 VibrationDetectors
of 10 amperes at 115 volts and 60 hertz or 50 hertz. When
Specified, the vendorshall supply devices with DC-rated con- O 3.8.1 Hydrodynamic bearing machines intended to operate
tacts.All devices shallbe approved by the purchaser. [ESP]
atspeedsgreaterthan
or equal to 1200revolutions per
minute, or when specified for other speeds, shall be equipped
3.6.2SURGEPROTECTION
with noncontacting vibration probes (2 per bearing) and a
phase-reference probe,or shall have provisionsfor the instal3.6.2.1 When specified,surgecapacitorsshallbefurlation of probes. Vibration and position equipment shall be
nished. The surge capacitors shall be the last devices confurnished and installed in accordance with API Standard
670,
nectedtotheleadsbeforetheleadsenterthestator.The
except as described below. Shaft surface preparation in the
connection leads to the capacitors shall be at least No.
410
probe area shallbe in accordance with 2.4.5.1.3. [ESP]
AWG, shall have only gradual bends, if any, and shall be as
short as possiblewith the totalleadlength(line-sideand
3.8.1.1 Noncontactingvibrationprobesshallbemounted
ground-side combined) on each capacitor not to exceed 0.6
through the bearing centerline, monitoring the shaft journal,
meters (2 feet) The capacitors shall be rated for the system
where possible. If not possible due to oil ring interference
or
line-line voltage and shall be installed in the terminal box.
be
otherbearingconstructionfeatures,theprobesshall
mounted inboard of the bearing (toward the rotor). Where
[ESP]
(See 3.1.7 for bonding requirements.)
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O STD 54b-ENGL L777 m 0732270 0 5 b 7 q b 3 L O O m
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500
neither of the above is possible due
to construction characteristics,thevendorshall
state th~sin theproposalandthe
probes may be mounted outboard of the bearing, but not near
a nodal point. [ESP]
3.8.1.2 The leads ofthenoncontactingvibrationprobes
shall be physically protected by the use of conduit, or other
purchaser approved means and shall be secured to prevent
movement. [ESP]
KVA AND LARGER
27
Note: When the probes cannot be accessed during operation and the machine
cannot be stopped conveniently to change defective probes, four probes at
each bearingare recommended. Twoof the probes are connectedto the oscillator-demodulators and the othertwo probes have their leads run to theoscillator-demodulatorterminal box and are not connected, but held as spares.
BPI
m 3.8.3 Whenspecified,seismicvibrationsensors,
or provisions for such, shallbe supplied in accordance withAPI Standard 670.
Note 1: Axial-position probesare normally applied to monitor thrust-loading
andhydrodynamicthrust-beanng
conditions in verticalmachines.Axial
probes are occasionally used to monitora rotor’s axial vibration.On horizontal machines, axialprobes should not generally be applied, because no thrust
bearing is present and because axial probes usedas vibration sensors willnot
generally accommodate the rotor’s relatively large amount of axial motion.
Noncontacting vibration systems are generally used on high-speed machines
with hydrodynamic radial bearings, and accelerometer systems are generally
used on units with antifriction bearings, which have high transmissibilityof
shaft-to-bearing force.
3.8.1.3 Special care must be taken to ensure that the probe
mounting technique maintains bearing insulation (such
as the
use of an insulated probe holder). [ESP]
3.8.2 Whenspecified,machineswithhydrodynamicbearings shall have provisions for the mounting of four radialvibration probes in each bearing housing, and where hydrodynamic thrust bearings are provided, they shall have provisions for two axial-position probes at the thrust end.
Note 2: Vibration detectors are not normally used on machines with
more poles.
14 or
SECTION 4--INSPECTION,TESTING, AND PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
4.1
General
4.1.3.3 required: Theparagraph in questionapplies or
that certified documentation shall be recorded for the purchaser. [ESP]
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4.1.1 Wheneverthespecification
or purchaseorder calls
for shop inspections and tests to be witnessed, observed, or
perfomed by a purchaser’s representative, the vendor shall
provide sufficient advance notice
to the purchaser before each
inspection or test. At all other timesthe purchaser’s representative, upon providing similar advance notice to the vendor,
shall have access to all vendor and subvendor plants where
work on or testing of the equipment is in progress. In each
of calendar days consideredto be
instance, the actual number
sufficientadvancenoticeshall
be established by mutual
agreement between the purchaser and
the vendor. [ESP]
4.1.2 Thevendorshallnotifyallsubvendors
of the purchaser’s inspection and testing requirements. [ESP]
4.1.3 The purchaser will specify the extent ofhis participation in the inspection and testing. [ESP]
4.1.4 Unlessotherwisespecified,allrequiredtestand
inspection equipment shallbe provided by the vendor.
4.2 Inspection
4.2.1
GENERAL
4.2.1.1 The vendor shall keep the following data available
for at least 5 years for examination by the purchaser or his
representative upon request:
O
a. When specified, certification of materials, such as mill test
reports on shafts, forgings, and major castings.
b. Purchase specifications for allitems on bills of materials.
c. Test data to verify that the requirements of the specification have been met.
d. Results of all quality-control tests and inspections.
e. When specified, final assembly clearances
of rotating parts
(e.g., air gap, bearing, andseal clearances). [ESP]
4.1.3.1 witnessed: A hold shall be applied to the producO
tion schedule and that the inspection or test shall be carried
out with the purchaseror his representative in attendance. For
O 4.2.1.2 When specified, parts shall not be painted until the
mechanical running or performance tests, this requires writspecified inspectionof the parts is completed. [ESP]
ten notification of a successful preliminary test. [ESP]
O 4.2.1.3 The purchaser will specify the following:
4.1.3.2 observed: The purchaser shall be notified of the
a. Parts thatshallbesubjected
to surfaceandsubsurface
timing of the inspection or test; however, the inspection or
examination.
test shall be performed as scheduled, and if the purchaser or
his representative is not present, the vendor shall proceed to
b. The type of inspection required, suchas magnetic particle,
the next step. (The purchaser should expect to be in the facliquidpenetrant,radiographic,andultrasonicexamination.
tory longer thanfor a witnessed test.)[ESP]
CESPI
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D 54b-ENGL L977
28
m
0732290 05b7Vb4 O 4 7
m
API STANDARD 546
MATERIAL
4.2.2
m 4.2.2.5 Liquid Penetrant
Inspection
INSPECTION
penetrant
inspection
shall
be in
4.2.2.5.1 Liquid
accordance with Section V, Article 6,of the ASME Code or
When radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or liquid IS0 3452 and IS0 3453. [MSP]
penetrant inspection of welds or materials is required or spec4.2.2.52 The
acceptance
standard
used
for
welded
ified, the criteriain 4.2.2.2 through 4.2.2.5 shall apply unless
fabrications
shall
be
Section
VIII,
Division 1, Appendix 8,
other criteriaare specified by the purchaser. Cast ironmay be
and SectionV, Art. 24 of the ASME Code. [MSP]
inspected in accordance with 4.2.2.4 and 4.2.2.5.Welds, cast
steel, and wrought material may be inspected in accordance
Note: Regardless of the generalized limits in 4.2.2, it shall be the vendor's
with 4.2.2.2. through 4.2.2.5. [MSP]
responsibility to review the design limits of the equipment in the event that
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
o D 4.2.2.1General
more stringent requirements are necessary. Defects that exceedthelimits
imposed in 4.2.2 shall be removed to meet the quality standards cited, as
determined by the inspection method specified.
m 4.2.2.2Radiography
4.2.2.2.1 Radio,mphy shall be in accordance
withASTM
E 94 or IS0 5579 and ASTME 142 or IS0 1027. [MSP]
4.2.2.6
4.2.2.6.1 Pressure-containing
parts
water
of cooling
circuits (including auxiliaries) shall be tested hydrostatically
withliquid at a minimum of 1V2 timesthemaximum
allowable working pressure but not lessthan 138 kilopascals
(20 pounds per square inch gauge).
[MSP]
4.2.2.2.2 The
acceptance
standard
used
for
welded
be Section W, Division 1 , W - 5 1
fabricationsshall
(continuousweld)and W - 5 2 (spotweld),oftheASME
for castingsshall be
Code.Theacceptancestandardused
Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 7, of the ASME Code.
[MSPI
4.2.2.6.2 The test liquid should be at a higher temperature
than the nil-ductility transition temperature
of the material
being
tested.
The
hydrostatic
test
shall
be
considered
satisfactory when neither leaks nor seepage is observed for a
minimum of 30 minutes. [MSP]
m 4.2.2.3UltrasonicInspection
4.2.2.3.1 Ultrasonic inspection shall be in accordance with
[MSP]
Section V,Articles 5 and 23, of the ASME Code.
4.2.2.4.1 Both wet and dry methods and magnetic particle
inspection shallbe in accordance withAST" E 709. WSP]
4.2.2.4.2 The
acceptance
standard
used
for
welded
fabrications shall be Section W I , Division 1, Appendix 6,
andSection
V, Article 25, of the ASME Code.The
acceptability of defectsincastingsshall
be basedon a
comparison with the photographs in ASTM E 125. For each
type of defect, the degree of seventy shall not exceed the
limits specifiedin Table 4. [MSP]
Table 4"aximum Severity of Defects in Castings
Type
Des=
I
II
2
II1
1
HydrostaticTesting
O
4.2.3.2 Whenspecifiedformachineshavingcirculating
pressure oil systems witha rated pump capacity of 5 gallons
per minute or more, the oil system furnished shall meet the
cleanliness requirementsof API Standard 614. [MSP]
4.2.3.3 Whenspecified,thepurchasermayinspectfor
cleanliness the equipment and all piping and appurtenances
furnished byor through the vendor before final assembly.
[MW
0.
4.2.3.4 When specified, the hardness of
parts, welds, and
heat-affectedzonesshall
be verified as beingwithinthe
allowable valuesby testing of the parts, welds,or zones. The
method, extent, documentation, and witnessing of the testing
shall be mutually
upon
agreed
ven- thepurchaser
by
andthe
dor. [MSP]
@m 4.2.3.5
V
When specified,thepurchaser'srepresentative
shall have accessto the vendor's quality program for review.
VI
"Pl
IV
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
om 4.2.3.6 When specified, the tests and inspections required
j. Generalarrangementdrawingsandbillofmaterialsfor
spare parts.
k. Residual rotor unbalance worksheet.
I. List of electrical test instrumentation and method of calibration.
on the motoror generator data sheets shall be performed.
4.3
FinalTesting
4.3.1
GENERAL
O
l
4.3.1.1 The purchaser reserves the rightto observe the testing, dismantling, inspection, and reassembly of equipment,
as
specified. WSP]
4.3.1.2 The vendor shall notify the purchaser not less than
10 working days before thedate the equipment willbe ready
for testing. [MSP]
4.3.1.3 The vendor shall provide calculated data from final
witnessedtestingimmediatelyuponcompletionoftesting.
The final results of critical parameters must be determined
prior to the inspectors leaving the test facility. [ESP]
m 4.3.1.4
At least 6 weeks before the first scheduled test, the
Vendor shall submit to the Purchaser,
for his review and comment, detailed procedures for all tests, including acceptance
criteria forallmonitored parameters. Thefollowingitems
shall be included in the testprocedures booklet.
a. Types of tests (electrical or mechanical).
b. Testing sequence.
c. Detailed testing schedule.
d. Guarantee limits such as overall vibration levels, limits of
harmonic vibration components, frequency and amplification
factors of critical speeds, efficiency and noise levels, and stator temperaturerise.
e. Data measurements to confirmguarantee limits and proper
operation of equipment components.This should include, but
not be limited to,the following:
1. Electrical performance data (e.g.: the voltage (V), frequency (Hz), current (A), input and output power (hp or
kW), speed (rpm), and torque(ft-lb or Nm)).
2. Shaft and bearing vibration, filtered and unfiltered, for
each vibration sensor.
3. Phase angle.
4. Journal bearing embedded temperatures.
5. Stator winding temperatures.
6. Cooling water flow and temperature.
7. Temperature onair inlets and discharge.
8. Lube oil flows, pressures, inlet and drain temperatures
for each bearing.
9. Allinstrumentationand data points whch are to be
monitored in the field.
f. Calculated lateral critical speed analysis.
g. A complete set of test data sheets which are to be used
during the testing.
h. A listing of all alarm and shutdown levels.
i. Calibration sheets for all switches, vibration probes, and
proximitors.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
4.3.1.5 Tests
shall
be made
on
the
fully
assembled
machine, using contract components and accessories, and if
specifiedtheprebalancedcouplinghalf(includingidling
adapters). [ESP]
4.3.1.5.1 When the contract coupling hub is specified to be
mounted by the vendor, it shallbe mounted on therotor along
withany idler adapterormassmoment
simulator at the
completionofthefinalrotor-fanbalance.Ifthe
rotor
unbalance exceeds the allowable unbalance limit (4W/N per
plane) after the couplingismounted, the vendorandthe
purchaser shall mutually agree on the cause of the
excess
unbalance and appropriate corrective action taken. [ESP]
4.3.1.5.2 If it is not practical to mount the coupling with
the rotor in the balance machine, the coupling hub and any
be mounted after
idler adapter or mass moment simulator can
machineassembly butbeforetheunbalanceresponsetest.
be properly
Before mounting the coupling, the machine shall
mounted on a massive foundation and run until the bearing
temperaturesstabilize.Thevoltageshallbereduced
to of
lx
rated to minimizeelectricallyinducedvibrationand
filtered vibration data taken without the coupling mounted
and again after mounting the coupling. The magnitude of the
vectorial change in the lx vibration on the shaft and bearing
housings shall not exceed 10 percent of the vibration limits
given in Figures 1 and2.
During the test with '/4 rated voltage, the rotor shall
be
maintained on magnetic center. With the coupling mounted,
the voltage shall be increased to rated and a complete set of
filtered and unfiltered vibration data shall be taken. All data
Figures 1 and 2. Ifthe
shall be withinthelimitsgivenin
vibration change or amplitude exceeds the allowable limits,
the vendor and purchaser shall mutually agree on the approfor 2.4.6.3.4.)[ESP]
priate corrective action. (See Note
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
O
4.3.1.6 If applicable, all oil pressures and viscosities shall
beatthemaximumoperatingtemperaturevaluesrecommended in the manufacturer's operating instructions for the
specificunitbeingtested.Oilflow
rates for eachbearing
housing shall be determined. (Accepted methods other than
flowmeter may be used.) Test-stand oil filtration shall be 10
microns nominal or better. [ESP]
4.3.1.7 All detection,protective,and control devicesshall
be checked, and adjustments shall be made as required prior
to any running tests. [ESP]
4.3.1 -8 During the running tests, the mechanical operation
of all equipment being tested and the
operation of the test and
purchased instrumentationshall be satisfactory. [ESP]
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
4.3.1.9 If replacement or modification of bearings or seals
or dismantling to replaceor modify other parts is required to
correct mechanical performance deficiencies, the mechanical
vibration and unbalance responsetests shall be repeated after
these replacementsor corrections are made. [ESP]
O
4.3.1.10 Facilitiestoprevent
entrance of oilintothe
machineinteriorshall be inoperationthroughoutthe test.
Any violation of this condition
requires termination of the test
until the necessary correctionis made. [ESP]
4.3.1.1 1 The vendor shall maintainacomplete,detailed
log and plots of all final tests and shall submit the required
number of copiesto the purchaser,including data for bearing
temperatures, rotor balancing, critical speeds, and vibration
measurements taken over the operating speed range, and the
spectrum analysis. A description of the test instrumentation
and certified copies of the instrument calibrations shall be
kept available for the purchaser's review. [ESP]
4.3.1.12 A11 test results shall be certified by the vendor and
transmitted to the purchaser in reproducible form. Exceptions
to the infomation specified in 4.3.1.11 shall be listed in the
proposal. [ESP]
4.3.1.13 When specified, beforethe start of testing, the
manufacturershalldemonstratetheaccuracyof
his test
equipment and/or automated data acquisition systems. The
calibration and maximum deviation, from a recognized standard, at all phase angles and anticipated frequencies and harmonics, shall be demonstrated. A maximum deviation of no
morethanpercent,includingallpotential
transformers,
current transformers,test leads, shunts, voltage dividers,
transducers, analog to digital converters and computers, etc.,
that are part of the test Set-up, shall be demonstrated. Every
element of the test equipment setup shall be included in the
accuracy demonstration. [ESP]
4.3.1.14 Prior to any mechanical running test, a check for
soft feet shall be made. After the machine has been aligned,
shimmed, and firmly secured tothe test base, a dial indicator
10
0.1
1O0
1O00
10000
Speed (rpm)
Notes:
l . The unfiltered vibration limitsfor machines up to 3,600 rpm rated speed shall not exceed 2 mils P-p displacement. For machines with rated speeds
in e x a s of 3.600 rpm the unfiltered vibration limit shall not
exceed
Nwhere N is the maximum rated continuousspeed.
2. Vibmtion displacementat any filtered frequency below running-speed frequency shall not
exceed O. 1 mil or 20 percent of the measured unfiltered
vibntion displacement, whicheveris greater.
3. Vibration displacement at any filtered frequency above running-speed frequency shall not exceed
0.5 mil peak-to-peak.
4. Vibration displacement filteredat running speed frequency shall notexceed 80 percent of the unfiltered limit (runout compensated).
Figure 1-Shaft Vibration Limits (Relative to Bearing Housing Using Noncontact Vibration Probes):For all
Hydrodynamic Sleeve Bearing Machines; With theMachine Securely Fastened to a Massive Foundation
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS
MACHINES-500
KVA AND LARGER
micrometer oriented in the vertical direction shall be attached
at the mounting foot to be checked. The micrometer is then
zeroed, the mounting bolt or bolts loosened at the foot, and
the change in micrometer reading noted. If the micrometer
reading exceeds 0.025 millimeter (0.001 inch), the mounting
requires cleaning or re-shimming. This soft foot check shall
beperformed at eachmountingfoot,withtheotherfeet
secured, until all micrometer change readings are less than O
0.025 millimeter (0.001 inch). If there are intermediatebases,
this check shall be performed at each interface between the
machine and test floor. [ESP]
31
dance with the applicable portions of E E E 115, or IEC 3 4 2
and 34-4. The test shall include the following items:
a. Measurement of no-load current (each phase) and exciter
field current.
b. A determination, by calculation, of locked-rotor current.
c. A high-potential test on the stator and field.
d. An insulation resistance test by megohmmeter and polarization indexper IEEE 43. The insulation resistance measurement and polarization index shall be performed
in accordance
with Table 5. (The polarization index is the ratio of the 10Table 5-DC Test Voltages forInsulation Resistance
and Determination of Polarization Index
4.3.2
ROUTINETEST
4.3.2.1 Each machineshall be givenaroutine(commerAcceptable
Preferred
Motor Voltage
cial) test per NEMA MG 1 and ANSI (250.10, or IEC 34-2
2300
and 34-4 to demonstrate that it is free from mechanical and
25002300 - 3999
electrical
shall
tests
defects.
These
be
accorconducted
in
24OOo
lo00
lo00
5000
lo00
2500
h
U
C
8
al
v)
v)
al
c
o
c
.-
al
2
1O0
100000
Notes:
1. The filtered and unfiltered vibration limits for machines up to 1,000 rpm rated speed shall not exceed 1.6 mils P-p
displacement, and O. 1 inches per second true peak velocity for machines with ratedspeeds above 1.o00rpm.
2. For unfiltered vibration limits, use the machine synchronous or maximum rotational speed in rpm.
3. For filtered limits, use vibration frequency in hertz.
4. Limits are for sleeve and anti-friction bearing machines.
Figure 2-Bearing Housing Radial and Axial Vibration Limits: For Sleeve
and Antifriction Bearing Machines;
With the Machine Securely Fastened to a Massive Foundation
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D * A P I / P E T R O STD Sqb-ENGL
API STANDARD
546
32
minute resistancevaluetotheI-minuteresistancevalue.)
5 shall be used.
When specified, the preferred values in Table
e. Measurement of stator- and field-winding resistance, using
the Wheatstone bridge method.
f. Measurement of vibration (see 4.3.1.5.2 and 4.3.3).
g. A test of the bearing insulation.
h. A test of bearing temperature rise.
O i. Inspection of the bearings and oil supply, when furnished.
When specified, before the tests arerun, each bearing’sjournal-to-bearing
clearance
and bearing-shell-to-bearing-cap
crushandalignmentshall
be determinedandrecorded.
Inspectionofantifrictionandbracket-typesleevebearings
shall include an observed no-load run to ensure that bearing
operation is without excessive noise, heating,
or vibration and
been
a check for lubrication leaks. After all running tests have
completed, the shaftjournals and bearings shallbe inspected
by completely removing both the top and bottom halves of
each sleeve bearing. The contact between the
shaft journal
and the bearing bore shall abeminimum of 80 percent of the
axial length and symmetrical with no edge loading. Where
thelubricant is accessible,itsconditionshall
be visually
examined after the run.
j. Measurements of the main machine and exciter air gaps.
Allowable limitsare per 2.4.7.16. [ESP]
4.3.3
VIBRATION TESTS
terline of the probe location and one probe tip diameter to
either side. When this acceptance method is proposed, the
Vendor shall so indicate on the data sheet. Measurement and
documentation of runout in the assembled machine is also
required to check for changesin probe-track runout.[ESP]
4.3.3.4 Vibration measurements shall be taken in the horizontal and vertical radial directions and the axial direction on
thebearinghousings of antifriction-bearingandhydrodynamic-bearingmotors.Allshaftradial-vibrationmeasurements shall be taken using noncontacting eddy-current probes
when equipped with them or if provisions for noncontacting
probesarespecified.Whereshaftnoncontactingprobes
or
provisions for probes are not specified and the shaft is inaccessible for vibrationmeasurement,only
bearinghousing
vibrationmeasurementsshallbetaken.(See2.4.5.1.3for
requirements at probe sensing areas.) Shaft and bearing housing vibration data shall be recorded for the unfiltered, one half
running speed, one times running speed (and phase angle),
and two times running speed, and one times and two times
line frequency amplitudes.[ESP]
4.3.3.5 Unfilteredandfilteredradialandaxialvibration,
electrical input, and temperature data shall
be recorded at 30
minute intervals during all mechanical running tests. If the
vibration pulsates, the high and low values shall
be recorded.
[ESPI
4.3.3.1 Vibration
shall
be
measured
to
determine
the
mechanical performance and acceptability of all machines.
This test is to be performed during the bearing temperature
rise test (4.3.2.1.h) and, heatrun or hot rotor test and tandem
test when these have been specified.[ESP]
4.3.3.6 If mutually agreed upon by the purchaser and the
vendor, the purchaser may use his monitoring or recording
equipmentinconjunctionwiththevibrationtransducers
mounted on the machine to record the dynamic behavior of
the machine during testing.[ESP]
4.3.3.2 During the shoprunningtestoftheassembled
machine, vibration measurementsof the machine and foundation shall be made with the machine properly shimmed (no
soft feet, see 4.3.1 -14) and securely fastened to a massive
foundation (see Note1 to 2.4.6.1.2) or test floor stand. Elastic
mounts are not permitted.ESP]
4.3.3.7 All purchased vibration probes, transducers, oscillator-demodulators, and accelerometers shall
be in use during
the test. If vibration probes are not furnished by the equip
ment vendor or if the purchased probes are not compatible
with shop readout facilities, then shop probes and readouts
that meet the accuracy requirements
ofAPI Standard 670
shall be used. [ESP]
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4.3.3.3 Machinesthatareprovidedwithnon-contact
probes or provisions for non-contact probes shall be tested to 4.3.3.8 Shoptestfacilitiesshallincludeinstrumentation
verify that the shaft sensing areas meet the total electrical andwith the capability of continuously monitoring and plotting
revolutions per minute, peak-to-peak displacement, and phase
mechanical runout requirements of 2.4.5.1.3.The probe track
angle (x-y-y?. Presentationofvibrationdisplacementand
runout shallbe measured with the rotorat slow roll (200-300
phase marker shall also be by oscilloscope or spectrum anaIpm) speed, where the mechanical unbalance forces on the
rotor are negligible. A continuous unfiltered trace of the non- lyzer. [ESP]
contact probe output shallbe recorded for a 360 degree shaft
4.3.3.9 The vibration characteristics determinedby the use
rotation at each probe location with the shaft rotating in the
of the instrumentation specified in 4.3.3.7 and 4.3.3.8 shall
assembled machine. The rotor shall be held at it’s axial magserve as a basis for acceptance or rejection of the machine.
netic center during recording.
[ESPI
An alternatemethod of acceptance for measurement of
electrical and mechanical runout is to rollthe rotor in V- O 4.3.3.10 Duringtheshoptest
of machineswithtwoor
blocks at the journal centerline while measuring runout
with a
more bearings operating at its rated voltage and ratedorspeed
noncontactinn vibration Drobe and a dial indicatorat the cenat any other voltage and speed within the specified operating
Y
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D * A P I / P E T R O S T D 5'4b-ENGL
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500
speedrange,the
shaft displacementandbearinghousing
velocity of vibration shall not exceed the values shown in Figures 1 and 2. Values for single bearing machines shallbe the
same unless otherwise determined by agreement between the
purchaser and vendor. The shaft readings in Figure 1 include
a maximum allowancefor electrical and mechanical runout
in
accordance with 2.4.5.1.3. If a temperature test
is specified
(see 4.3.5.1.1.d), the vibration shall be within the filtered and
unfilteredlimitsshown in Figures1and 2 throughoutthe
temperature range from the test ambient temperature to the
total design temperature. Whenrequired, lower vibration limits shall be specified on the data sheets.
The magnitude of vibration vector changes from no load to
rated temperature shall not exceed 50 percent of the curve
0
value of Figures 1 and 2. For machines which do not comply
with this vector change allowance, while remaining withln
the limits shown in Figures 1 and 2, and when specifically
approved by the purchaser, the vendor shall demonstrate the
structuralstabilityoftherotor.
The vibrationtestshall be
repeated by letting the machine cool downto the no load stabilized temperature and then reheating it to achieve a stable
temperature while recording the vibration data. The magnitude of vector change in succeeding vibration amplitudes, for
the cold machine under no load and for the hot machine at
rated temperature, shall be within 15 percent of the allowable
limits shown in Figures 1 and 2.
KVA AND LARGER
33
a transformer winding. Rated flux shall be maintained for a
minimumofonehalfhourwhilecontinuouslymonitoring
stator temperatures with an infrared cameraor infrared thermometer. Interlaminar insulation deficiencies (hot spots) are
O F ) above the adjadefined as being any core location 5°C (41
cent core temperature. [ESP]
4.3.4.2
SurgeTest
Surge comparison tests shall
be made of the turn insulation
in the fully wound stator just before the coil-to-coil connections are made,at test levels and methodsin accordance with
Figure 1 of IEEE 522or IEC 34-15. [ESP]
4.3.4.2.1 Whenspecified, two additionalstator coils for
special surge tests of the main and turn insulation shall be
stator
manufactured at the same time as thecomplete
winding. These coils shall be completely cured and tested as
follows:
a. The test of the main insulation shall consis: of three successive applications of a 1.2~50-microsecond impulse voltage with a crest value of 5 p.u. The impulse voltage shall be
applied to both terminals of the coil conductor while the conducting surfaces of the simulated slot portionsof the coil are
connected to earth.
b. The test of the turn insulation shall consist of successive
applicationswithin1minuteintervalsofvoltageimpulses
having a rise time of
O.1 to 0.2 microseconds applied between
the coil terminations. The crest value of the voltage impulse
shall be gradually increased until the pointof insulation failure is reached. The test voltages shall include values of 2.0,
3.5, and 5.0 p.u. [ESP]
4.3.3.11 Whiletheequipment
is operatingatmaximum
continuousspeedand
any operating temperature,sweeps
shall be made for vibration amplitudes at frequencies other
than running speed. These sweeps
shall cover a frequency
to
rangefrom 25 percent oftherunning-speedfrequency
three times theline frequency. See Figures1 and 2 for filtered
vibration limits. [ESP]
o 4.3.4.3 Power Factor Tip-Up Test
O
4.3.3.12 When specified, a data acquisition system shall be
used to record the vibration data during testing. The recorded
data shall be submitted to the purchaser together with the
final test report. [ESP]
0
4.3.4.1Stator
A power factor tip-up(tangent-delta)testshall
be performed, when specified.This test may be specified ona completely wound stator or on individual coils. The test method
shall be perE E E 286 or IEC 894.
This test may also be specified for sacrificial coils of the
4.3.3.13 Trim balancing may be performed, if approved by
same
design and dimensions
as the coils for the main winding
thepurchaser.Theresidualunbalancetest(2.4.6.3.6and
and
shall
be
processed
with
the
main stator. A power factor
Appendix C) is required after trim balancing. Trim balancing
tipup
test
shall
be
performed
on both sacrificial coils. The
shall not be usedto compensate for thermal bow. [ESP]
acceptance criteria shall be mutually agreed upon between
the manufacturer and the user. [ESP]
m 4.3.4STATORTESTS
o 4.3.4.4
CoreTest
When specified,prior to insertion of the stator
coils into the
core, the stator core interlaminar insulation integrity shall be
verified. Loss of lamination insulation produces circulating
currents leading to excessive heating of the core (hot spots)
eventually causingcoil failure and melting of the core steel.
The test shall be performedby inducing rated flux density
into the core by placing coils through it in a mannersimilar to
Sealed Winding Conformance Test
When specified, motor stators equipped with sealed insulation systems shall be tested in accordance with NEMA MG
1-20.49 by means of a water-immersion or spray test. These
tests shall be in addition to all other tests.
or spray test, the
At the completion of the water-immersion
stators shall be rinsed and, dried, at which point any other
required tests may be performed.ESP]
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D * A P I / P E T R O S T D Sqb-ENGL L777 m 0732270 05b7q70 3qO
API STANDARD
546
4.3.5.2
Note: This test exposes certain pans of the insulation to stress levels that are
in excess of what it sees during normal operation. The test can cause dielecmc deteriorationof weaknesses that might never occur in service.Any internal ionization or carbonization initiated during the test will further weaken
the insulation. Before this test is specified, the risk of insulation degradation
should be weighed against the level of quality assurance provided by a successfulwatertest.Anytest
failures should be analyzedtodeterminethe
method of repair. [ESP]
4.3.5
4.3.5.1
4.3.52.1 For machines which do not receive the complete
test of 4.3.5.1.1, a heat runtest in accordance with 4.3.5.1 . I ,
item d shallbe performed when specified.[ESP]
4.3.5.2.2 If the heat run test specified in 4.3.5.1.1, Item
d,
cannotbeperformed,
the vendorshallsubmitcomplete
details of an alternative test that
permits measurements of
vibrationthroughoutthetestfor
at least 4hourswiththe
machine operating at rated speed and with the rotor at fullload temperature. [ESP]
SPECIALTESTS
Completelest
4.3.5.1.1 When specified, each machine shall be given the
completetestdescribed
in4.3.5.1.1through4.3.5.1.3,in
addition to the tests specified in 4.3.2, 4.3.3 and 4.3.4. This
test shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of
IEEE 115 or E C 34-2 and34-4andshall
include the
following items:
4.3.5.3
TANDEMTEST
When machines are specified to operate in tandem with a
turbine, the running test shall be conducted in the following
sequence:
a. Determination of efficiency at 100 percent,75 percent, and
50 percentoffullload.
The vendorshall indicate which
method will lx used in determining the performance data.
b. Measurement of locked-rotor current, power factor, and
mean torque, and a determination by calculation of pull-out
torque as applicable.
c. Tests for the constructionoftheopen-circuitsaturation
and core loss curve and for the short-circuit saturation and
loss curve.
d. A heat run (temperature) test of the main armature and
field at the maximum continuous rated service factor (using a
the zero-power-factor method or the synchronous feedback
technique).
Note: For larger machine sizes, a heat run test may be Iimited to only opencircuit and short-circuittests.
e. An exciter heat run (temperature testor certified data from
a duplicate design.
f. Tests for the construction of the no-load V curve (stator
current curve versusexciter field current atthe motor's rated
voltage).
g. Sound pressure level test in accordance with lEEE 85 or
IS0 1680.1 and IEC 34-9.
O
4.3.5.1 2 For special purpose machines and when specified
for general purpose machines, hydrodynamic bearings shall
be removed, inspected, and reassembled after completion of
the mechanical running tests. There shall
be no more than
M.O002inch change of the bearing bore diameter and no
metal transfer between the shaft and the bearing. Initial and
final dimensional checksshall be made withthe bearing at the
same temperature (approximately%!OC). [ESP]
4.3.5.1.3 When specified, in addition to the final AC high
potential test, the stator insulationwill also be tested by
means of the DC Controlled Overvoltage Test per IEEE 95.
Themaximumvoltage for thiscontrolledovervoltage test
shall be 1.5 times the rated (rms) terminal voltage times 1.7.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Rated Rotor Temperature Vibration Test
a. Operate at speeds from zero
to maximum continuousspeed
in speed increments and run at maximum continuous speed
until the bearing and lube-oil temperature have
stabilized.
b. Increase the speedto 110 percent of maximum continuous
speed and runfor a minimum of15 minutes.
c. Reduce speed to maximum continuous speed and run
for 4
hours.
Note: Caution should be exercised when operating ator n a critical speeds.
[ESPI
4.3.5.4UNBALANCE
RESPONSETEST
Whenspecified,a15-percentseparationmargin(see
2.4.6. l.1) shall be verified by attachingthe machine to a massive foundation support and
subjectingthe machineto the following unbalanced response test.Special considerationsmay
be requiredforsuper-synchronousmachines.For
critical
speed considerations, a test shall be made with a couplinghalf mass momentor moments equivalentto those ofthe contract couplingor couplings.
a. A deliberate unbalance of 411, per plane (see 2.4.6.3.5,
Equation 6 or 7) shall be applied to the rotor. The weights
shall be placed at the balance planes in phase and also 180
degrees Öut of phase. In cases where an overhung mass is
present,such as afan or coupling,resultinginabending
mode with maximum deflectionsat the shaft end, the amount
of unbalance to be addedto the overhung massshall be based
on four times the allowable residual unbalance in the overhung mass. (For example, fromM I 671, the assembled coupling may be balanced to 4OW'fN where W, is the weight of
the coupling andN is the maximum continuous speed.In this
case the amount of unbalance to be added to the coupling
would be 160WJN where W, is the weight of the overhung
mass.)
The unbalance weights can
be placed at any location on the
balance planes or coupling. However, if the shaft displacement exceeds90percent of the limits defined in 4.3.5.4.b and
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
34
~
c, the test shall be repeated with the weights moved to new
positions 90 degrees from the original positions to determine
thesensitivityoftherotor
response to unbalanceweight
placement.
The
maximum
response
obtained
shall
be
used
as
the basis for passing the test.
b. The machine shall be run to 120 percent of its rated speed
withtheunbalanceweightsattachedandthenallowed
to
coast to rest. The shaft vibration relative to the bearing housing shall be observed. Machines with defined separation margins shall meetthe following criteria:
1. The shaft displacement relative to the bearing housing
at any speed within the operating speed range or separation-margin limits shall not exceed the smaller of the following valueor 55 percent ofthe shaft-to-bearing and seal
diametral running clearances:
bearinghousinginthehorizontal,verticalandaxial
directions. The applicationof the excitation force must be made in
these same directions.
No significant resonance shall occur within plus or minus
15 percent of running speed multiples, up
to its 3rd harmonic,
or between 40 percent and 60 percent of running speed. A
significant resonance is defined as a peak which lies within
6dB in amplitude (displacement) of the fundamental bearing
housin,u resonance.
On variable speed machmes, the vendor shall propose an
alternate method in the proposalto verify that the naturalfrequency of the bearing housing will not be excited within the
operating speed range. This method mustbe approved by purchaser. [ESP]
4.4
PreparationforShipment
o 4.4.1 Each unit shall be suitably prepared for the type and
mode of shipment specified. The preparation shall make the
equipment suitable for at least 6 months of outdoor storage
D, = shaft displacement, in mils peak to peak.
from the timeof shipment, withnodisassemblyrequired
N = operating speed nearest the resonant speed of
before operation, exceptfor inspection of bearings andseals.
concern, in revolutions per minute.
Machines that are disassembledfor shipment or storage shall
be provided with marine type plywood over all openings and
2. The shaft displacement relative to the bearing housing
sloped for proper water shed when protected with exterior
at any speed outside the operating speed range or separacovering. [MSP]
tion-margin limits shall not exceed90 percent of the shaftwbearing diametral running clearance.
4.4.2 Thevendorshallprovide
the purchaserwith the
instructions necessary to preserve the integrity of the storage
c. For machines which do not comply with the separation
preparation after the equipment arrives at the job site and
margin of 2.4.6.1.1, and when specifically approved
by the
before start-up. [MSP]
be demonstrated.
purchaser,awell-dampedresponseshall
The motor shallbe run to 120 percent of its rated speed with
4.4.3 The equipment shall be prepared
for shipment after
the unbalance weights described in Item a attached and then
all testing and inspection have been completed and the equipallowedtocoasttorest.Theshaftdisplacementoverthe
ment has been released for shipment by the purchaser. As a
entire speed range,from O to 120 percent, shall not exceed the minimum,thepreparationshall
include thatspecifiedin
following value:
4.4.3.1 through 4.4.3.9. [MSP]
Where:
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
O
Where:
4.4.3.2 Exterior machined surfaces, exceptforcorrosion
resistant material, shall be coated with asuitable rust preventive. [MSP]
D, = shaft displacement, in mils peak to peak.
N,, = maximum rated speed, in revolutions per minute.
[ESPI
0
4.4.3.3 After thorough cleaning, internal areas of bearings
andcarbonsteeloilsystems’auxiliaryequipmentshallbe
coated with asuitable oil-soluble rust preventive. [MSP]
4.3.5.5BEARINGHOUSINGNATURAL
FREQUENCY TEST
Whenspecified,bearinghousingsorendbell
supports
shall be checked for resonance on one machine of each group
of identical machines. Theresulting response shall be plotted
for a frequency sweep ofO to 300 percent of running speed.
In order to eliminatetheinteractionbetweenthebearing
housing, the rotor shall be turned at aslowroll(approximately 300 rpm). The response plots shall be made on each
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
4.4.3.1 Exteriorsurfaces,except
for machinedsurfaces,
shall be coated with manufacturer’sstandard paint unlessotherwise specified. [MSP]
4.4.3.4 Flanged openings shall be provided with metal closures at least 5.0 millimeters (3/,6 inch) thick, with synthetic
rubber gaskets and atleast four full-diameterbolts. [MSP]
4.4.3.5 Threadedopeningsshall
be providedwithsteel
caps or solid-shank steel plugs. In no case shall nonmetallic
caps or plugs be used. [MSP]
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD-API/PETRO STD 5‘4b-ENGL 1777 m 0732290 05b7472 L13
API STANDARD
546
36
4.4.6 Exposed shafts and shaft couplings shall be wrapped
with waterproof, moldable waxed
cloth or vapor-phase-inhib
itor paper. The seams shall be sealed with oilproof adhesive
tape. [MSPI
Note: These plugs are for shipping p u t p o s e s ; permanent plugs are covered in
2.4.3.2.
Whenspecified, the equipmentshall be mounted
on a rigid skid or base
suitable for handling by forklift, truck
or crane. This skid shall extend beyond all surfaces of the
machine. [ESP]
0 4.4.3.6
4.4.3.7 Therotor shall beblocked
radial movement. [ESP]
4.4.7 Components(bothindividualpiecesandpackaged
sets) shipped with mounted preassembled piping, tubing, or
of the Occupawiring shall comply with the requirements
tional Safety and Health Administration. [MSP]
to preventaxialand
4.4.3.8 Space-heater leads shall be accessible without disturbing the shipping package and shall
be suitably tagged for
easy identification. [ESP]
4.4.8 Auxiliarypipingconnectionsfurnishedonthepurchasedequipmentshall be impressionstamped or permanently tagged to agree with the vendor’s connection table or
0 4.4.3.9 When specified, the normal running bearings shall
general arrangement drawing. Service and connection desigbe removed and shipped in protective crates, and
the machine
nations
shall be indicated. [MSP]
shall be equipped with special shipping bearings for shipment
by rail or ship. [ESP]
4.4.4 Lifting points andlifting lugs shall be clearly marked.
Each machine shallbe properly identified with item and serial
numbers. Material shipped in separatecrates shall be suitably
identified with securely affixed, corrosion-resistant metal tags
indicating the item and serial number of the equipment for
which it is intended. The recommended lifting arrangement
shall be identified on boxed equipment. [ESP]
4.4.9 Bearing assemblies shall be fully protected from the
entry of moisture and dirt. If vapor-phase-inhibitor crystals in
bags are installed in large cavities to absorb moisture, the
bagsmust be attachedinan
accessible area for ease of
removal. Where applicable, bags shall be installed in wire
cages attached to flanged covers, and bag locations shall be
indicated by corrosion-resistant tags attached with stainless
steel wire. [MSP]
4.4.5 The fit-up and assembly of machine-mounted piping,
coolers and other equipment shall be completed in the vendor’s shop before shipping, unless specifically approved by
the purchaser. [MSP]
4.4.10 Onecopyofthemanufacturer’s
standard installation instructions shall be packed and shipped with theequip
ment. [MSP]
SECTION M U A R A N T E E AND WARRANTY
The details of the guarantee and
wmanty will be developedjointly by the purchaser and the
vendor during the proposal period.
SECTION 6-VENDOR’S DATA
6.1
6.1.4.1
For motors:
a. Average torque and twice slip frequency pulsating torque
versus speed during starting at rated voltage and minimum
starting conditions (voltage andor short circuit MVA)and
any other specified conditions.
O b. Current versus speed during starting at rated voltage and
6.1.2 The vendor’sproposalshall include the information
minimum starting conditions (voltageand/or short circuit
specified in6.1.3 through 6.1.19. [ESP]
MVA) and any other specified conditions.
6.1.3 ThevendorshallcompletetheVendors
Sections of
c. The inertia of the rotor.
the motor or generator data sheets in Appendix A or Appen- O d. Estimated times for acceleration at rated voltage and minidix B. [ESP]
mum starting conditions (voltage andor short circuit MVA)
and any other specified conditions.
6.1.4 Thevendor
shall providecompleteperformance
O e. The locked-rotor (stalled) withstand time, with the motor
curves anddata to fully define the envelope of operations and
at ambient temperature and at its maximum rated operating
the point at which the manufacturer has ratedthe equipment,
temperature, at rated voltage and minimum starting condiincluding the following items:
6.1.1 The evaluation factor. Machines will be evaluated on
the basis of life-cyclecost (purchase price plus present worth
of losses) when the evaluation factor(dollars per kilowatt) is
shown on thedata sheets. [ESP]
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
O
Proposals
STD.API/PETRO S T D S9b-ENGL L997 m 0732290 05b7473 O S T
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500 KVA AND URGER
tions {voltage andfor short circuitMVA) and any other specified conditions. (See2.2.6.3.)
f. Expectedefficiency as determined in accordancewith
IEEE 1 15 and ANSI (250.10,
or IEC 34- 1, or by certified data
from previously tested designs. The purchaser in consultation
withthevendorshallspecifythemethod
to beused. For
motors with pulsating current, efficiency under actual operating conditions will be used
to evaluate the life-cyclecost.
ages, or assemblies are involved. Thesedata shall be entered
on the data sheets. [ESP]
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.1.7 Thevendorshallprovideapreliminarydimensional
outline drawing showing the location of inlet and discharge
connections and the direction of rotation when viewed from
the end opposite the drive end. [ESP]
6.1.8 The vendor shall provide a schematic diagram of the
lube-oil system. [ESP]
Note: To verify performance. it may be necessary to check motor current pulsations under load in the field using an oscilloscope.
O
g. When specified, for motors that drive reciprocating compressors or pumps requiring a variable torque during each
motor revolution,the maximum current variation under actual
operatingconditions,thecalculatedefficiencyunderthese
conditions based on an expected minimum efficiency, and the
method of calculating the efficiency under operating conditions. The effect of voltage drop in the power supply system
shall be considered. The purchaser will furnish the value for
the minimum short-circuit kilovolt-amperes of the power
sup
ply system. Compressor crank-effort diagrams and other relevant data will
be
supplied
by
the
purchaser
for the
determination of current pulsations.
h. A description of the field application and synchronization
circuit and devices. [ESP]
6.1.9 The vendor shall provide typical drawings and literature to fully describe the details of the offering or offerings.
The vendor shall show
shaft sealing and bearing details, internal construction, rotor
construction,and the method of attaching the amortisseur bar
to the shortingring. [ESP]
6.1.4.2 Forgenerators:
a. Short circuit currents vs. time for three phase, line to line
and line to ground faultconditions.
b. Transient (momentary) voltage regulation during sudden
application and removal of 100 percent, 75 percent, 50 percent of full load or any other specified load value.
c. Total and single harmonic voltages expressed in percent of
fundamental voltage for line to line and line to neutral with
unit operatingat rated voltage, frequency and no
load.
d. The inertia of the rotor.
e. Zero sequence reactance to enable the purchaser to complete ground fault calculation.
f. Expectedefficiency as determinedinaccordancewith
C50.10 or IEC 34.1, or by certified data
IEEE 1 15 and ANSI
from previously tested designs. The purchaser in consultation
with the vendor shall specify the method tobe used.
g. Synchronizing power per electrical radian (Pr) at no load
and full load.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
6.1.10 Thevendorshallprovideaspecificstatementthat
the complete machine and all auxiliary equipment
are in strict
accordance with this standard. If the machine and auxiliary
equipmentarenotin
strict accordance,thevendorshall
include a specific list that details and explains each deviation.
Deviations may include alternative designsor systems equivalent to and ratedfor the specified duties. [ESP]
6.1.1 1 Thevendorshallprovideanexplicitstatementof
the proposed guarantee and warranty (see Section5). [ESP]
6.1.12 Thevendorshallprovideastatementofthefixed
number of weeks required to effect shipment after receipt of
the order and all engineering data. Separate times shall be
stated for multiple shipments,as in the case of separate packages or assembliesor multiple units. [ESP]
6.1.13 The vendor shall provide a statement of the promised time or times after placementof the order for transmittal
of the contract data(see 6.12). This information shall be presented in the form of an explicit schedule. [ESP]
6.1.14 The vendor shall provide an itemized list of thespecial tools included in the offering. The vendor shall list any
metric items included in the offering.[ESP]
O
6.1.15 The vendor shall provide a separate price for each
optional test that is specified and a packaged price
for all the
tests specified on the data sheets. [ESP]
O
6.1.16 When specified, the vendor shall provide an outline
of all necessary special weather and winterizing protection
required for the machine andits auxiliaries for start-up, operation, and idleness. The vendor shall quote separately the protective items he proposesto furnish. [ESP]
6.1.5 The vendor shall provide utility requirements such as
water,air,and lube oil, includingthequantityof
lube oil
requiredat the supplypressureandtheheatloadtobe
removed by the oil. (Approximate data shall be defined and
clearly identified as such.) This information shall be entered
on the data sheets. [ESP]
6.1.6 The vendor shall provide net weights and maximum
erection weights with identification of the item. These data
shall be stated individually where separate shipments, pack-
37
6.1.17 The vendor shall provide catalog cut sheets or similar data that describe all the auxiliary equipment. [ESP]
O
6.1.18 Whenspecified,thevendorshallprovideastatement of the rate for furnishing a competent erection supervisor, as well as an estimate of thelengthoftimethe
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD-API/PETRO STD 5Vb-ENGL L997 M 0732290 05b747L1 T9b H
38
API STANDARD
546
capabilityrequired for erectionandmaintenanceshall
be
included.
b. The direction of rotation.
0 6.1.19 When specified, materials shall be identified in the
c. As applicable, thesize, type, location, and identificationof
proposalwiththeir
applicable AISI, ANSI, ASTM, and
all the purchaser’s connections,including power, control, and
ASME or IS0 numbers,including the materialWhen
instrument
wiring; supply anddrain details for lubrication oil
no such designation is available, the vendor’s material specifiand
cooling
water, andinlet and discharge details for cooling
cation, giving physical properties, chemical composition, and
or
purge
air,
as well as frame vents and drains. Connections
test requirements, shall be included in the proposal.
[ESP]
plugged by the vendorshall be identified.
d. When applicable, the make,size, and type of couplings.
6.2 Contract Data
e. A list of any special weather-protection and climatization
6.2.1 GENERAL
featuressupplied by thevendorandrequired
by thepurchaser.
6.2.1.1 Thefollowingparaamphsspecifytheinformation
f. A listofauxiliary or other equipment furnished bythe
to be furnished by the vendor.[ESP]
vendor for mounting by the purchaser.
6.2.1.2 The data shall be identified ontransmittal letters
g. Rigging provisions for removal of parts that weigh more
and in title blocks or pages with the following information:
than 136 ki10,orams (300 pounds).
a. The purchaser/user’s corporate name.
m h. Completeinformation to permitadequatefoundation
b. The job/project number.
design by thepurchaser.This
shall include thefollowing
items:
c. The equipment name and item
number.
d. The purchase order number.
l. The size and location of foundation bolts.
0 e. Any other identification specified inthe purchase order.
2.
The weight distributionfor each bolt/subsoleplate locaf. The vendor’s identifying shop order number, serial numtion.
ber, or other reference required to identify return correspon3. Any unbalanced forces or moments generated by the
dence completely.[ESP]
unit or units in the specified operating
range.
6.2.1.3 The vendorshall complete the Vendor Drawing and
4. The location ofthe center of gravity.
DataRequirementsform (see AppendixD), detailing the
5. Foundation forces as a result of worst case transient
schedule for transmission of drawings, curves, and data as
conditions. [MSP]
agreed to at the time of the order, as well as the number and
type of copies required by the purchaser. [ESP]
6.2.2.4 Thevendor shall supplyschematicdiagramsand
bills of materials for each auxiliary system in the vendor’s
6.2.2 DRAWINGS
scope of supply, including control systems, as well as dimensional outline drawings for accessories and instruments. The
O 6.2.2.1 The purchaser will state in theinquiryandinthe
bills of materials shallinclude and identifyall components by
order the number ofprints andor reproducibles required and
make, type, size, capacity rating, materials, and other dataas
are to be submittedby the vendor
the times within which they
applicable. [MSP]
(see 6.1.12). [ESP]
6.2.2.5 Each drawing and diagram shall have a title block
O 6.2.2.2 The purchaserwillpromptlyreviewthevendor’s
in the lower right comer, showing certification, reference to
drawings when he receives them; however, this review shall
not constitute permission to deviate from any requirements in all identificationdata specified in 6.2.1.2, the revision number
and date,and the drawing title, all visible when the drawing
is
the order unless specifically agreed upon in writing. After
the
folded
to
A4
metric
size
or
8V2
x
11
inches.
Bills
of
materials
drawings have been reviewed, the vendor shall furnish certishall be similarly identified. [MSP]
fied copies in the quantity specified. Drawings shall
be clearly
condi-
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
supervisor’s services will be required under normal
tions. [ESP]
legible. l?víSP]
6.2.2.6 A complete list of
vendor
drawings
shall
be
included with the first-issue major drawings. This list shall
contain the titles and a schedule for transmission of all the
drawings to be furnished by the vendor.[MSP]
6.2.2.3 The drawings furnished shall contain enough information so that whenthey are combined with the manuals
specified in 6.2.4, the purchaser may properly install,
operate,
and maintain the ordered equipment.As a minimum, the following details shall be provided:
6.2.3 DATA
a. Overalldimensionsandweights
for each separately
installed piece. Maintenance clearances and weight-handling
6.2.3.1 The vendor shall provide full information to enable
completion of the As Built Data Sheets.[ESP]
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D * A P I / P E T R O STD 54b-ENGL L777 m 0732270 0 5 b 7 4 7 5 722 m
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500 KVA AND LARGER
6.2.3.2 Thevendorshallmake
available to the purchaser:
,
,
the followinginformation
title pages containing section titles and complete lists of the
included reference drawings by title and drawing number. If
theinstructionmanualsapplytomorethanonemodel
or
series of equipment, the instructions shall clearly indicate the
specific sections that applyto the equipment involved. [ESP]
Completed
a.
As Built
Data Sheets.
b. A record of shop test data (which the vendor shall maintain for at least 5 years after the date of shipment). When
specified, the vendor shall submit certified copies of the test
data to the purchaser beforeshipment.
O c. When specified, the calculated rotor-response curves.
d. The rotor-balance report.
e. The vendor shall supply complete winding data with the
Instruction Manuals. Thedata shall be sufficient to permit the
owner to have a set of stator coils built if required. The data
shall include:
0
1. Number of coils, winding connection and throw.
2. Total copper weight, copper strand sizes and details of
both turn and ground wall insulation.
3. Turns percoil and number of parallels.
4. LenD& of iron including vents.
5. Stator bore diameter, slot depth and width, plus depth
below wedge.
6. Finished coil dimensions in slot, plus details of semiconducting finish andstress or ,-dient
paint treatment at
the coil endturns, if any. [ESP]
39
6.2.4.3 Theinstallationmanualshallincludeanyspecial
information required for proper installation design and actual
installation that is not on the drawings (which shall be compiled in a separate manual). This manual shall be forwarded
at a time mutually agreed upon in the order but not later than
as spethe final-issue prints. It shall contain information such
cialalignmentprocedures,utilityspecifications
(including
quantity), and all installation design data. [ESP]
B
6.2.4.4 Operationandmaintenancemanualsshall
be forwarded no more than 2 weeks after successful completionof
all specified tests. If required, these manuals shall include a
sectionofspecialinstruction
for operation at specified
extreme environmental (suchas temperature) conditions. The
following items shallbe included in the manual:
a. Instructionscoveringstart-up,normalshutdown,emergencyshutdown,operatinglimits,androutineoperational
procedures.
b. Outline and sectional drawing, schematics, and illustrative
sketches in sufficient detail to identify all parts andto clearly
6.2.4INSTRUCTIONMANUALS
show the operation of all equipment and components and the
O 6.2.4.1 Thenumberofmanuals,thespecific
information,
methodofinspectionandrepair.Standardizedsectionaldrawand the detail required for each purchase will be defined
iningsareacceptableonlyiftheyrepresenttheactualconstructhepurchasingdocumentincludedwiththeinquiry.[MSP]tion.[ESP]
B
6.2.4.2 The vendor shall provide written instructions and a
@B 6.2.4.5 When specified, one complete set
of photographs
cross-referenced list of all drawings to enable the purchaser to showing the assembly of the machine shall be provided. Each
be individually
photoinstall, operate,
and
maintain
the
complete
equipment
step
of the
bearing
assembly
shall
ordered. Thisinformationshall be compiled in manualswithgraphed.[ESP]
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD-API/PETRO STD 54b-ENGL L777 m 0732290 0 5 b 7 q 7 b A b 7
m
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
APPENDIX A-SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DATA SHEET
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D 54b-ENGL L797 m 0732270 05b7477 7 T 5 m
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
DATA
SHEET
PAGE
Facility Name/Location:
me:
Item
urchase
Number: TagEquipment
I
Supplier:
1 OF 10
Project
O Supplier
GENERAL
Number:
0
1
API STD 546
0
0
Applicable
To:
Proposal
Purchase
As
Built
(See
Notes
Below
for
Explanation
of Symbols.)
Basic Data:
Applicable Standards
North American (Le., ANSI, NEMA)
International (¡.e., IECJSO)
Special Purpose Paragraphs Apply (1.1.2.)
1 Duty:Hertz
Continuous
Other
Phase
Volts
1
Synchronous
RPM
Service
Factor
(2.2.1.3)
Nameplate HP, kW (2.2.1.1)
Voltage and Frequency Variations (2.2.4)
Insul.ClassPF 1 Rated
1 Stator Temperature Rise (2.3.1
"C "C
.l) By Above
1
"C By Resistance
Sealed Exciter Windings Required (2.3.2.2.2)
Rotor
Temperature
Rise
Above
"C
1 O Manufacturer's Type
O Frame Size
1
Other
1 Site Data (2.1.21:
1 Area Classification
Group
Class
(2.1.7):
- Division
c] Nonclassified
1
Code
Temperature
Group
Class
Zone
iTemperature,
Ignition
Than
If Less
250°C
Elevation
Site
"C
ft/m
i Ambient
Temperature:
Max
"C
Min "C
i
Max Humidity:
Relative
%
Min
oo
/
i
Motor
Location:
Indoor
Building
Temperature
Controlled:
c]Yes
No
i
Outdoor
c] Roof
Over
Motor
Roof
Over
No
Motor
i Nonmassive Foundation (2.4.6.1.2), Description
i
i
Unusual Conditions:
2
.4.1.2.2,
Dust
2
1Agents
Corrosive
(2.4.2.2)
Loading
Seismic
2
Other
Enclosure 12.4.1.2.1k
l
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0TEFC
(2.4.1.2.3)
0 Weather
Protected
(2.4.1.2.2):
0 Type I
0 TEPV
TEWAC
(2.4.1.2.4)
c]TEAAC,
Tubes
(2.4.10.8,
a):
0 Copper
0 Stainless
Steel
Fasteners
(2.4.1.1,
c)
c] Explosion
Proof
0 Horizontal
0 FootMounted
0 EngineType:
1
1
[7 Open-Drip-proof
0 Type II
Other
0 Stainless
Steel
0 Provision
for
Purging
(2.4.1.1,
f)
0 System
Cooling
c]Aluminum
IP
0 Vertical
0 Pedestal
c]
c]
ShaftUp
Bearings Furnished By
ShaftDown
FlangeMounted
Shaft Furnished By
Notes:
O Denotesinformation to befurnishedbv SuDDlier
with the Proposal.
O Denotes required information to be furnished by
Supplier upon receipt of Purchase Order.
J
..
43
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Protection
of
Degree
Mounting:
0
' S T D = A P I / P E T R OSTD 54b-ENGL 1997
m 0732290 n5b7478
m
API
SYNCHRONOUS
MOTOR
STD 546
API
PAGESHEETDATA
2 OF 10
1
GENERAL (CONT)
Baseplate:FurnishedBy (2.4.2.6)
Soleplate:FurnishedBy(2.4.2.6)
EpoxyGroutToBe Used (2.4.2.7.4) Type
3
Axial Stator
Shift
Required
(2.4.2.16)
4 Special Connections for Field Piping (2.4.3.1)
5 8O When Rotor Dynamic Analysis Is Specified, List of Foundation Data Required from Purchaser (2.4.6.1.2):
0
0
2
6
7 Electrical Svstem:
8 Primary
e: Power
9 Max
S.C.
MVA
at
Motor
Bus
(3.1.2)
I't Let-Through
Energy
(3.1.2)
10 Min S.C. at Motor Bus (2.2.5.2, b)
atMVA
k v base
WR Ratio
11 Method
System
ofGrounding
(3.6.2.2)
Maximum
Ground
Fault
Amperes
12 Other
13 Motor Startina:
14 [7 Full Voltage
Reduced
Voltage
9%
Type
15
Other Starting Method
16
Voltage
at Dip Locked
Rotor
- Max %
At KVA Inrush
17
Loaded
Unloaded
Loaded
Partially
18 c] Starting Torques in Excess of NEMA or IEC (2.2.5.1)
19
Number of Full
Voltage
Starts
if Not 5000
(2.2.6.2,2.4.5.1.1)
20 Load
Reacceleration
Required
(2.2.3.2, b):
Yes
No
If Yes
Complete
the
Following:
21
rminals
olts
Motor at
Voltage
Interruption
Voltage
SecMax
22
Reacceleration Curve No.
23 Swcial Conditions:
24 [7 Special Vibration Requirements (4.3.3.10)
25 Evaluation
(6.1.1)
(EF)
Factor
HP/KW $/kW
at
applied
2s Federal, State, or Local Codes (2.1.7):
27 Any Extemal Forces on Motor Housing That May Affect Site Performance (2.1.1 3,2.4.4):
ear
28
29
0
0
0
0
I
-
DRIVEN EQUIPMENT INFORMATION
30 Driven Equipment Tag No.:
31 Type:
Pump
Centrifugal Compressor
Other
z2
Reciprocating Compressor: Compressor Factor "C"
Crank-Effort DataNo.
33
Max Current Pulsation (NEMA Defined) (2.2.7.1, c):
40%
66%
Other
34
Calculated Efficiency Based on Current-Pulsation Operating Conditions (6.1
-4.1, 9
35
DirectConnected
36
Speed-Increasing-Reducing Gear(2.2.3.2, c):
37 Ratio
WK2 (2.2.3.2, c)
RPM
lb-V at
38 Type of Coupling (2.4.9.4):
39
Manufacturer's
Standard Model
Mfr 671 API Per
40
Taper FI
CylindricalFit
Flange
OtherCouplingData
Coupling WK2 (2.2.3.2, c)
41
lb-ff at
RPM
42
Mass Moment
of
Coupling
Half
(2.4.6.2.2.1, 9
lb ft
43
Supplied By:
Motor
Mfr
Driven
Equipment
Mfr
Purchaser
Others
44
Mounted By:
Motor
Mfr
c] DrivenEquipmentMfr
Purchaser
Others
45 Rotation of Motor ViewedfromMotorExciter End:
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Bidirectional
46 Total
Driven-Equipment
WK2
(2.2.3.2, c)
RPM
lb-@ at
47 Load Speed-Torque Curve No. (2.2.3.2, a)
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
44
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
0
0
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0
0
0
0
0
STD-API/PETRO
STD 5I.lb-ENGL L997 6 0732290 05b7I.l79 578 m
API STD 546
SYNCHRONOUSMOTOR
API
DATA SHEET PAGE
3 OF 10
I
I
MOTORDATA
3otor Construction:
O Solid
Cylindrical
O Laminated
Cylindrical
3
O Salient-Pole "Star" Punching Type, Shrunk Onto Shaft
4
O Salient-PoleDove-Tail or T-Tail AttachmentToShaft
O Other
5 Jlinimum Yo Overspeed
(2.1.4,
2.4.5.2.7)
V (6.1.4.1,
Rotor
Wk2
c)
6 Torque
(FLT)
) Full-Load
ft-lb
V Locked-Rotor
Torque
7 ) Pull-ln Torque
% FLT
Torque
O Pull-Out
8 ) Provide
Motor
Starting
100%
Data
at
,
Yo, 8 %Voltages
9 ) Motor Speed-Torque (6.1.4.1.a) Curve No.
IO ) Motor Speed - Pulsating Torque (6.1.4.1.a) Curve No.
I l 1 Motor Speed-Current (6.1.4.1, b), Curve No.
12 ) Motor Speed - Power Factor Curve No.
13 ) Acceleration Curve No.
14 > Estimated
Acceleration
100°/~
Time
(6.1.4.1,
Voltage
at d)Sec;
at
15 > Locked-Rotor
Withstand
Time,
Cold
(6.1.4.1,
100%
at
e) Voltage
-Sec;
at
I6 3 Locked-Rotor
WithstandTime,RatedTemp(6.1.4.1,e)at100%Voltage
-Sec;at
17 3 Locked
Rotor
Current
100%
at Voltage
Amps;
at
YO Voltage
Amps
1
2
lb-ft2
RPMat
Yo FLT
% FLT
% Voltage
% Voltage
Sec
Voltage
O Locked-Rotor
PF
o/o
Sec
Sec
-Oh
I€
1E
2c
21
3 Calculated ExDected Data16.1.4.1. f l at the Followina Loads:
1/2
3/4
Amperes
Power Factor
o
z
Efficiency
3
Guaranteed
Efficiency
Load:
and
PFat
z
For
Current-Pulsation
Operating
Cond.
a Rated
Field: Motor
2; Rated
Field: Exciter
u
0
Full
V
(6.1.4.1, g), Calc. Eff.
21
2! O Motor Parameters [State Per
Unit
Values.
Motor
3 X,
Armature
Leakage
Reactance
3 X,
DirectAxisArmatureReactance
3 Synchronous
X,Reactance
(Saturated)
Axis
Un-Saturated
Direct
3 X,
Potier
Reactance
8 X',
Saturated
urated)
ctance
nsient
Axis Direct
3 Subtransient
X",
Reactance
(Saturated)
Axis
Un-Saturated
Direct
3 X,,
QuadratureAxisArmatureReactance
3 X,
Quadrature
Synchronous
Axis
Reactance
(Saturated)
Un-Saturated
Field
Leakage
Reactance
3 X,
3
X', Transient
Reactance
Quadrature
(Saturated)
Axis
Un-Saturated
Calc.
Current
Pulsation
kVA Base at Rated Voltaae and 25OC1:
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4
X", Quadrature
Subtransient
Axis
Reactance
(Saturated)
Un-Saturated
4
Xk,
Quadrature Axis Amortisseur Reactance (SIip = 1.O)
4
X,
Direct Axis Amortisseur Reactance (Slip = 1.O)
4
X,
Direct Axis Amortisseur Reactance (Slip = 1.O)
4
X,
Zero
Sequence
Reactance
4 (Saturated)
Un-Saturated
Reactance
X, Sequence
Negative
4
R,
Stator
Armature
Resistance/Phase
L
R,
Field
Resistance
(Without
FDRs)
45
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SF
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
L977 E 0732290 0 5 b 7 ~ 8 O2 9 T
S T D - A P I / P E T R OS T D5 q b - E N G L
API STD 546
SYNCHRONOUSMOTOR
API
PAGE 4 OF 10
DATA SHEET
-1.
MOTOR DATA (CONT)
Field Resistance (With FDRs)
Quadrature Axis Amortisseur Resistance (Slip
= 1.O)
4 I
Direct Axis Amortisseur Resistance (Slip
= 1.O)
Zero Sequence Resistance
5 I
Positive Sequence Resistance
6 I
Negative Sequence Resistance
7 I
Armature Short-Circuit Time Constant, Sec
8
Direct Axis TransientOpen-circuit Time Constant, Sec
9
Quadrature Axis TransientOpen-circuit Time Constant, Sec
10
Direct Axis Subtransient Open-circuit Time Constant, Sec
11
Quadrature Axis Subtransient Open-circuit Time Constant, Sec
12
Direct Axis Transient Short-Circuit Time Constant, Sec
13
Direct Axis Subtransient Short-Circuit Time Constant, Sec
14
Synchronizing Torque Coefficient, kW/Radian (For reciprocating loads only)
15 l
Winding
Capacitance to Ground, Microfarads/Phase
16
17 I2t
Limit
18 Bearinas:
19 Bearing TypeRequired:
Hydrodynamic(2.4.7.1)
Oil RingsRequired(2.4.8.1)
20 Thrust Bearings, Maximum Connected Equipment Thrust (2.4.7.10)
21 Self-Lube
O Bearing,
Coupling
End:Type
Capable
of
in.
Max
22
Bore Diameter: Min
ength
Bore
23
in. Max
DesignClearancewithShaft:Min in.
24
Bearing Loading:
PSI
Manufacturer
25
Thrust Bearing:
Top
Bottom
Manufacturer
26 O Bearing,
Outboard
End:
Self-Lube
Capable
Type
of
27
Min Max
Bore
Diameter:
in.
Bore Length
28
Design Clearance with Shaft: Min
in. Max
2s
Manufacturer
PSI
Bearing
- Loading:
2
I
3 I
0 Antifriction (2.4.7.2)
0
0
x
31
3¿
3
34of
x
3E
37
3€
8
4(
41
4i
4
Part No.
Part No.
in.
in.
in.
Part No.
0 Special Seals for Gas Purge (2.4.7.21)
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
c]Pressure or FloodLube(2.4.8.4):SystemSuppliedBy(2.4.8.4)
0 Common With DrivenEquip(2.4.8.4;2.4.8.5)
c]Fer API
614 (2.4.8.7)
[7 Mfr'sStandard(2.4.8.8)
Type Oil
Pressure (2.4.8.8.2)
Oil viscosity
O Bearing Oil Requirements (6.1 5): O
GPM O
PSI O Heat Loss To Be Removed
Main Oil Pump
Required:
Integral Shaft
Driven
(2.4.8.8.3)
c]Separate
If Separate:
Vertical
Horizontal
Type
of Drive:
Steam
Turbine
Motor
Standby
Pump
OilRequired
(2.4.8.8.5):
Vertical
c]Horizontal
Steam Turbine
Motor
Type Drive:
of
O Turbine Driver:
O Pressure
PSlG
O Temperature
Range
O F to
"F
Hertz
Volts
Phase
O Electric Motor Driver:
Single
[7 Duplex OilFiltersRequired (2.4.8.8.7)
Filter Element (2.4.8.8.7):
Manufacturer
Model
Oil CoolerRequired(2.4.8.8.6):
WaterCooled
AirCooled O ConstructionDetails
0
-kW
0
0
0
-B 0
4
0
in.
0
0
0
0
0
46
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
0
I
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
API
DATA SHEET
I
API STD 546
PAGE 5 OF 10
I
LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CONT)
1 Self-Lube:
Bearing Housing Heaters Required (2.4.8.3)
0 Bearing Constant-Level Sight Feed Oilers Required
(2.4.7.12):Type
Oil Mist for Antifriction Bearings (2.4.7.14)
Grease
1Bearings:
Antifriction
Type
ACCESSORYEQUIPMENT
rEWAC Heat Exchanaer:
Exchanger Location (2.4.1.2.4, c)
7edundant
Coolers
Required
(2.4.1.2.4,
b):
Yes
No
f Cooling Water Conditions Not Per (2.4.1.2.4, a):
Specify Differences
Max
3(PSIG):
Min
Press
Water
;O
(GPM):
Flow
Water
Tube Material (2.4.1.2.4 e, 2.4.10.8, b)
rube Construction
(2.4.1.2.4,
e)
Double
Tube
Single
Tube
Temperature
Air
Sensor
Required
(2.4.1.2.4,
Description
h)
FlowSensor Local lndicatorRequired (2.4.1.2.4,g)RelayContacts
[7 Leak
Detection
Required
(2.4.1.2.4,
Type
c) and
Description
GPM
Point
Set
Alarm
Flow
High
Low
GPM
Point
Shutdown
Flow
Set
3
M=
Min
0
~~
0 NO
NC
~~
Air Filters (3.5):
0 ProvisionOnly(3.5.2)
O Manufacturer
0 DifferentialPressureSwitch:
Required
(3.5.4)
0 Type
0 ProvisionsOnly
O Manufacturer
Main Conduit Box Sized For !3.1.1):
0
0
0
Differential
Pressure
Gauge
0 Type
Size Conductor
Cable: Feeder
Bottom
Top
(3.1.4):
Entering
From
Phase
Quantity
Per
Both Ends of Stator Winding Brought Out to Terminal Box (2.2.2.1)
Insulated
Uninsulated
TerminationsandInteriorJumpers:
Current Transformers for Differential Protection (2.2.2.1 ; 3.1.6, j; 3.1.8; 3.6.3):
Core
Balance
Differential
Full Accuracy
Class
Type:
Supplied By
By Mounted
Ratio
Quantity
Microfarads
[7 Surge Capacitors (3.1 -6, i; 3.6.2.1):
Mounted
By
Supplied By
kV Rated
Surge Arresters (3.1.6, i; 3.6.2.2):
Mounted By
Supplied By
Current Transformers (3.1.6, j) For Ammeter
Class
Accuracy
d
By
Supplied
0
0
0
0
0
Potential Transformers (3.1.6, I) For Voltmeter
Accuracy Class
Quantity
Supplied By
Fuses Required
Bushing Studs or Receptacles (3.1 -6,h)
Space For Stress Cones (3.1.6, g)
Thermal Insulation(3.1.6, a)
(3.1.6,
Heaters
Space
b):
Volts
0
0
Ratio
Mounted By
Phase
47
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
O
kW
0 Side
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0
0
5
6
7
0 Fault Withstand (3.1.2)
0 Ground Bus (3.1 .&m)
0 Other Terminal Box Requirements (3.1-6)
8 .
9
10
11
12
13
14
I
L
Exciter %ace
0 Stator SDace Heaters (3.4.1.3.4.2):
OkW
Volts
Phase Volts
0 Maximum Sheath Temperature-"C, or Temperature Code (3.4.3)
0 Sheath Material, If Not Mfr Standard
0 Bearina Heaters 12.4.8.3: 2.4.8.8.81:
Heaters
Phase
-0
kW
0 Type
15
Volts
16
Phase
kW
O
Maximum Sheath Temperature-OC, or Temperature Code
17
18 Windina TemDerature Detectors (3.2.1 :3.5.5):
19
RTDs:
Qty/Phase
Material
.
,
20
Yes
Ground
One
Lead
(3.2.1.2)
21
Thermocouples:
Qty/Phase
Type
0
0
22
0 No
O Stator
Winding
Temperature
Switch
Recommended
Settings:
Ohms O -"C
O Alan
Type:
"C
0 SWire 0 2-Wire
O Shutdown
"C
23
24 Hvdrodvnamic & Thrust Bearina TemoeratureDevices (3.31:
25
26
27
28
0 Provision
Only
Manufacturer's
Standard
0 API
670
Other
0
Ohms
Detector
Material
RTD:
O
Type:"C
0 3-Wire 0 2-Wire
Thermocouple:
Type
0 Dial TypeThermometers(2.4.7.19):
Alarm
Contacts
Number
of
Contacts
- UNO DNC
29 Location
30 Description
31 O Bearing
Temperature
Recommended
Settings:
O Alarm
O C
O Shutdown
22 O Thrust
Bearing
Temp.
Recommended
Settings:
O Alarm
OC O Shutdown
"C
33 Terminal Head or Box (3.1.1 1)
34
35 Vibration Detectors f3.8):
36
NoncontactingProbes(3.8.1)
Installed
Provisions Only Qty/Bearing:
Two(3.8.1)
37 Type
Probe
Furnished
Probe
Model
By
38 Oscillator/Demodulator
OscillatorlDemodulator
Model
Furnished
By
39
BearingHousingSeismicSensors(3.8.3)
ProvisionsOnly
Installed
ocation 40 Qty/Bearing
(H,V,A)
Type 41 Sensor
42 Sensor
ed
ucerby Furnished
43
Vibration
Switch:
Manual
Reset
Electric
Reset
44 Switch Type ~.
Model
45 Terminal Heador Box (3.1.1 1) -
0
0
0
0
~
0
0
0
0
0
0
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
"C
0Four(3.8.2)
S T D * A P I / P E T R O S T D SVb-ENGL L777
m
0732250 05b7483 T T 7
I
I
API STD546
SYNCHRONOUSMOTOR
API
PAGE 7 OF 10
DATA SHEET
I
1
CONTROLS
Motor Vendor t o Furnish:
3
Manufacturer's Standard Excitation Control (Including Application & Protection) Package for Mounting in:
4
Purchaser's
Switchgear
Vendor
Furnished
Control
Panel
5 z
]Separate Control Devices, as Checked, for Mounting in:
6
Purchaser's
Switchgear
Vendor
Furnished
Control
Panel
7
Completely Assembled Control Panel with Devices as Checked (3.6.4.2)
8
Devices Mounted on Front of Panel. Labeled as Indicated:
9
Motor
"START-STOP
Switch
Pilot
Lights:
"RUN
c] "STOP" [7 "READY"
10
Ammeter (O - 5 A), O A Scale,"MOTORAMPERES"
11
Voltmeter (O - 150
VAC),
OScale,
kV "MOTOR
VOLTAGE"
12
[7 "POWER
FACTOR"
Meter,
0.80 - 1 - 0.80
Scale
Scale
or
13
Ammeter, O
Amps
Scale,
"EXCITER
FIELD
AMPERES"
14
Rheostat, O "EXCITER
Scale
A,
VAC,
FIELD"
15
Potentiometer,
"EXCITER
FIELD"
"EXCITER
FIELD
ON-OFF"
Test
Switch
16
Timer, O SecSec, On
Delay,
"INCOMPLETE
SEQUENCE"
17
Timer, O Sec
Sec, Off Delay, "OUT-OF-STEP
18
Overcurrent Relays (3), Instantaneous, 0.5 - 2 A Range, "DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION: Type:
19
[7 OvertemperatureRelay, 50 - 190°CRange,ForUsewithOhmRTD,"STATORTEMPERATURE"
20
Quantity
Type
21
Alarm
Panel
Automatic
Power-Factor
Controller
VAR Controller
22Manufacturer
Model
Monitors:
Probe
Vibration
23
Temperature
"CIndicator,
24
Other
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
3
l
34
3E
8
0
0
-
0
0
Devices Mounted Inside Panel. Labeled to Coincide with Drawina identification:
Control
Power
Transformer,
Constant
Voltage,
INA,
V-120 V Rated to Maintain 95%
Secondary Voltage with 50% Dip of Primary Voltage
Full-WaveBridge,SiliconRectifiersA(Min
of 125% of Exciter Field Amperes),ConvectionCoolec
Contactor, Exciter Field Current
Field Monitor Relay, to Switch and Signal on Loss of Field or Out of Step Condition
AuxiliaryandTimingRelays,asRequired
SurgeSuppressorsandFuses,asRequired
Terminal Blocks, Heavy Duty, Identified by Unique Numbers, Number as Req'd with20% Spares
Switches
Required
Alarm
forand
Control
Devices
(3.6.1):
Contacts:
AC
DC
Control
Panel
Wiring
Entrance:
Top
Bottom
[7 Side
Other
0
0
0
0
0
37
8
32
4
41
4
4:
4
4!
4
I
49
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D * A P I / P E T R O S T D 54b-ENGL 1717 I0732270 0 5 b 7 q 8 4 735 I
1
2 Paintina:
3
Supplier'sStandard
0 ExtraCoat
User's Special Paint (4.4.3.1)
4
5 ShiDment:
6
7
0 Outdoor Storage for More Than Six Months (4.4.1)
0 Domestic 0 Export 0 ExportBoxingRequired
0 Special Shipping Bearings (4.4.3.9)
0 Special Winterizing Requirements(6.1.1 6)
8
9
10 Miscellaneous:
11 O Net
Weight
lb
0
0
Piping Assembled (4.4.5)
Mounted on Skid (4.4.3.6)
Weight
O Rotor
lb
O Stator
lbs Weight
12
Pressure
Maximum
Level
Sound
(2.1.3)
dBA
13
Quantity of Special Tools Required (2.1.1 1,2.4.2.14)
14 [7 Proof of Nonsparking, Corrosion-Resistant Fan (2.4.1 0.6)
15
Special Low-Temperature Materials Requirements
(2.4.1 0.4)
16
17
List of Materials To Be Identified With ApplicableANSI, ASTM, or ASME Numbers (6.1.19)
18
19
Special Identificationfor Transmittals (6.2.1.2,
e)
20 Nameplate
Material (2.4.11.l):
Stainless
Steel
Monel
Other
21
Separate Nameplate with Purchaser's Information(2.4.1 1.4)
22
OutlineforSpecialWeatherProtection (6.1.16)
Commissioning Assistance Required (6.1.18)
22
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
24
E O Stator Coil Information:
2€ Total Copper
Weight
2i
2E
E
3c
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
lb
Insulation
Copper
Size
Strand
Number of Strands
Tum
Turn
Coil
Per
Insulation Description
Number of Turns
Per
Coil
Coil
Ground-Wall
Insulation
Description
Coil Configuration
by
Finished Coil Dimensionin Slot Region, W x H x L (Also Give Tolerances):
Total Number
of
Winding
Slots
Stator
Throw
Winding
Connection
Slot Filler Description Thickness: Top
Between
Side
Top
Special End Turn Bracing
Other Information
-
-
O Rotor Windina Information:
Total Copper
Weight
lb
Strand Conductor
oSize
r Bar
Material
Insulation Description
General Description of Winding (Number of Turns, Formed Coil, Size, Etc,)
41
42
Damper Winding Description, If Applicable
43
44
Retaining RingAlloy, If Applicable
Shaft Material
45
50
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
Columns
- Bottom
Coils
STD.API/PETRO S T D Sqb-ENGL L997
API
I
I
3
I
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
DATA SHEET
I
I
0732290 0 5 b 7 4 8 5 871
PAGE 9 OF 10
I
ANALYSIS. SHOP INSPECTION. AND TESTS
Reauired
bk
4.1.3.3)
(4.1.1;
4.1.3;
-3.2)
(4.1.3.1)
(4.1
~
~~~
~~
rcceDtance Criteria
6.2.3.2.
-12:
(2.1
Iesign Audit
5 'orsional Analysis (2.4.6.2.3)
By
6
.atera1 Critical Speed Analysis(2.4.6.2.2)
7 ;hop Inspection
8 qeview of Quality Control Program (4.2.3.5)
9 nspection for Cleanliness Per API614
(4.2.3.2; 4.2.3.3)
IO lbservance of Assembly/Dismantling (4.3.1.l)
Il lemonstrate Accuracy of Test Equipment(4.3.1.13)
12 Stator Core Test (4.3.4.1)
13 Surge Comparison Test (4.3.4.2)
14 Special Surge Test of Coils (4.3.4.2.1)
15 3alance in Minimum of3 Planes (2.4.6.3.1)
16 -inal Balance (4.2.3.6.)
17 3alance Device (Sensitivity) Test (4.2.3.6)
18 qesidual Unbalance Verification Test (Appendix C) (4.2.3.6)
19 3alance Check with Half Coupling (2.4.6.3.4)
20 3unning Tests with Coupling Half(4.3.1.5)
21 Stator Inspection Prior to VPI (4.2.3.6)
22 Sealed Winding Conformance Test (4.3.4.4)
23 Power Factor Tip-Up Test (4.3.4.3)
24 Manufacturer's Standard Shop and Routine Test (4.3.2)
25 Insulation Resistance Using Preferred Table6 Values (4.3.2.1,
d)
Bearing Dimensional& Alignment Checks Before Tests(4.3.2.1,
i)
27 Vibration Recording (4.3.3.12)
2 Complete Test (4.3.5.1 .l)
25
Efficiency (4.3.5.1.1,
a)
3c
Locked Rotor (4.3.5.1.1,
b)
31
OpedShort-Circuit Saturation (4.3.5.1.l, c)
S
Heat Run (4.3.5.1.1,
d)
3:
Exciter Heat Run(4.3.5.1.1,
e)
Y
No Load V-Curve (4.3.5.1.1,
r)
3!
Sound Pressure Level Test (4.3.5.1.1,
g)
8 Bearing Dimensional Checks After Tests(4.3.5.1.2)
3;
DC High-Potential Test (4.3.5.1.3)
31 Rated Rotor Temperature-Vibration Test
3
(For Motors Not Receiving Complete Test) (4.3.5.2.1)
41 Unbalance Response(4.3.5.4)
4
Bearing Housing Natural Frequency Tests(4.3.5.5)
4 Optional Material Tests To Be Proposed By Vendor (2.4.1 0.1.4)
4
Certification
Materials of
(4.2.1
.i, a)
3
API STD546
Witnessed
Observed
4
o
o
o
o
o
o
D
o
o
o
n
o
o
U
o
o
o
U
0
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
o
c1
U
U
I
51
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
o
U
o
U
o
o
1
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
API STD 546
DATA SHEET
PAGE 10 OF 10
API
-
I
1
2
ANALYSIS, SHOP INSPECTION, AND TESTS ( C O W
Witnessed
Reauired
Observed
b):
(4.1.3.1)
4.1.3.3)
(4.1.3.2)
4.1.3;
(4.1.1;
-1,e)
3 AcceDtance
Criteria
(2.1.176.2.3.2.
4 Final
Clearances
(4.2.1
Running
Assembly
5 Painting
6
Subsurface
Surface
and
Inspection
of(4.2.1.3,
4.2.2.1)
Parts
7
Radiographic Test (4.2.2.2) Parts
8
Ultrasonic Test (4.2.2.3) Parts
9
Magnetic Particle Test (4.2.2.4) Parts
10
Liquid Penetrant Test(4.2.2.5) Parts
11
Hardness Test (4.2.3.4) Parts
12 Certified Data Prior to Shipment (4.3.1.12; 6.2.3.2, b)
13 Other
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
c
l
0
14
15
16
17
0
COMMENTS
18
19
20
21
22
P
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
26
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
I
52
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
0
0
0
U
0
0
U
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
c1
0
c7
0
c
l
APPENDIX B-SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR DATA SHEET
53
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
STD.API/PETRO STD 54b-ENGL L977 U 0732290 0 5 b 7 4 8 7 bllll m
-
1 Facility NamelLocation:
2
aser Name: Equipment
3 Tag
Order
r: Purchase
Number:
Equipment
er
4 supplier:
GENERAL
4pplicable
To:
Proposal
Purchase
As
Built
(See
Notes
Below
for Explanation of Symbols.)
6
7 Basic Data:
8 4pplicableStandardsNorthAmerican(ie.,ANSI,NEMA)
International (¡.e., IEC, ISO)
9
Special Purpose ~ p p l y
(1.I2.)
10
Continuous
Other
Volts
Phase
Duty:
Hertz
11
Nameplate
kVA/kW
(2.2.1.1)
Service
Factor
(2.2.1.3)
Synchronous RPM
12
Insul.Class
Rated
PF Voltage
Frequency
and Variations
(2.2.4)
13 Stator
Temperature
Rise
(2.3.1.l)
"C Above
By"C
14 Rotor Temperature Rise
"C Above -"C By Resistance
Sealed Exciter Windings Required (2.3.2.2.2)
15 O Manufacturer's
Type
Size O Frame
16 Other
17 Minimum o/o Overspeed
2.42
..
51
..
24
.,
7
O Rotor Wk2:
lb-ft2
la Site Data(2.1-2):
19 Area
Classification
(Group
2.1.Class
7):Zone
a Division
[r] Nonclassified
Group
Class
21 Ignition Temperature
fVm
Elevation (If Less Than
Site250%)
"C
22 Temperature:
Min
"C
Ambient
Max
"C
22 Relative
Min
YO
MaxHumidity:
o/o
24 Generator
Yes
No
Building
Temperature
Controlled:
Location:
Indoor
2
Outdoor
Roof
Over
Generator
No Roof Over
Generator
2€ Nonmassive Foundation (2.4.6.1.2),
Description
5
0
7
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
D
27
2E
Unusual Conditions:
Dust (2.4.1.2.2,
c)
3
( Seismic
Loading
(2.4.2.2)
3' Other
3: Enclosure (2.4.1.2.1 1:
3:
Explosion
Proof
TEFC (2.4.1.2.3)
3
Weather
Protected
(2.4.1.2.2):
Type I
3!TEWACTEPV
(2.4.1.2.4)
3
TEMC, Tubes (2.4.10.8,
Item a):
Copper
3
Cooling
System
Enclosure
Protection
IEC
IP
3
Stainless
Steel
Fasteners
(2.4.1.l, c)
3
Other
z
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
0
0
4
Notes:
O Denotes information to be furnished by Supplier
with the Proposal.
4
O Denotes required information to be furnished by
4
4
4
Chemicals
-2)
(2.1
Agents
Corrosive
(2.4.10.1.2)
0 Open-Drip-proof
0 Type II
Aluminum
Stainless
Steel
0 (ProvisionforPurging
No.
Date
Supplier upon receipt of Purchase Order.
Or absence of any symbol denotes information to
be furnished by Purchaser with Requestfor Proposal.
I
55
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
(2.4.1.I, 9
Revision
By
Apvd.
~
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D 5Yb-ENGL 1qf17 m 07322q[] 05b7489 917 m
API STD546
SYNCHRONOUSGENERATOR
API
PAGE 2 OF 10
DATA SHEET
-
GENERAL (CONT)
1
2
3
4
5
Furnished
6
7
8
Mountina:
FootMounted
Engine
Type:
Double
Shaft,
Shaft
Baseplate
Furnished
By
(2.4.2.6)
Axial
Stator
Shift
Required
(2.4.2.16)
Special Connections for Field Piping(2.4.3.1)
0
0
0
0
0Bearings
No
Single
Bearing,
(7 Soleplate
Furnished
By
(2.4.2.6)
(2.4.2.7.4) Type
0 Epoxy
Grout
To
Be
Used
9 O When Rotor Dynamic Analysis Is Specified, List of Foundation Data Required from Purchaser(2.4.6.1.2):
10
11
ower:
12
13
14
15
16
Electrical Svstem Conditions:
Primary
Short-Circuit
MVA
Generator
at
Bus
(2.2.5.2, b)
WR Ratio
Method
System
ofGrounding
(3.6.2.2)
Maximum
Ground
Fault
Amperes
Other
Parallel Operation Requirements with Existing Equipment, Define
17
la
19
0 Special Vibration Requirements(4.3.3.1O)
x (EEF)
Efficiency
Evaluation
Factor
(6.1.1
applied
$/kW
at
21 Federal, State, Local Codes (2.1.7):
P Any Extemal Forces on Generator Housing That May Affect Site Performance
(2.1.13,2.4.4):
22
24
kW/kVA
DRIVERINFORMATION
Prime Mover Equipment I t e M a g No.:
Furnish Performance Curves, Curve Numbers(6.1.4)
CalculatedEfficiency
DirectConnected
B
Speed-Increasing-ReducingGear (22.3.2, Itemc):Ratio
2E
2f
zi
22
3(
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
3E
3s
4c
0
0
0
0
(2.2.3.2,
c) Item
RPM at
Gear WK2lbm2
2 RPM
lbm2 at
DriverWK (2.2.3, Item c)
Type of Coupling (2.4.9.4, 2.4.9.5):
Manufacturer's
Standard
API
c]Per 671 Model
Mfgr
c]Taper F1
CylindricalFit c] Flange
OtherCouplingData
Coupling
WK2
(2.2.3.2,
c) Item
Ib/ft2at
RPM
Mass
Moment
Coupling
of Half
(2.4.6.2.2.1, f)
lb ft
Supplied
By:
Generator
Mfr
Driver
Equipment
Mfr
Purchaser
Mounted
By:
Generator
Mfr
Driver
Equipment
Mfr
Purchaser
GENERATORDATA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 RotationRequiredbyDriverWhenFacingGeneratorNonDrivenEnd:
41 Construction:
Rotor
OCylindrical
Solid
O Salient-Pole "Star" Punching Type, Shrunk Onto Shaft
4
O Salient-PoleDove-TailorT-TailAttachmentToShaft
-
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
0 Others
0 Clockwise 0 Counterclockwise
O Laminated
Cylindrical
42
[7 Others
O Other
56
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
.
S T D * A P I / P E T R O S T D Sqb-ENGL
SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR API STD
546
API
DATA SHEET
-1
2
3
)
PAGE 3 OF 10
GENERATOR DATA (CONT)
Calculated Expected Data(6.1.4.2. fi at the Followina Loads: Winding Temperature - "C
3/4
IL2
Full
SF
4
Amperes
5
Power Factor
6
Efficiency
7
Guaranteed
Efficiency
and
Load:
PF
at
8 qeactive Capability Curve No.
9 Generator
Field:
3ated
1O 3ated
Field: Exciter
3
11
12
13
14
O
Volts
Amps
~~~~~
~
~~
3 GeneratorParameters(StatePerUnitValues,GeneratorkVABaseatRatedVoltageand25°C):
C,
Cad
Armature
Leakage
Reactance
DirectAxisArmatureReactance
1Synchronous
5 Reactance
(d
(Saturated)
Un-Saturated
AxisDirect
16
1i7
(p
Potier
Reactance
Field Resistance
Un-Saturated
(Saturated)
Reactance
Transient
1I8 Axis Direct
1I9 Axis Direct
Subtransient
Un-Saturated
(Saturated)
Reactance
Stator Armature Resistance/Phase
i!o
2!1
Quadrature Axis Armature Reactance
i2
Synchronous
Quadrature
Reactance
Axis
(Saturated)
Un-Saturated
i!3
Field Leakage Reactance
i!4 Reactance
(Saturated)
Transient
Un-Saturated
Quadrature
Axis
i5
Subtransient
Quadrature
Reactance
Axis
(Saturated)
Un-Saturated
Quadrature Axis Amortisseur Resistance
i!6
Direct Axis Amortisseur Resistance
i?7
i?a
Quadrature Axis Amortisseur Reactance
Direct Axis Amortisseur Reactance
2?9
Zero Sequence Resistance
NI
3
Positive Sequence Resistance
Negative Sequence Resistance
3:
3:
Zero Sequence Reactance
3 Sequence
-Saturated
(Saturated)
Reactance
Negative
Armature Short-Circuit Time Constant, Sec
3!
Direct Axis Transient Open-circuit Time Constant,Sec
24
3 ' qo Quadrature Axis Transient Open-circuit Time Constant,Sec
3 F d o Direct Axis Subtransient Open-circuit Time Constant, Sec
3!
Quadrature Axis Subtransient Open-Circuit Time Constant, Sec
4 r d
DirectAxisTransientShort-CircuitTimeConstant,Sec
4 r19
d
DirectAxisSubtransientShort-CircuitTimeConstant,Sec
4Limitt2t
4 C
,
WindingCapacitance to Ground,Microfarads/Phase
T",
4
4
Bearinas:
4
BearingTypeRequired:
I
0 Hydrodynamic (2.4.7.1) 0 Oil RingsRequired
57
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
(2.4.8.1)
0 Antifriction (2.4.7.2)
GENERATOR DATA (CONT)
1
2 Thrust Bearings, Maximum Connected Equipment Thrust
(2.4.7.1O)
3 O (Coupling
End):
Bearing,
Type
Self-Lube
of
Capable
4
Max
in.
Min
Bore
Diameter:
in.
BoreIn.
Length
5
Design Clearancewith Shaft: in. Min
in. Max
8
9
10
11
0
Manufacturer
Max
In.
Bore in.
Length
Design Clearance with Shaft: in. Min
Manufacturer
PSI
Bearing Loading:
Special Seals for Gas Purge(2.4.7.21)
Patt No.
in.
Bore Diameter:
Min
in. Max
Part No.
LUBRICATION
SYSTEM
.~~~
System Supplied By
Pressure or Flood Lube (2.4.8.4):
CommonWithDrivenEquip (2.4.8.4;2.4.8.5)
PerAPI 614(2.4.8.7)
Mfgr'sStandard (2.4.8.8)
Type of Oil
Pressure (2.4.9.8.2)
Viscosity
O Bearing Oil Requirements (6.1.5):O
GPM O
PSI OHeatRemoved
Be
Loss
To kW
18
Main Oil Pump
Required:
Integral
Shaft
Driven
(2.4.8.8.3)
sparate
19
If Separate:
Vertical
Horizontal
Type
of
Drive:
Steam
Turbine
Electric
Motor
20
Standby Oil Pump
Required (2.4.8.8.5):
Vertical
Horizontal
21
Type of Drive:
Steam
Turbine
Electric
Motor
22 O Turbine
OPressure
Driver:
PSIG
O Temperature
Range
OF to
"F
23 ODriver:
Electric
Motor
VoltsAC
AC
Phase
DC
Volts
24
Filter
Element (2.4.8.8.7):
Single
Duplex Oil Filters
Required (2.4.8.8.7)
25
Manufacturer
Model
26
OilCoolerRequired (2.4.8.8.6):
WaterCooled
AirCooled
O ConstructionDetails 27
Self-Lube:
28
Bearing Housing Heaters Required(2.4.8.3)
29
Bearing Constant-Level Sight Feed Oilers Required (2.4.7.12): Type
30
Oil Mist for Antifriction Bearings(2.4.7.14)
31 O AntifrictionBearings:GreaseType
32
ACCESSORYEQUIPMENT
33 TEWAC Heat Exchanaer:
34 Exchanger Location(2.4.1.2.4, c)
35 Redundant
Coolers
Required
(2.4.1
-2.4, b):
Yes
No
36 If Cooling Water Conditions Not Per (2.4.1.2.4, a): Specify Differences
37 O Water
Press
(PSIG):
Min
Max-;
O Water
Flow
(GPM):
Max
Min
38 Tube Material (2.4.1.2.4 Item e, 2.4.10.8, b)
39 Tube
Construction
(2.4.1.2.4, e)
Double
Tube
Single
Tube
40
Temperature
Air
Sensor
Required
(2.4.1.2.4, h)
Description
41
Flow Sensor LocalIndicatorRequired (2.4.1.2.4. g)RelayContacts
NO
NC
42
Leak
Detection
Required
(2.4.1.2.4, c)
Type
and
Description
43 Set
PM
Point
Shutdown
Flow
Set
Low
GPM
Point
Alarm
Flow
High
12
~~~~~
13
14
15
16
17
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
44
4s Air
l"
46 yn
F
0
r 3.
(3.5.2)
0 Required (3.5.4)
47
I
58
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
0
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
PSI
6
Bearing Loading:
7 Type
Self-Lube
of
Capable
O (Outboard
Bearing,
End):
~
S T D - A P I / P E T R O STD Sqb-ENGL L717 m 0732270 0 5 b 7 9 7 2 T O L m
SYNCHRONOUSGENERATOR
API STD546
DATA SHEET
PAGE 5 OF 10
API
I
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT (CONT)
1
2
1 Differential
Pressure
Switch:
0 Provisions
Only
O Manufacturer
3
Pe
0 Required
(3.5.5)
0 TY
4
ulain C w d u i t Box Sized For (3.1 .II:
Leads:
.~
- Main
7
Bottom
Quantity
Phase
Entering
Per
(3.1.4):
From
Top
8
Both Ends of Stator Windings Brought Out to Terminal Box (2.2.2.1)
9 rerminations
Interior
Jumpers:
and
Insulated
Uninsulated
1O Capacitors
(3.1.6,
Surge
i; 3.6.2.1):
Microfarads
11
Mounted By
Supplied By
12
Arresters
(3.1
Surge
-6,
i; 3.6.2.2):
k v Rated
13
Mounted By
Supplied By
1;4
Current Transformers (3.1.6, j) For Ammeter
1I5
Quantity
Accuracy Class Ratio
d
By 116
Supplied
117
Current Transformers (3.1.6, j) For Differential Protection
118
Class
Accuracy
ed
By 119
Supplied
z33
Potential Transformers (3.1.6, I) For Voltmeter:
1!1
Class
Accuracy
zP
upplied Required
Fuses
zB
Bushing Studs or Receptacles (3.1.6, h)
i!4
Space For Stress Cones (3.1.6, g)
2!(3.1.6,
5 Heaters
Space
b):
PhaseVolts
O
kW
z!6 J
- Maximum Sheath Temperature, "C or Temperature Code
2v
Thermal Insulation (3.1.6, a)
:B
Breathers
(3.1.6,
d)
Drain
Holes
(3.1.6,
c)
Provision
for
Purging
(3.1.6,
e)
:B
Removable
Links
(3.1.6,
9
Silver-Plated
Bus
Joints
(3.1.6,
k)
3c
Fault
Withstand
(3.1.2)
Ground
(3.1.6,
Bus
m)
31
Other Terminal Box Requirements (3.1.6)
5
6
7
0
0
1
2
0
0 Side
0
3
3
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
7
2
7
3
3
7
3
0
3
3
0
0
2
3
3:
3
3!
3
3
Stator
Soace
Heaters
(3.4.1.3.4.2):
O
kW
Phase
Volts
Maximum Sheath Temperature-"C, or Temperature Code
Sheath Material
Phase
c]Maximum Sheath Temperature-"C, or Temperature Code
4
4
4
Phase O
kW
0 Bearina Heaters (2.4.8.3:2.4.8.8.8):
4
4
Volts
0
9
3
4
4:
0 Exciter
Space
Heaters
Volts
kW
O
Windina Temperature Detectors (3.2.1 :3.5.5):
RTDs:
Qty/Phase
Material
,
Ohms Q Type:
"C
Ground
One
Lead
(3.2.1.2)
Yes [7 No
Thermocouples:
Type
QtylPhase
O Stator
Winding
Temperature
Switch
Recommended
Settings:
OAlarm
"C
0
0
0
4
I
I
59
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
0 3-Wire 0 2-Wire
O Shutdown
"C
SYNCHRONOUSGENERATOR
API STD 546
API
PAGE 6 OF 10
DATA SHEET
I
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT (CONT)
1
Type
2 Hvdrodvnamic 81Thrust Bearina TemperatureDevices (3.3):
3
Provision
Only
Manufacturer's
Standard
API 670
4
Ohms
Detector
Material
RTD:
Q
5
Thermocouple:
6
Dial Type
Thermometers
(2.4.7.1
9):
Alarm
Contacts
Number
of
7 Location
8 Description
9
Terminal Head or Box (3.1.10)
10 O Bearing
Temperature
Recommended
Settings:
O
"CAlarm
11 O Thrust
Bearing
Temp.
Recommended
Settings:
O Alarm
0
0
0
0
0 Other
0
"C
0
Type:
0 &Wire 0 2-Wire
0 4-wire
c]NO
Contacts
NC
c]
O Shutdown
"C
"C
12
13 Vibration Detectors 13.8):
14
NoncontactingProbes(3.8.1)
Installed
ProvisionsOnlyQty/Bearing:
15
obe
ModelProbe Type
16 Oscillator/Demodulator
Oscillator/Demodulator
Model
Furnished
By
17
BearingHousingSeismicSensors(3.8.3)
ProvisionsOnly
Installed
Location 18 Qty/Bearing
(H,V,A)
er
Output 19
Model
Sensor Type
0
0
0
Transducer
Furnished
By 20Furnished
BySensor
21 [7 Vibration
Switch:
22
Model
Switch Type
23 Terminal Head or Box (3.1.1 1)
0 Manual
Reset
O Shutdown
"C
0Two(3.8.1) 0Four(3.8.2)
0
0 Electric
Reset
24
CONTROLS
25
26 O IEEEType
Excitation
n
O Excitation System Voltage Response Ratio (Over A0.5 Second Interval), Using the IEEE 421A Definition
28
29
O Excitation System Voltage Response Time (Per IEEE 421A, Sec
___
-
30 O Exciter Ceiling Voltage, When Loaded by the Main Generator Rotor Field Resistance (at 100°C)
V DC
31 Generator Vendor to Furnish:
32
Synchronous
Machine
Regulator
(Voltage
Regulator)
Model
Mfr
33 Excitation System:
34
Permanent Magnet Generator Excitation Source
35
High Initial Response Excitation System Required
36 O Short circuit currentsvs. time for three phase fault conditions, lineto line and line to ground fault conditions.
37
Curve No.
38 Transient (momentary) voltage regulation during sudden application and removal of specified load:
39
Load
UV
OVReg
40 O Total and single harmonic voltages expressedin percent of fundamental voltage for line to line and lineto neutral
41 while unit operating at rate's voltage, frequency
and no load.
42
Power System Stabilizer Required (Applied to the Synchronous Machine Regulator)
43 Other
44
Manufacturer's Standard Excitation Control (Including Application & Protection) Package
45
Purchaser'sSwitchgear
VendorFurnishedControlPanel
MountExcitationControlPackagein:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I
60
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
~
m
STD.API/PETRO STD 54b-ENGL L997
0 7 3 2 2 7 0 IlSb7494 BALI
m
SYNCHRONOUSGENERATOR
API STD 546
DATA SHEET
PAGE 7 OF 10
API
-
~~
~
~
1
CONTROLS(CONT)
2 [7 Separate Control Devices, as Checked, for Mounting in:
3
Purchaser's
Switchgear
Vendor
Furnished
Control
Panel
4 [7 Completely Assembled Control Panel with Devices as Checked (3.6.4.2)
5
6
Devices Mounted on Front of Panel. Labeled as Indicated:
7
Frequency
Hz Scale
8
[7 Ammeter(0- 5A), 0 Scale
A
9
Voltmeter (O - 150 VAC), O kV Scale,
"GENERATOR
VOLTAGE"
10
"POWER
FACTOR"
Meter,
0.80 - 1 - 0.80
Scale
Scale
or
11
Ammeter, O ADC
Scale,
"EXCITER
FIELD
AMPERES"
12
Potentiometer,
"EXCITER FIELD"
"EXCITER
FIELD ON-OFF Test
Switch
13
Generator Field-Ground Relay, "MAIN FIELD GROUND" Type
14
Overcurrent Relays (3),Instantaneous, 0.5 - 2 A Range,
15
Manufacturer
;
Catalog No.
16
OvertemperatureRelay, 50 190°C Range,ForUsewithOhmRTD,"STATORTEMPERATURE"
17
Manufacturer
;
Catalog No.
18
....(
.
Type
Quantity
19
Alam Panel
Automatic
Power-Factor
Controller
VAR Controller
20
Manufacturer
Model
Monitors:
Probe
Vibration
21
c]"C
Temperature
Indicator,
22
Synchronoscope,WithLights
Synchronism-CheckRelay,Type
23
Automatic Synchromizer, Type
24
Automatic Voltage Regulator (Synchronous Machine Regulator)
25
Single
Dual
with
Null
Adjustment
Dual
with
Automatic
Matching
Feature
26
VoltdHertzLimiter
27
Other
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
28
29
x
31
3i
x
34
3E
3
37
3
3
0
-
0
0
0
0
~~~~
Devices Mounted Inside Panel. Labeled to Coincide with Drawina Identification:
Control
Power
Transformer,
Constant
Voltage,
kVA,
V-120
Rated
V
to Maintain 95%
Secondary Voltage with 50% Dip of Primary Voltage
Full-WaveBridge,SiliconRectifiersA(Min
of 125% ofExciterFieldAmperes),ConvectionCooled
Contactor, Exciter Field Current
Field Monitor Relay, to Switch and Signal on Loss of Field or Out of Step Condition
[7 AuxiliaryandTimingRelays,asRequired
SurgeSuppressorsandFuses,asRequired
Terminal Blocks, Heavy Duty, Identified by Unique Numbers, Number as Req'd with
20% Spares
Switches
Required
Alarm
forand
Control
Devices
(3.6.1):
Contacts:
DC
AC
Control
Panel
Wiring
Entrance:
Top
[7 Bottom
Side
Other
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
MISCELLANEOUS
4
4
4
Paintina:
Supplier'sStandard
0 ExtraCoatatShipment
0 User'sSpecialPaint
4
I
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
61
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
(4.4.3.1)
I
1
I
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I
0
0
0
3
4
APlSTD546
MISCELLANEOUS(CONI)
ShiDment:
Domestic
Export
ExportBoxingRequired
Special
Shipping
Bearings
(4.4.3.9)
5
Special
Winterizing
Requirements
(6.1.16)
2
I
GENERATOR
SYNCHRONOUS
0 OutdoorStorageforMoreThanSixMonths(4.4.1)
0 Piping Assembled
(4.4.5)
Mounted
on
Skid
(4.4.3.6)
6
7 Miscellaneous:
8
Weight
ORotor
O Stator
lbWeight
Net
lb
9
O Total Weight
lb
O lb
Shipping
Weight
10 O Generator Outline DrawingNo.
11Report
Other
Reference
Number
O Test
12
Pressure
Maximum
Sound
Level
dBA
(2.1.3)
13
Quantity of Special Tools Required(2.1 .l
1,2.4.2.14)
14
Special Low-Temperature Materials Requirements(2.4.10.4)
0
0
0 List of Materials To Be Identified With Applicable ANSI, ASTM, ASME or IEC Numbers (6.1.19)
15
16
17
18
Special Identification for Transmittals (6.2.1.2, Item e)
19 Nameplate
Material
(2.4.1
1
.l):
Stainless
Steel
~~
~~
0
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
0
0
Monel
Other
Separate Nameplate with Purchaser's Information (2.4.1 1.4)
Commissioning Assitance Requried (6.1.18)
Outline for Special Weather Protection (6.1.16)
Detailed Data Required on the Generator, Excitation System, Prime
Mover, and Governor in Order to Perform
an Electrical Transient Stability Study.
Other
STATOR AND ROTOR WINDING REPAIR DATA
O StatorTotal Weight
Copper
lb Insulation
Size
Strand
Copper
Number
Strands
Per
of
Coil Insulation
Tum
Turn Description
Number
Turns
of Per
Coil
Coil
Ground-Wall
Insulation
Description
Finished Coil Dimensionin Slot Region, W x H x L (Also Give Tolerances):
Total NumberWinding
of
Throw
Connection
Slots
Stator
Slot Description
Filler
- Thickness:
Between
Side
Top
Top
- Bottom
Coils
Special End Turn Bracing
Other Information
O Rotor Windina Information:
Weight
Copper
Conductor
Material
Size
lbBar orStrand
Insulation Description
General Description of Winding (Number of Turns, Formed Coil, Size, Etc,)
0
0
0
-
41 Damper Winding Description, If Applicable
42
43 Retaining Ring Alloy, If Applicable
44 Shaft Material
45 Other
46
I
~
62
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO STD 54b-ENGL L777
API
II
1
2
m
0732270 05b749b b57
SHEET
DATA
ANALYSIS, SHOP INSPECTION, AND TESTS
Reauired
Item bk
(4.1.1;
4.1.3;
4.1.3.3)
3 AcceDtance Criteria (2.1.1
6.2.3.2.
2:
4 Design Audit
5 Torsional Critical Speed Analysis (2.4.6.2.3) By
6 Lateral Critical Speed Analysis(2.4.6.2.1, 2.4.6.2.2)
7 Shop Inspection
8 Review of Quality Control Program (4.2.3.5)
9 Inspection for Cleanliness Per API614 (4.2.3.2; 4.2.3.3)
10 Observance of Assembly/Dismantling (4.3.1 -1)
11 Demonstrate Accuracy of Test Equipment (4.3.1.13)
12 Stator Core Test(4.3.4.1)
13 Surge Comparison Test (4.3.4.2)
14 Special Surge Test of Coils (4.3.4.2.1)
15 Balance in Minimum of 3 Planes (2.4.6.3.1)
16 Final Balance(4.2.3.6.)
17 Baiance Device (Sensitivity) Test (4.2.3.6))
18 Residual Unbalance Verification Test (Appendix C) (4.2.3.6)
19 Balance Check with Half Coupling(2.4.6.3.4)
m Running Tests with Coupling Half(4.3.1.5)
21 Stator Inspection Prior to VPI (4.2.3.6)
22 Sealed Winding Conformance Test(4.3.4.4)
23 Power Factor Tip-Up Test(4.3.4.3)
24 Manufacturer's Standard Shop and Routine Test (4.3.2)
25 Insulation Resistance Using Preferred Table6 Values (4.3.2.1, Item d)
26 Bearing Dimensional & Alignment Checks Before Tests (4.3.2.1, Item i)
27 Vibration Recording (4.3.3.1 2)
28 Complete Test (4.3.5.1. l )
2s
Efficiency (4.3.5.1.1, Item a)
3c
Open/Short-Circuit Saturation (4.3.5.1.1, Item c)
31
Heat Run (4.3.5.1.1, Item d)
3i
Exciter Heat Run (4.3.5.1.1, Item e)
32
No load V curve (4.3.5.1.1, Item f)
3f.
Noise Test (4.3.5.1.1, Item g)
3E Bearing Dimensional Checks After Tests(4.3.5.1.2)
8 DC High-Potential Test (4.3.5.1.3)
37 Rated Rotor Temperature - Vibratioon Test (For GeneratorsNot
3
Receiving Complete Test(4.3.5.2.1)
8 Unbalance Response(4.3.5.4)
4 Bearing Housing Natural Frequency Tests(4.3.5.5)
4 Optional Material Tests To Be Proposed By Vendor (2.4.10.1.4)
4 Certification of Materials (4.2.1.1, Item a)
I
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
63
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
II
SYNCHRONOUSGENERATOR
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
n
API STD 546
PAGE 9 OF 10
Witnessed
(4.1 -3.1)
Observed
(4.1 3.2)
o
o
o
o
o
o
Cl
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
cl
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
n
c1
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
c3
O
o
o
CI
o
o
o
~~
STD-API/PETRO STD 54b-ENGL
L997
0732290 0 5 b 7 4 9 7 593
SYNCHRONOUSGENERATOR
API STD 546
DATA SHEET'
PAGE 1O OF 1O
API
ANALYSIS, SHOP INSPECTION, AND TESTS (CONT)
Witnessed
Reauired
Observed
AcceDtance
Criteria
(2.1
-12:
6.2.3.2.
Item
b):
(4.1.1;
4.1.3;
4.1.3.3)
Assembly
Running
Final
Clearances
,e)
(4.2.1.1
ed
Painting
Surface
and
Subsurface
Inspection
of Parts
(4.2.1.3,
4.2.2.1)
(4.2.2.2)
Test
Radiographic
2.2.3)
Test Ultrasonic
Parts
(4.2.2.4)TestParticle
Magnetic
Parts(4.2.2.5)Test
Penetrant
Liquid
Hardness
Parts Test (4.2.3.4)
Certified
Data PriorShipment
to
(4.3.1.12;
6.2.3.2,
Item
b)
o
o
O
cl
0
El
o
o
o
o
o
0
Other
n
U
(4.1.3.1)
o
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
n
U
(4.1.32)
o
o
o
c1
o
o
U
o
o
n
U
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
COMMENTS
64
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D 59b-ENGL L777
m
0732270 05b7978 V Z T
m
APPENDIX C-PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINATION OF RESIDUAL UNBALANCE
c.1
scope
tions (six or twelve) in equal (60- or 30-degree) increments
around the rotor. Add the trial weight to the last known heavy
spot in one plane. If the rotor has been balanced very precisely and the final heavy spot cannot be determined, add the
trial weight to any one of the marked radial positions.
This appendix describesthe procedure to be used to determine residual unbalance in machine rotors. Although some
balancingmachinesmaybe
set uptoreadouttheexact
amount of unbalance, the calibration can
be in error. The only
sure method of determining residual unbalance is to test the
rotor with a known amount of unbalance.
C.4.2.3 To verify that an appropriate trial weight has been
selected, operate the balancing machine and note the unitsof
unbalance indicated on the meter. If the meter pegs, a smaller
If little or nometerreading
trialweightshouldbeused.
results, a larger trial weight should
be used. Little or no meter
reading also generally indicates that the rotor was not balanced precisely enough or that the balancing machine is not
be
sensitive enough. Ifthis occurs, the balancing machine can
checked for sensitivity by using the procedure outlined inC S
and Figure C-l. A completed example is shown in Figure
c-2.
C.2
Definition
Residual unbalance is the amount of unbalance remaining
in a rotor after balancing. Unless otherwise specified,it shall
be expressed in ounce-inches or gam-millimeters.
C.3MaximumAllowableResidual
Unbalance
C.3.1 Themaximumallowableresidualunbalanceper
plane shall be calculated using Equation6 in 2.4.6.3.5 of this
standard.
C.4.2.4 Locatetheweightateachoftheequallyspaced
positions in turn, and record the amount of unbalance indicated on the meter for each position. Repeat the initial position as a check. All verification shallbe performed using only
one sensitivity range onthe balance machine.
C.3.2 If the actual static weight load on each journal is not
known,assumethat the totalrotorweightisequally
sup
ported by thebearings.Forexample,
a two-bearingrotor
weighing 2,720kilograms (6,000pounds) would be assumed
to impose a staticweightload of 1,360 ki10,orams (3,000
pounds) on eachjournal.
C.4
C.4.2.5 Plot the readings on the residual unbalance work
sheet and calculate the amount of residual unbalance (see
Figure C-3). The maximum meter reading occurs whenthe
trial weight is added at the rotor’s heavy spot; the minimum
reading occurs when the trial weight is opposite the heavy
spot. Thus, the plotted readings should form an approximate circle (see Figure C-4). An average of the maximum
and minimum meter readings represents the effect of the
trial weight. Thedistance of the circle’s center from the origin of the polar plot represents the residual unbalance in
that plane.
ResidualUnbalanceCheck
C.4.1
GENERAL
the
balancing-machine
readings
indicate
C.4.1.1 When
that the rotor has been balancedto within the specified tolerance, a residual unbalance check shall be performed before
the rotor is removed from the balancing machine.
O
(24.1.2 To check residual unbalance, a known trial weight
is attached to the rotor sequentially in six
(or twelve, if specified by the purchaser) equally spaced radial positions, each
at
the same radius. The check is run in each correction plane,
and the readings in each plane are plotted on a -p,h
using
the procedure specifiedin C.4.2.
C.4.2.6 Repeat the steps described in(2.4.2.1 through
C.4.2.5 for each balance plane. If the specified maximum
allowable residual unbalancehasbeenexceeded
inany
balance plane, the rotor shall be balanced more precisely
and checked again. If a correction is made in any balance
plane, the residual unbalance check shall be repeated in all
planes.
C.4.2
PROCEDURE
C.5
C.4.2.1 Select a trial weight and radius that will be equivalent to between one and two times the maximum allowable
residual unbalance [that is, if U,, is 1,440 gram-millimeters
(2 ounce-inches), the trial weight should cause 1,440-2,880
gam-millimeters (2-4 ounce-inches) of unbalance.]
C.5.1 Using the maximumallowableresidualunbalance
(Umu)determined for the specific rotor being tested, prepare
trial weights for unbalance factors of I/&,,
lu,,, 2Umu,
and 4U,,,.
Balancing-MachineSensitivityCheck
C 5 2 Sequentiallyinstalleach
mal weightatthephase
angleofunbalance for therotorbeingtested.Recordthe
balancing-machine readings on the form shown in Figure
C-1.
C.4.2.2 Starting at the last known heavy spot in each correction plane, mark off the specified number of radial posi65
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
API STANDARD
546
66
C 5 4 Thefollowingthreeoptions are availablewhenthe
of the balancing-machine sensitivity check are unacceptable:
the line intersects the vertical axis below V2Um, the balancing machine is sensitive enough, and the rotor should bea.Havethebalancingmachineservicedinaccordancewith
the manufacturer's procedure, and repeat the sensitivity check.
rebalanced using the residual unbalance verification proceb. Use a more sensitive balancing machine.
dure. (See Figure C-2 for an exampleplot.) If the lineinterc. Perfom the sensitivity check at the balancing
sects the verticd axis above 1/2umaxr
the balancing machine is
highest allowable speed. This speed must then be used when
notsensitiveenough,and
the resultsareunacceptable.the
rotor is balanced.
C.5.3
C-l.
Plotthereadings on thegraphshowninFigure
Then draw a best& s h g h t line through the fou points. If results
~~
U,
factors
Balancing-machine
readouta
"Use balancing-machinereadoutsto scale graph.
Figure C-1-Sensitivity Check Work Sheet
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
I
STD.API/PETRO S T D 54b-ENGL L777 m 0732290 0 5 b 7 5 0 0 708 m
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES"SO0 KVA AND LARGER
1
U,,,, factors
I
Balancing-machine
readouta
5.1
=Use balancing-machine readouts to scale graph.
Figure C-2-Sensitivity Check Work Sheet
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
67
I
Equipment (Rotor) No.:
Purchase Order No.:
Correction Plane (inlet, drive-end,etc.-use
sketch):
Balancing Speed:
N-Maximum Allowable Rotor Speed:
W-Weight of Journal (closest to this correction plane):
,,U
,
= Maximum Allowable ResidualUnbalance =
6350WM (4WnU)
6350x
kgf
rpm; 4 x
Ibs/
Trial unbalance (2 x
gm-mm (oz.-in.)
rPm
Uma
gm-mm (oz.-in.)
R-Radius (at whichweight will be placed):
mm (inches)
Trial Unbalance Weight= Trial UnbalanceA?
gm-mm/
oz.-in./
mm;
inches
Conversion Information: 1 ounce = 28.350 grams
Rotor Sketch
Test Data
I
Position
I
Amplitude
I
Amplitude
I
3
4
1
5
1
6
7
Test Data-Graphic Analysis
Plot data on the p o l a r chart (Figure C 3 continued). Scale the chart
so the largest and smallest amplitude
will
fit conveniently.
Step 2: With the compass.draw the bestfit circle through the six points and mark the center
of this circle.
Step 3 Measure the diameterof the circle in units of
units
record.
in Step 1 and
scale chosen
m
unbalancetrial Stepthe
4 Record
Step 5 Double the trial unbalance in Step4 (may use
esidual
actual
twice the
Step 6: answer
Divide
the
in Step 5 by the answer in Step 3.
Scale
Factor
Step 1:
You now have a correlation between the unitsthe
onpolar chart and
the grn-in. of actual balance.
Figure C-&Residual Unbalance Work Sheet
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
O0
90"
270'
1aoo
The circle you have drawn must contain the origin of the polar chart. If it doesn't, the residual
unbalance of the rotor exceeds the applied test unbalance. Proceed with the balancing machine
sensitivrty check beforerebalancing is attempted.
If the circledoes contain the originof the polar chart, the distance between origin of the chartand
the center of your circle is the actual residual unbalance present on the rotor correction plane.
Measure the distance in units of scale you choosein Step 1 and multiply this number by the scale
factor determinedin Step 6. Distance in units of scale between origin and center of the circle times
scale factor equals actual residual unbalance.
Record actual residual unbalance
(gm-mm)(oz.-in.)
Record allowable residual unbalance (from Figure C-3)
Correction
for plane
Rotor No.
BY
Date
(gm-mm)(oz.-in.)
(hasihas
passed.
not)
Figure C-3"Residual Unbalance Work Sheet(Continued)
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D * A P I / P E T R O STD 54b-ENGL L977 9 0732290 0 5 b 7 5 0 3 bL7 m
API STANDARD546
70
c-101
Equipment (Rotor) No.:
Purchase OrderNo.:
Correction Plane
drive-end,
(inlet,
A
sketch):
etc.-use
Balancing Speed:
800
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Allowable
N-Maximum
Rotor Speed:
10,000 rpm
W-Weight of Journal (closest to this correction plane):
,U
rpm
= Maximum AllowableResidual Unbalance =
635ow/N (4W/N)
4X
908 lbs/
10,OOo rpm
(oz.-in.)
,
Trial unbalance(2 x U&
908
kg (lbs)
0.36
gm" (oz.-in.)
0.72
6.875
R-Radius (at which weightwill be placed):
Trial Unbalance Weight= Trial Unbalance/R
-""v-;
oz.-in./
6.875
0.72
(inches)
0.10 gm (oz.)
inches
Conversion Information: 1 ounce = 28.350 grams
Test Data
I
I
Rotor Sketch
I
Trial Weight
Balancing
Machine
Angular Location Amplitude Readout
1
I f f
2
60"
12.o
3
120"
14.U
4
1
W
23.5
S
240"
23.O
0"
14.0
Repeat 1
I
14.0
I
I
B
A
c-1o1
Test Data-Graphic Analysis
actual
Step 1: Plot dataon the polar chart (Figure
C-3 continued). Scale thechart so the largest and smallest
amplide wil
fit conveniently.
Step 2: W a the compass, draw the besttìt circle through thesix points and markthe center of this circle.
Step 3: Measure the diameterof the circle in units of
scale chosen in Step 1 and record.
35
units
Step 4: Record the trial unbalance from above.
0.72
gmem (02.4.)
Step 5: Double the trial unbalancein Step 4 (may use
1.44
gmem (oz-in.)
the
twice
Step 6: answer
Divide
the
in Step
answer
the
5 by
in Step 3.
0.041 Scale
Factor
on the polar chartand the gm-in. of actual balance.
You nowhave a correlation between the units
~
Figure C--ample
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Calculations for Residual Unbalance
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO STD 54b-ENGL
L777
m
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS
MACHINES-S00
0732290 05b7504 553
m
UVA AND LARGER
71
O"
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
90"
270"
180"
The circle you have drawn must contain the origin of the polar chart. If it doesn't, the residual
unbalance of the rotor exceeds the applied test unbalance. Proceed with the balancing machine
sensitivity check before rebalancing is attempted.
If the circle doescontain the origin of the polar chart, the distance between origin of the chart and
the center of your circle is the actual residual unbalance present on the rotor correction plane.
Measure the distance in units of scale you choose in Step 1 and multiply this number by the scale
factor determined in Step 6. Distance in units of scale between origin and center of the circle times
scale factor equals actual residual unbalance.
Record actual residual unbalance
Record
allowable
residual unbalance
(from
Correction plane
BY
A
John Inspector
5 (0.041) = 0.21
Figure C-3)
0.36
for Rotor No.
c-101
Date
(gm-mm)(oz.-in.)
(gm+m)(oz.-in.)
(has/hs+&)
passed.
11/16/89
Figure C-&Sample Calculations for Residual Unbalance (Continued)
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O STD 5 q b - E N G L L777 m 0732270 0 5 b 7 5 0 5 q 7 T m
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
APPENDIX D-VENDOR DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENTS
73
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D 5 4 6 - E N G L L777 M 0732270 0 5 b 7 5 0 b 32b M
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE
VENDOR DRAWING AND
DATA REQUIREMENTS
JOB NO.
PURCHASE ORDER NO.
REQUISITION NO.
INQUIRY NO.
3
OF PAGE
FOR
SITE
SERVICE
ITEM NO.
DATE
DATE
DATE
BY
REVISION
UNIT
NO. REQUIRED
ProposalsBiddershallfurnishcopies
of datafor all itemsindicatedbyan
X.
r
I
Finalb
Vendor
shall
furnish
copies
and
transparencies
Vendor shall
furnish
operating
and
maintenance
manuals.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
tions.
ShiDDina
exchanaers.
t
1
I
'
I
I
I
I
1
1
1
i
t t t t t
DESCRIPTION
1 A.l Dimensionedoutlinedrawinaswithmaiorandminorconnections.
1
1
I
I
Size
Heat
-
I
Auxiliary
of
~~~~~
Final - Received from vendor
Due from vendop
Review - Returned to vendor
vendor
Reviewfrom
Received
I
Review - Due fromvendof
I
I
DISTRIBUTION
RECORD
+f
eauipment.
of drawings
and
data
indicated.
Primary
a. equipment.
b.
- . .
I Maintenance
c.
weights.
I d.
..
Sole
e.plates.
I f.
I
I
-
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Reviewb
Vendor
shall
furnish
copies
and
transparencies
drawings
of and
data
indicated.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
1.
i.
A.2 Foundation loading diagrams.
a.
i.
j.
k.
1.
Phase currenttransformers.
Space
reactors.
Excitatiodvoltageregulationpanel.
~~~
~
"Proposal drawings and data
do not have tobe certified or as-built.
bPurchaser will indicate
in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of the form.
%idder shall complete these
two columns to reflect his actual distribution schedule and include this form with his proposal.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
~~
STD-API/PETRO STD 54b-ENGL L997 m 0 7 3 2 2 7 0 05b7507 2 b 2 m
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE
VENDOR DRAWING AND
JOB NO.
PAGE
2
DATE
DATA REQUIREMENTS
ProposalaBiddershallfurnishcopies
of dataforallitemsindicated
OF
3
ITEM NO.
BY
REV NO.
by an X.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Reviewb
Vendor
I
shall
furnish
copies
and
transparencies
of drawings
and
data
indicated.
of drawings
and
data
indicated.
Finalb
Vendor
shall
furnish
copies
and
transparencies
Vendor
shall
furnish
operating
and
maintenance
manuals.
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DISTRIBUTION
Review
RECORD
Final - Received from vendor
Due from vendoß
Returned to vendor
Review Received from vendor
I
-
Reviewvendop
- Due from
i
1
I
I
1
1
'
1
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
DESCRIPTION
.Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as-built.
of materials using the nomenclature given
at the end of theform.
bPurchaser will indicatein this column the time frame for submission
'Bidder shall complete these
two columns to reflect his actual distribution schedule and include this form with his proposal.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O STD 5 4 b - E N G L L777 W 0732270 05b7508 IT7 9
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500
UVA
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE
VENDOR DRAWING AND
NO.DATA REQUIREMENTS
REV
JOB NO.
PAGE
3
DATE
data for all itemsindicatedbyan
Proposal'
Bidder
shall
furnish
copies
of
77
AND LARGER
OF
ITEM NO.
3
BY
X.
I
I
I
I
Reviewb
Vendor
shall
fumish
copies
and
transparencies
drawings
of and
data
indicated.
I
I
Finalb
Vendor
shall
fumish
copies
and
transparencies
drawings
of and
data
indicated.
Vendor
shall fumish
operating
and
maintenance
manuals.
-
vendoF
from
DISTRIBUTION
RECORD
Final Received from vendor
Due
Review - Returned to vendor
vendor
Received
I
Reviewfrom
Review Due from vendoß
I
I
-
I
I
t
t t
DESCRIPTION
1
b. Start-ua.
c.Maintenance
(2 years).
E.l Complete set of assembly photographs (see6.2.4.5).
~
~~~
- r
I
1
1
I
1
'
1
I
I
1
t t t
I
I
I
1
t
2. All drawings and data must show project, appropriation, purchase order, and item numbers in addition to the plant
location and unit. In addition to the copies specified above, one set of the drawingslmtructions necessary for field
installation must be forwarded with the shipment.
Nomenclature:
-S----number of weeks prior
to the shipment.
-F-----number of weeks
after firm order.
of weeks after receipt of approved drawings.
-D----number
Vendor
Vendor
Date
Signature
(Signature acknowledges receipt of all instructions.)
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Notes:
1. Send all drawings and data to
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D 59b-ENGL L997
0732290 0567509 035
APPENDIX E-SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DATA SHEET GUIDE
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The material in this appendix offers a guide to the informa-13,800 volts. Motors with 0.8 power factor rating should be
specifiedwithvoltageratingsof2,400,4,160,
6,900, or
tion on the data sheets in Appendix A.
13,800. This is because overexcited (leading power factor)
synchronous motors tend to have a voltage rise between the
E.l PURPOSE
switchgear bus and the motor, rather than a voltage drop. If at
This data sheet guide provides instructionsfor completing
all practical, specify voltage ratings of 4,160 volts or below.
the AFI' SynchronousMotorDataSheetbeforeobtaining
The motor isless expensive and easier to rewind in case of a
bids. It also contains information to help evaluate data supwinding failure. This may not be practical for motors rated
plied by the Vendor.This data sheet guide presumesthe specabove 7,000 horsepower, dueto the high-ampere requirement.
ifying engineer:
E.3.2.4 DataonPage l. Line 11, NameplateHP,Service
a. Is familiar with the process of procuring driver equipment. Factor, Synchronous RPM: Horsepower output of the motor,
If not, the specifying engineer should referto the Specifying
where known. This may be entered by the driven-equipment
and Purchasing Procedure section this
of manual;
supplier, if the motor and driven-equipment are to be purb. Is familiar with the purpose, format and use of
data sheets.
.O is recommended.
chased as a package. A service factor lof
s
e
r
v
i
c
e
factor
outputrating is
If
output
beyond
the
1.0
This guide does not cover all possible applications. The
required,
the
next
higher
motor
rating
should
be chosen. This
specifyingengineermustconsiderthespecificinstallation
assure
an
adequate
torque
margin for the
is
recommended
to
when filling out the
data sheet.
motor pull-in and pull-out torques. If a l. 15 service factor is
specified, API 546 limits the temperature rise to 10°C above
E.2 SCOPE
the Class B rise to ensure long life when applied to a Class F
The Synchronous Motor Data Sheet covers all synchrowinding insulation system. Enter the rated speed of the motor,
nous motors rated 500HP and larger. See the generator data
where known. Available speeds canbe calculated by the folsheet guide, AppendixF, for synchronous generators.
lowing equation:
The Synchronous Motor Data Sheetis based on API 546.
120x f
Paragraph numbers correspondingto MI 546 are indicated in
Speed (rpm) =
P
parentheses on thedata sheet, where applicable.
Where:
-
E.3 GENERALINFORMATION
E.3.1 Data on Page 1, Line 6, Applicable to: Proposal, Purchase, or As-Built: Check proposal when the
data sheet is sent
out for quotation, purchase when an order is placed, and asbuilt to reflect the completeddata sheet after all design details
and changes during the manufacture and testing
of the motor
have been completed.
f= power line frequency inHz.
p = number of magnetic poles in the motor
(2,4,6,8, ...).
E.3.2.5 DataonPage1,Line
12, RatedPowerFactor:
are 1.0and 0.8
Commonlyspecifiedpowerfactorratings
(overexcited). A .O
1 power factorrated synchronous motoris
more efficientthan a 0.8 power factor rating of equal output;
0.8
perhaps up to one-half percent more efficient. Sometimes
power factor rated motors are used
to correct plant power facE.3.2 BASIC DATA
tor,butthisusuallycanbeaccomplishedmoreefficiently
E.3.2.1 DataonPage
1, Line8,Applicable
Standards:
with power-factor-correction capacitors. A careful economic
Indicate whichstandardsapply,either
North Americanor
analysis should be made of the increased
cost (approximately
International.
25 percent) of a0.8 power factor motor over a.O1power factor motor compared with a capacitor installation. The most
E.3.2.2 Dataon Page 1, Line 9, Special-PurposePara0.8 power factor rated motor
is i t s
significant advantage of the
gaphs Apply: If the motoris unspared, high-speed (1500 rpm
increasedpull-outtorque.Pull-outtorqueisthemaximum
or higher), driving a gearbox, or a high-inertia load (exceedsustained torque a motor will develop at rated speed with
ing NEMA MG 1 Part 21 and Table 21-6 values),
is subject
or
rated voltage, frequency, and excitation applied.If the torque
to an abnormally hostile environment, this should be selected
imposed by the driven load exceeds this torque, the motor
and all square bullet paragraphs apply.
will stall. Motors of 0.8 power factor rating have a pull-out
torque rating of 200 percent to 225 percent of the full-load
E.3.2.3 Data on Page 1, Line 10, Volts, Phase, Hertz: For
torque rating as compared to 150 percentfor a 1.O power facmotorswitha1.0power
factor rating,normallyspecified
tor rated motor. If a severe power system voltagedip should
motor voltage ratings are 2,300, 4,000, 6,600, or 13,200 for
The
60 Hz, three-phase power systems of 2,400,4,160,6,900, and occur, a 1.0 power factor motor is more likely to stall. 0.8
79
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD-API/PETRO
STD 59b-ENGL L997 W 0732290 0567510857
W
API STANDARD
546
80
power factor motoris also more likely to remain stable during
power system faults (and not fall ofout
step) thana 1.O power
factor motor. If the motor is in unspared or critical service,
specification of a 0.8 power factor may be justified. Otherwise,efficiencyandfirst-costconsiderationsalwaysfavor
specifying a 1.0 powerfactor motor. The power factor should
always be specified, even if the driven-equipment supplieris
filling in the Nameplate HP and Speed.
E.3.2.6 DataonPage 1,Line12,VoltageandFrequency
Variation: Enter voltage and frequency variations if beyond
standard limits.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
E.3.2.7 Data on Page 1, Line 13 to 14, Stator Temperature
This is the increasein temRise and Rotor Temperature Rise:
perature of the windings permitted over ambientair temperature. There are two methods to determine the temperature
rise:byresistancetemperaturedetector(RTD)and
by the
measurement of the resistance change (RES), with temperature, of the winding itself. Use the following
table to fill in the
blank. Temperature rise by RTD is recommended when the
motor stator is equipped with RTDs. If not equipped with
RTDs, specify by resistance (RES). All field winding temperatures are determined by resistance.
Motor Rating or Part
Stator Winding
All HP ratings
1.500 HP and less
Over 1,500 HP
7,ooOV and less
Over 7,000V
Field Wmding
Salient-pole motors
Cylindrical-rotormotors
Method
Class B Rise
(Above 4ooC
Ambient)
m
RES
8OoC
9oOc
RTD
RTD
85°C
80°C
RES
RES
80°C
for existing plants or projects. Refer to API Recommended
Practice 500.
The most commonly specified area classification
is Class I,
Division 2, Group D for process areas. ClassI means a flammable gis or liquid, Division 2 is where the gas or vapor is
present only during abnormal conditions, and Group D is a
category of materials including gasoline. A Division 1 area
means the gas or vapor is present during normal operation
and special enclosures or provisions for ventilation must be
used.
E.3.3.2 Data on Page 1, Line 20, Ignition Temperature, if
Less Than 250°C: If nothing is entered, 250°C is assumed
for any ignitable vapors or gases that may exist around the
motor while it is in service. Some liquids have ignition temperatures lowerthan 25OoC, and must be listed here. Seethe
current editionof NFF'A 497M for a complete listingof these
liquids.
E.3.3.3 Data on Page 1, Line 20, Site Elevation: Significant
sea level.
if I , W meters (3,300 feet)ormoreabove
Machines must be derated or specially designed for higher
elevations above this because of the decreased
air density.
E.3.3.4 DataonPage1,Line21,AmbientTemperature:
Minimum and maximum ambient air temperature. Significant, if below -15°C (5°F)or above 40°C (104°F).Low temperatures may determinetheneedforbearing-housingoil
heaters or special impact-resistant steel types. High temperatures may determine a derating factor for the motor design
or
may dictate a specialoilcoolingsystem.
See alsoitem
E.1.1.7.
E.3.3.5 Data on Page 1, Line 22, Relative Humidity: Indicates the maximum and minimum humidity.
E.3.3.6 Data on Page 1, Lines 23 to 24, Indoor: Temperature Controlled, Outdoor:, Roof, No Roof: Check as approFor example:
priate.Affectstheselectionofthehousing.
The Class B rise given above is specified even though the
requiring
a
weatherproof
housing.
If
Indoor
Temperature
F temperature.
insulation systemis rated for the higher Class
This is toassure long insulation life. The cost associated with Controlled, the operating ambient temperature of the motor
may be different than the outdoor temperature.
losses (life cycle costs-see Section E.1.1.19) also results in
lower than Class B rise in most cases, since losses result in
E.3.3.7 Data on Page 1, Line 25, Nonmassive Foundation
heat. The above values are for a maximum ambient air temDescription: The foundation should be designed to meet the
perature of 40OC.If the maximum ambient temperature is
massive foundation criteriaof 2.4.6.1.2. There maybe certain
above 40°C up to and including 5OoC, reduce the table values
installations where this is not possible, such as on offshore
by 10°C. If the maximum ambient temperature
is above 50°C
platforms. Detail these structures on the data sheet. A nonup to and including 60"C, reduce the table values
by 20°C.
massive foundation may affect the mechanical dynamic performance of the motor. Referto the description of a massive
E.3.3 SITE DATA
foundation in API 546.
85OC
E.3.3.1 DataonPage 1, Lines 18-19-Area
Classification
Class-,
Division-,
Group-,
or Zone-,
Class-,
GrouporNonclassified:UsetheClass,Division,and
Group or Zone, Class, Groupas defined in Chapter 5 of the
National Electrical Code (DEC). Areas are normally defined
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
E.3.4UNUSUAL
CONDITIONS
E.3.4.1 DataonPage
1, Line 28, Dust:Ifabrasive dust
conditionsarespecified,windinginsulationprotection
is
required for drip proof or weather-protected enclosures.This
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D * A P I / P E T R O S T D 54b-ENGL
793
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES"500 KVA AND LARGER
m
81
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
treatment usually reduces the air-cooling effectiveness and
electric parts of the motor. Use the Weather Protected Type I
raises the winding temperature above that without the treat(WP I) for sheltered locations that may be subject to some
ment, resulting in a larger and more costly motor. Specify anyweather intrusion or water spray. The
N T II and WP I encloother dust conditions here, suchas adhering dustor corrosive
sures may not be an appropriate choice where adhering dust
dust. See the descriptions of Weather Protected Type I andII
is present or if the area does not havefree air exchange. The
enclosures.
hot air discharged from the motor can cause a closed-in area
to become unbearably hot.
E.3.4.2 Data on Page 1, Line 28, Chemicals: If the motor is
subject to any specific chemicals, vapors, or liquids, specify
E.3.5.5 DataonPage 1, Line 34, Totally-EnclosedPipewhat those chemicals are.
Ventilated (TEPV): There is nofree exchange of air between
the inside of the motor and the air immediately outside the
E.3.4.3 Data on Page 1, Line 29, Seismic Loading: If the
is located invery
motor enclosure. Used where the motor
motor has significantducting or unsupported piping (not recdirty locations or if the motor is installed in a Division 1 hazommended), indicate the maximum forces to which the frame
ardous (classified) location. Requires air
inlet and outletducts
will be exposed. For example: Uniform Building Code Seisto duct air to and from the motor, inlet air filters and usually
mic Zone2.
inlet air blowers.
E.3.4.4 Data
on
Page
1,
Line
29, CorrosiveAgents:
E.3.5.6 Data on Page 1, Line 34, Totally-Enclosed WaterInclude environmental exposure that could result in stressAir-Cooled (TEWAC) Useinenvironmentswithadhering
corrosion cracking. This may include saltair or trace hydrodust or dirt, where it is desired to remove the motor-loss heat
gen-sulfide.
from a building, or if the motor is critical and none
of the
other totally-enclosed constructions are applicable. A source
E.3.4.5 Data on Page 1, Line 30, Other: Indicate any other
of cooling water is needed, usually 1 GPM for each kilowatt
unusual conditions. For example: Hose down
or tropical environment.
of motor loss [(0.746x HP x (1.0 - efficiency %/lOO)].The
material chosenfor the cooler usuallyis 90/10, coppednickel.
Single-tube cooler construction usually is specified with
E.3.5
ENCLOSURE
drip trays and leak detectors within the motor. Single tube
1, Line 32, ExplosionProof:Not
E.3.5.1 DataonPage
means that the motor coolingair is in direct contact with the
oftenusedforthismotorsizerange.Somemanufacturers
finned tube through which cooling water flows. When a water
have Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed motors available
leak occurs, the motor must
be shut down.
to 1,O00 HP. Only applicableto Class I, Division 1, Groups C
Double-tube cooler construction is warranted for nonsand D. For Class II locations (explosivedust), designate Dust
paredservice.Doubletubemeansthateverytubethrough
Ignition Proof in other.
whichwaterflows is enclosedwithinasecondtube.The
clearance between the tubes is small and empties
into a sepaE.3.5.2 DataonPage
1, Line 32, Totally-EnclosedFanrate header. If a water leak should develop in an inner tube,
Cooled (TEFC):A construction where free exchangeof air is
the leak is enclosed in the second, outer tube and collects in
prevented between the inside and outside of the motor. The
theheader. This headerusually is equippedwithawater
motor is cooled by a shaft-mounted fan external to the main
detector and will trigger an alarm circuit. Both sets of tubes
frame or enclosurethat forces air pasttheoutsideofthe
are rated for the operatingwaterpressure, so noleakage
frame. Only available in the smaller ratings covered by this
occurs in the air path used for the motor cooling. The motor
specification, normallyless than about800 HP. "lus is recomcan continue to operate until a shutdown canbe scheduled to
mendedforsevereenvironments. An alternativeforlarger
repair the cooler.
sizes is theTotallyEnclosedAir-to-AirCooled(TEAAC)
A water flow switch andor air outlet temperature resistype. See below.
tance temperature detector(RTD)is recommended toalarm a
E.3.5.3 Data on Page 1, Line 32, Open-Drip-Proof (ODP):
loss of cooling water.
Theminimumprotectionnormallyspecifiedforanindoor
This is not recommended for outenvironment with clean air.
E.3.5.7 Data on Page 1, Line 34, Other: May include other
door service.
NEMA or international enclosure designations. It could also
designate use of a Dust-Ignition-Proof (DIP) motorfor Class
E.3.5.4 Data on Page 1, Line 33, Weather Protected; Type
II (explosive dust) environments. The DIP motor is totally
I, Type II: This is the most common enclosure used. Air from
enclosed and is constructed so that dust does not enter the
outside the motor is passed through its interior for cooling
enclosure. It also prevents heator sparks inside the enclosure
active parts. Use the Weather Protected Type II (W II) for
from causing ignition outside the motor.
most outdoor applications.The WP II machine is constructed
so that high-velocity air and dirt ingested by the motor can
be
E.3.5.8 Data on Page 1, Line 35, Totally-Enclosed Air-todischarged without entering the internal air passages to the
Air Cooled (TEAAC):Similar in function to the TEFC type.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD*API/PETRO S T D Sllb-ENGL
API STANDARD
546
82
Has an air-to-air heat exchanger, usually mounted on the top
of the motor, to remove heat from the internal
air of the motor
by blowing outside air through the exchanger tubes. Use for
locations with severe environments not involving adhering
dust. Choose the heat exchanger material based on what
is
most compatible with air contaminants. Copper-free aluminum is less expensive than stainless steel and
is often considered for offshore platforms.
For the use of enclosures in Classified areas, see NFPA 70
Article 500 or IEC-79.
E.3.5.9 Data on Page 1, Line 36, Stainless Steel Fasteners:
Recommended for corrosive environments. Common zincplated steel fasteners will corrode and make machine disassemblyandmaintenancedifficult.Stainlesssteelfasteners
may cost more, dependingon the machinesize and the motor
manufacturer's pricing policy.
with the driven equipment. If the motor is to be supplied
through a driven-equipment vendor, and youare unsure of a
response, indicate a noteon the data sheet for the drivenequipment vendorto complete this.
E.3.6.7 Data on Page 2, Line 3, Epoxy Grout to be Used:
Requiredwherever a soleplate is specified. This assures
proper adhesionof the groutto the soleplate.
E.3.6.8 DataonPage 2, Line 4, Special Connections for
Field Piping: Where non-standard piping connections will be
used for any water or lube-oil connections, indicate here.
E.3.6.9 DataonPage
2, Line 5, WhenRotorDynamic
Analysis is Specified, Listof Foundation Data Required from
Purchaser: The motor supplier must specifically request the
data required so they can perform the analysis. In order for
the motor supplier to performthis analysis, dynamic stiffness
E.3.5.10 Dataon Page 1, Line 36, Provision for Purging:
values, or other information maybe required. This usuallyis
Maybespecified to preventthegenerator from ingesting
expressed in millions
of pounds per inch for both the horizonexternal, ambientair as it cools from operating temperature or tal and vertical directions. The foundation designer should be
when it is at rest.
consulted in order to provide this data.
MOUNTING
E.3.6.1 Data on Page 1, Line 39, Horizontal, Vertical, Shaft
up, Shaftdown: Either horizontalor vertical shaft orientation.
Most motors are horizontal type, but vertical motors are used
for in-line process pumps, turbine pumps, etc.
E.3.7ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
E.3.7.1 DataonPage 2, Line 8, PrimaryPowerSource:
Volts, Phase, Hertz: Indicate the nominal voltage, the number
of phases, and the power frequency of the electrical system
where the motor will be connected.
E.3.6.2 Dataon Page 1, Line 40, FootMounted;Flange
Mounted: Specify foot mounted for most applications. Flange E.3.7.2 DataonPage 2, Line 9, MaximumShortCircuit
MVA at Motor Bus (at - k v Base), X/R Ratio, Pt Letmounted motorsare rare.
through Energy: Record the maximum short-circuit conmbuE.3.6.3 DataonPage 1, Line 41, EngineType,Bearings
tion and X/R ratio from the power system with contribution
Furnished By -; Shaft Furnished By -: An engine type
from all sources.This reflects the capacityof the utility commotor is typically slow speed and shares at least one of its
pany or the generation system and is used to calculate the
bearings with the driven compressor. Typically indicate that
bursting pressure of theterminal box for an internal terminal
the driven equipment supplier is to supply the bearings and
box short circuit.
the shaft.
E.3.7.3 DataonPage 2, Line 10, Minimum Short Circuit
E.3.6.4 Data on Page 2, Line 2, Baseplate Furnished By: If
MVA at Motor Bus (at - k v Base), X/R Ratio: Record the
a baseplate is furnished, it usually
is by the driven-equipment
minimum short-circuit contribution and X/R ratio from the
supplier as part of a package. Most motors have soleplates.
power system with no short-circuit contribution from other
See below:
motor sources. This reflects the capacity of the utility company or the generation system and is used to calculate the
E.3.6.5 DataonPage 2, Line 2, Soleplate Furnished By:
voltage drop during a srart.
Soleplates are steel plates embeddedinto a concrete foundation onto which the motoris mounted. Theyare normally furE.3.7.4 DataonPage
2, Line I l , MethodofSystem
nished by the motor supplier for installationby the purchaser.
Grounding, Maximum Ground Fault Amperes: Specify how
the power system source
to the motoris to be grounded. Most
E.3.6.6 Data
on
Page
2, Line 3, Axial
Stator
Shift
applications are either low-resistance grounded (50 to 400
Required: Many synchronousmotorshavetheirbearings
amperes) orhigh-resistancegrounded
(10 amperesmaximounted onto bearing brackets attached to the motor frame,
mum). Some systems have delta connected transformers at
so axial stator shift is not required. Axial shift is required
when the motor frame mustbe shifted in order to remove the their s o m e with no intentional connectionto ground and are
ungrounded. The methodof grounding affects the voltage ratrotor. It usually applies to engine type motors with only
a
ing of surge arresters appliedto the motor.
non-drive-end bearing where the drive-end bearing
is integral
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
E.3.6
S T D * A P I / P E T R O STD 54b-ENGL 1797
0732270 05b75L3
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500 KVA AND h R G E R
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
E.3.7.5 Data on Page 2, Line 12, Other: This may include
details on the electric power system such as fast-bus transfer
of the supply during power failure or line reclosure during
system short circuits which could affect winding mechanical
bracing and theshaft design. If the motor is to be fed froman
adjustable-frequency drive,include details or references here.
E.3.8 MOTOR STARTING
E.3.8.1 Data on Page 2, Line 14, Full Voltage: Applies in
most cases. This is where the motor starter or circuit breaker
is closed to start the motor with nothing intentionally inserted
in the circuit to reduce the voltageto the motor, i.e., full voltage is applied tostart the motor.
E.3.8.2 Data on Page 2, Line 14, 95 Reduced-Voltage and
Type: Where the starting voltage is intentionally reduced by
use of an autotransformer, reactor, or resistor.Indicate the
value of reduced voltage which is provided
bythe starting
method. For example,the voltage would typicallybe reduced
to either 80 percent or 65 percent with an autotransformer
starter.
and pull-in torque requirements
are low, such as reciprocating
compressors,themotorcan be designed for afull-voltage
inrush downto about 325 percent of the full-load kVA rating
of the motor (based on a 1.0 power
factor rating). Higher
starting and pull-in torque requirements couldresult in a fullvoltage inrush of up to 550 percent of the full-load kVA, or
even greater in some rare applications (e.g., pulverizers).For
most compressor applications, reciprocating and centrifugal,
350 percent is a reasonable value to enter for unloaded start
conditions. For loaded start conditions, typically 450 percent
should be entered. For 0.8 power factor ratings, multiply the
above percentagesby 0.8.
E.3.8.6 Data on Page 2, Line 17, Loaded, Partially Loaded,
or Unloaded:Pertains to theloadimposed
by thedriven
equipment. Most centrifugal-type loads are partially loaded
and most reciprocating-typeloads unloaded. Data entered for
these items must be coordinated with the driven-equipment
supplier. Itmay be appropriateto add Note 2 ofthe data sheet
for these items.
E.3.8.7 Data on Page 2, Line18,TorquesinExcessof
NEMA MG 1,Part21.Required:Notfrequentlyrequired
unless a very low starting voltage will be used (less than 80
percent rated), orif the torque imposed by
the load is unusual.
E.3.8.3 DataonPage2,Line
15, Other Starting Method:
Other starting methods may include captive-transformer
(a
single transformer feeding only the motor), adjustable-frequency or adjustable-voltage starters, shunt-capacitor
(switchedduring starting), or series-reactor/shunt-capacitor
starting methods.
E.3.8.8 Data on Page 2, Line 19, Number of Full-Voltage
Starts, if not5,000: Unless the motor isapplied in a repetitive
start application, such as a pipeline pump/compressor motor,
specify 5,000. For motorswithanticipatedhighrepetitive
start rates, provide vendor with details of how often the motor
will be started, how long it will run following starting, and
how long it will be down before restarting. If the motor will
haveveryseverestartingrequirements,specifytheexact
requirementshere.Table2alreadyimposesrequirements
usually in excess to NEMA, so this should not be specified
very often.
E.3.8.4 DataonPage2,Line
16, VoltageDipatLocked
Rotor-Max %: The motor is normally designedto be capable
of accelerating its shaft load with 80 percent of its rated voltage applied. This is usually a conservative approach and 80
percent should be specified unless the stiffness of the power
system assuresthe higher voltage of85 percent or 90 percent.
This should first be verifiedby a motor starting voltage-drop
calculationwith the minimumcapabilityfromthesupply
transformers, lines, utility company, or generation including
the effects of the starting method. For captive-transformer
applications, the voltage available may be less than 80 percent,typically 70 percent to 75percent for normaltransformer
ratings
in relation to the
motor
rating.
For
autotransformer starting, an80 percent auto-transformer start
mayactually result in75percentvoltageavailableto
the
motor, depending on the power system and auto-transfomer
impedance.
E.3.8.5 Data on Page 2, Line 16, kVA Inrush %: The maximum kVA inrush during starting at full voltage expressed as
as a basis for the maximum
percent of full load kVA and used
voltage dip specified in E.3.8.4. Since the rotor winding used
to start the motor(the damper windng) does not substantially
affecttherated-speedoperationofthemotor,themotor
designer hasawiderangeof
choices to limit the starting
inrush to the motor. For those applications where thestarting
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
83
E.3.8.9 Data onPage 2, Line20,LoadReacceleration
Required: If prompt reacceleration of the motor is required
following a power failure,indicate yes. Providedetails on the
maximum interruption time: the voltage available to accelerate the motor; the driven-equipment speed-torque reference
(Is the reacceleration a loaded start due to process upsets?);
and any special reacceleration-curve reference such as voltage variation with time due to a generator voltage regulator
response.
E.3.8.10 Data on Page2,Line15,Other:Otherstarting
methodsmayincludecaptive-transformer
(a single transformerfeedingonlythe
motor), adjustable frequency or
adjustable voltage starters, shunt capacitor (switched during
starting) or series-reactor or shunt-capacitorstarting methods.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD-APIiPETRO STD Sqb-ENGL 1997
0732290 0 5 b 7 5 L q q T 2
m
API STANDARD 546
E.3.9
SPECIAL
CONDITIONS
E.3.9.1 Data on Page 2, Line 24, Special vibration
Requirements: For critical equipment (e.g.: unspared, high
inertia load,high speed, or other sensitive applications) lower
vibration limitsmay be specified.
E.3.9.2 Dataon Page 2, Line 25, EvaluationFactor:See
below to determine the $/kilowatt to be used for the evalua-
LCC=P+EFxKWe
Where:
in dollars.
= purchase price of the motor
= evaluation factor($/kW) = C X N X PWE
c = energy cost in $/KWH (dollars per kilowatthour).
N
= operating timein hours per year.
(this factor
PWF = cumulativepresentworthfactor
typically ranges from 2 to 4 for the purpose of
bid valuations).
M e = evaluated loss in (kW).
P
EF
KWe = L X HP X [(lOO/E,,) - 1 J X 0.746.
Note: to convert HP to kW.
= load factor = (driven load HP)/(motor nameplate HP).
HP = motor nameplate horsepower.
EV = motor efficiency (in %) at the specified drivenequipment shaft load.
L
E.3.9.3 Dataon Page 2, Line 26, Federal,State,Local
Codes: List and supply copies
of any local, special codes. The
copies are required by the MI 546 paragraph. For example:
southern California installations frequently call for special
electrical codes.
E.3.9.4 Data on Page 2, Line 27, Any External Forces on
Motor Housing That May Affect Site Performance: Indicate
any forces from piping, ducting, or any auxiliary equipment
not providedby the motor supplier. Typically, these
loads are
insignificant when these items are properly supported.
E.4 DRIVEN EQUIPMENTINFORMATION
E.4.1
Data on Page 2, Line 30, Driven Equipment I t e d a g
No.: Enter identification numberof driven equipment.
E.4.2 DataonPage 2, Line 31, Type: Enterthespecific
type of driven equipment.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
E.4.3
Data
Page
on
2, Line 32, Reciprocating
Compressor.
E.4.3.1 Data on Page 2, Line 32, Compressor Factor, ‘C’:
usually completed by the compressor supplier. This factor
reflects how much motor WK*to limit the line-cwent pulsations to within the NEMA limit of 66 percent of motor fullload current, unlessa lower limit(40 percent or20 percent) is
specified. See NEMAMG 1, Part 21 for details.
The amount of AC line current pulsation desiredis indicated
here. The NEMA standard is 66 percent, but can be reduced
through higher rotor or additional flywheel inertia. In many
instances, 40 percent, or less, is specifiedtoreducelight
flicker on power systems with weak short circuit capacity.
E.4.3.4 DataonPage
2, Line 34, CalculatedEfficiency
Based on Current-Pulsation Operating Condition: Specify for
all reciprocating loads.
E.4.4 Data on Page 2, Line 35,Direct Connected: Check,if
the motoris directly coupled(at the samespeed) to the driven
load (Le., not coupled through gears, belts,etc.).
E.4.5 Data on Page 2, Line 36, Speed Increasing-Reducing
Gear: Check, if applicable. List the ratioof speed-increasing
or speed-decreasing gearboxesbelow.
E.4.6 Data onPage 2, Line 37, Speed-Increasing (Reducing) Gear W‘k? If known, enter the inertia of the gear at a
specified r/min, usually
the motor speed.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
84
E.4.7 Data on Page 2, Line 38, Typeof Coupling:Enter
gear, diaphragm, resilient, etc., as appropriate. Include the
coupling manufacturer and catalog number. Usually supplied
by the driven-equipment supplier.
E.4.8 DataonPage
2, Line 39, ManufacturerStandard,
M I 671: Inmostapplications,themanufacturerstandard
coupling is adequate. For unspared service or applications
3,000 rpm and greater, consider the special-purpose
A P I 671
coupling. If an API 671 coupling is specified, a API 671 data
sheet accompanies the proposal. See the General Machinery
Manual. (API 671 has been updated. Obtain the most recent
edition fromAFT)
E.4.9 DataonPage 2, Line 40, Taper Fit, Cylindrical Fit,
Flange: The most common type
is the cylindricalfit type with
a keyway, but the taperfit offers advantages for removal during maintenance. Consult with the local machinery specialist
for a preference. A flange type is most commonly appliedon
high-speed (3,000 rpm and greater) motors.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D 5qb-ENGL L797
SYNCHRONOUS
BRUSHLESS
0732290 05b7515 337
MACHINES-500
KVA AND LARGER
m
85
E.4.10 Data on Page 2, Line 43, Supplied By: Most often,
the driven-equipment supplier provides the coupling, unless
the purchaser is coordinating the interfaces between equip
ment.
trip setting. The normal minimum percent overspeed
is 20
percent for rated speeds of 1,500 rpm and over, and 25 percent for rated speeds of 1,499 rpm and below.
This is discussed in API 546.
E.4.11 Data on Page 2, Line 44, Mounted By: Motor Manufacturer, Driven Equipment Manufacturer, Purchaser: Most
motorsorderedthroughadriven-equipmentmanufacturer
havetheircoupling-mountedbythemanufacturer.Motors
rated 1,500 rpm and greater usually undergo a rotor dynamics
test and requires that the coupling be mounted by the motor
manufacturer. Coordination is required at the time of order
entry to assure the coupling half, with
its idling adapter which
allows the motor to be run uncoupled, is properly coordinated. For example: The coordination may involve special
tapped-hole patterns on the idler plate
for adaptation to a balancing machine drive.
E.5.3 Data on Page 3, Line 5 , Rotor WK2: Inertia data for
the motor is requested so that the entire drive-train inertia
referred to the motor-shaft speed, is established. Acceleration
time calculations canbe made by the purchaser for evaluating
the motor starting capability and setting the motor’s protective relays.
E.5.5 Data on Page 3, Line 6, Locked-Rotor Torque,5% FLT
is the torque produced by the motor
at standstill.
E.5.6 Data on Page 3, Line 7, Pull-In Torque, % FLT is the
maximum constant torque under which the motor pulls
its
connected inertia into synchronism when normal direct-current excitationis applied to the motor field.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
E.4.12 Data on Page 2, Line 45, Rotation of Motor Viewed
form Motor Exciter End: Indicate the direction of rotation
as
viewed from the exciter end (the outboard end)of the motor.
Indicate either clockwiseor counterclockwise.
E.5.4 DataonPage
3, Line 6, Full-LoadTorque:Rated
torque of the motor (at rated horsepower and speed) in footpounds.
E.4.13 DataonPage 2, Line 4 6 , TotalDriven-Equipment
List theloadinertiaincludingallpartssuch
as couplings, gears, and dnven-equipment rotors. These usuallyare
referenced to the motor speed.
E.5.7 Data on Page 3, Line 7, Pull-Out Torque, % FIX is
the maximum sustained torque a motor produces at synchronous speed before losing synchronism.
E.4.14 Data on Page 2, Line 47, Load Speed-Torque Curve
No.: Usually entered by the driven-equipment supplier. Ifthe
for
motor is being purchased directly,this is a curve reference
the speed versus torque of the driven equipment under the
most stringent starting conditions.
E.5.8 Data on Page 3, Line 9, Motor Speed Torque Curve
No.: This is a plot of speed versus torque
for the motor which
is necessary, in part, to complete motor acceleration calculations. Usually presented at rated voltage or any other specias thesquare of the
fiedvoltage.Thistorquedecreases
applied voltage from rated motor voltage.
E S MOTOR DATA
E.5.9 Data on Page 3, Line 10, Pulsating Torque vs. Speed,
Curve No.: This torque is present on all salient-pole motors,
and is due to the unequal magnetic paths for different axis of
the rotor. It is important
for torsional response considerations,
especially on gearbox-driven loads.
Wk2:
E.5.1 Data on Page 3, Line 2, Rotor Construction: The type
of rotor construction is dependent somewhat on speed. Solid
cylindrical construction is usually limited to two-pole speed.
Laminated cylindrical construction is applied mostly at four-,
six- or eight-polespeedsandhasspecialadvantages
for
E.5.10 DataonPage
3, Line 11, MotorSpeed-Current
reducing pulsating accelerating torques compared to salientCurve No: Provides refined data at 100 percent voltage and
pole designs, especiallyforgear-drivenequipmenttrains.
other specified voltage for input motor-starting voltage drop
Salient-pole star punching designs are the least costly conand acceleration time calculation.
struction for four-pole speed and slower, but may have manuE.5.11 DataonPage 3, Line 14, EstimatedAcceleration
facturing related challengeson attaining proper shrink fit and
Time: Provides the calculated acceleration times
at the specithermally stable vibration characteristics. Salient-pole dove
fied terminal voltages and shaft
load.
tail or T-tail attachment to theshaft is the most common construction for four pole speed and slower. Other typesof conE.5.12 Data on Page 3, Line 15, Locked-Rotor Withstand
struction include solid-pole (from a forging integral with the
Time, Cold: Information that can be used to create a time vershaft) andsolid-pole,boltedpoletip.These
are mostly
sus current withstand curve for the cold, or ambient condiapplied on high-inertia, gear-driven compressor drives.
tion. The percent voltage values can be directly translated to
E.5.2 Data on Page 3, Line 5, Min % Overspeed:Leave
percent of locked-rotor current for use in this manner. Thls
information is required for protective relay setting considerblank except for an adjustable-speed motor or a motor tanations.
Dataisprovided
at 100 percentvoltageand other
dem-driven by a turbine, in which case the overspeed requirespecified
voltages.
ment should be coordmated with the emergency overspeed
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD*API/PETRO S T D Sqb-ENGL
API STANDARD
546
86
E.5.13 Data on Page 3,Line 16,Locked-Rotor Withstand
as Section E.15.1 1,except
%me at Rated Temperature: Same
that all motor components are at rated operating temperature.
Normally are thevaluesusedforprotectiverelaysettings
(locked-rotor or long acceleration protection). Data is provided at 100 percent voltage and other specified voltages.
E 5 1 4 Data on Page 3, Line 17,Locked Rotor Current: is
the current demanded at standstill. It is a value required for
voltage-drop calculations during starting, Datais provided at
100 percent voltage and other specified voltages.
provide all the required lubricationfor the bearing on smaller
motors and emergency backup or rundown capability for the
larger sizes. For larger-sized motorsor certain types of bearings(tilting-pad-journal),oilringscannotbeapplied.Not
available for adjustable frequency drive type motors.
ES94 DataonPage 4, Line 20, Thrust Bearings, MaximumConnected-Equipment Thrust: Usuallyleaveblank.
Applicable only to a motor with a verticdly oriented shaft.
Thedriven-equipmentsupplierwouldnormallyenterthis
data for verticalmotors.
E.5.15 Data on Page 3, Line 17, Locked Rotor Power Factor: is also usefulfor motor starting calculations.
E 5 2 5 Data on Page 4,Lines 18 to 30, Bearings: These are
the bearing design details that are completed
by the motor
manufacturer. All information should be consistent with any
E.5.16 Data
on
Page
3, Lines 20 to 27, Calculated
lateralcriticalspeedanalysisandmanufacturingmeasureExpected Data at the Following Loads: Amperes, Power Facments.
tor And Efficiency: General information for use in system
design or evaluation.
E.5.26 DataonPage
4, Line 30, Special Seals for Gas
Purge:
Specify
for
motors
that will operate in severe dust or
E 5 1 7 Data on Page 3, Line 24, Guaranteed Efficiency at
dirt
environments.
A
clean,
dry air (or other gas source) must
Power Factor and Load: This is the efficiency to use when
be
available.
applying the evaluation of life-cycle cost. See E.3.9.1 of this
guide.
E.5.18 DataonPage
3, Line 25, ForCurrentPulsation
OperatingCond., Calc Eff, Calc Current Pulsation: If the
driven load is a reciprocating compressor or similar type of
nonunifom load, specify this item. All data for the motor
supplier to providethis information must usually be provided
by the driven-equipment supplier.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
E.5.19 Data on Page 3, Line 26,Rated Motor Field Amps,
Volts: The voltage and current of the main rotor field of the
motorunderratedconditions(voltage,horsepower,and
power factor).
E.5.20 Data on Page 3, Line 27, RatedExciterField:
Amps, Volts:All brushless exciters have a stationary pilot
field for generating voltageon the rotating exciter. These values are for that field, which typicallyis supplied from a voltage regulation device.
E.5.21 Data on Page 3, Lines 29 to 47 and Page 4, Lines 2
to17,MotorParameters:Thesearethereactances,resistances, and time constants that are used as inputs for power
system studies. Check individual stability programs to determine if the nomenclature is consistent or if additional constants are required.
E.5.22 DataonPage 4, Line 19, BearingTypeRequired:
Normallycheckhydrodynamic.For
this size andtypeof
motor, the hydrodynamic (oil-film) type bearing
is most suittype
able. This contrastswiththeantifriction(balVroller)
bearing.
E.5.23 Data
on
Page
4,
Line
19, BearingOilRings
Required:Normallyselected.Theseringsrotatewiththe
shaft to lift oil from a sump onto the shaft journal. The rings
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
E.6 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
E.6.1 DataonPage 4, Line 32, Pressureor Flood Lube:
Indicate if a pressurized lubeor flood lube systemis required.
This is recommended for allmotorsratedaboveapproximately 1,500horsepower.
E.6.2 DataonPage
4, Lines 33 to 36, Commonwith
Driven Equipment, Bearing Oil Requirements, Heat Loss to
be Removed When the driven-equipment has a pressurizedlubrication system, the motor typically is fed from the same
system. This space is forselecting sucha system, designating
its supplier, the lubricating oil type, quantity of oil, and the
supply pressure. An oil system is typically supplied by the
driven-equipment supplier. The typical oil for
a common system is IS0 Grade 32.The oil system pressureis typically 15
to 25 psig.
E.6.3 DataonPage 4, Line 33, PerAPI 614,Manufacturer’s Standard: API 614 is a comprehensive, special-purpose lubrication system specification necessary for specialpurpose applications orthose type of bearings that cannotbe
supplied with backup oil rings. Usually, this type of system
would accompany a compressor and could be common for
both the motor and driven-equipment. If the manufacturer’s
standard lubrication system
is desired, select that option.
E.6.4 DataonPage
4, Lines 37 to 38, MainOilPump
Required, Standby Oil Pump Required:
If an API 614 system
is supplied, or if backup oil rings are supplied, a main oil
pump drivenby the motor shaftis not required. API614 usually recommendsa primary and standby pump which must be
designated on the API 614 Data Sheet.A standby pump normally is specified for those motors with
M I 614 systems, but
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO S T D 54b-ENGL L997 m 0732270 05b7517 L O 1 m
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500
not if the motor has oil rings for backup lubrication during
emergency conditions.
E.6.5 Data on Page 4, Line 43, Filter Element: If there is a
preference for a specific type of filter in an API 614 system,
complete this section.
KVA AND LARGER
87
E.7.3 Data on Page 5, Line13,TubeMaterial:Normally
indicates N / l o , copper/nickel as the material, unless another
material is more suitablefor the plant's cooling water characteristics.
E.7.4 Data on Page 5 , Line 14, Tube Construction: Double
Tube, Single Tube:Double-tubeconstructionisrecommendedfornonspared applications, singletube for others.
See E.3.5.8 of this guide for a discussionof Totally-Enclosed
Water-Air-Cooled (TEWAC) constructions.
E.6.6 Data
on
Page
4, Line 43, Duplex
Oil
Filters
Required, Oil Cooler Required: If a motor cannot be shut
614 system, duplex fildown to change an oil filter on an API
ters are recommended. The use of duplex filters with a switch
valve permits on-lineoil filter changes. If there is a preference E.7.5 Data on Page 5 , Line 15, Air TemperatureSensor
for an oil cooler type, specify water cooled, shell and tube,
or
Required:Sensesthetemperature
ofthe air outletof the
air-cooled, as appropriate.
cooler. A water flow switch or an air temperature sensor is
recommended for alarm purposes incaseof cooling water
E.6.7 Data on Page 5, Line 2, Bearing Oil Rings Required:
interruption.
Normally selected, these rings rotate withthe shaft to lift oil
from a sump onto the shaftjournal. The rings provide allthe
E.7.6 Data on Page 5, Line 16, Flow Sensor Local Indicarequired lubrication for the bearing on smaller motors and
tor Required: All TEWAC applications require a low flow
emergency backup or rundown capability on large motors.
sensing device. When this item is specified, an indicator of
They can not be applied on tilt-pad bearings or adjustable
This is recomwater flowrate (local to the motor) is required.
speed drive motors.
mended for TEWAC applications to assist operators.
E.6.8 DataonPage 5, Line 3, BearingHousingHeaters
Required: Not required very often, because most motors in
extremely coldclimates are installed in heated shelters.
E.7.7 DataonPage 5, Line 17, LeakDetectorRequired:
Type: This is recommended as a damage-prevention device
for all TEWAC motors. A conductive type is recommended.
An alternativeisafloat-typeofdetector,but
these often
become inoperative withtime.
E.6.9 Data on Page 5 , Line 4, Bearing Constant-level Sight
Feed Oilers Required: Specify where the motor has self-lubricated bearings.
E.7.8 Data on Page 5, Line 20 Air Filters: Filter provisions
(mountinghardware)areprovided
as standardon WP II
E.6.10 DataonPage 5 , Line 5 , Oil Mist for Antifriction
enclosures,butshouldbespecifiedfor
WP IandTEPV,
Bearings: Where antihction (ball or roller) bearings are utiair supply. The
unless the TEPV motor has a separate filtered
lized, this alternate method of lubrication is not often used,
cost of filter provisions is low. Specify filters (manufacturer
and is user/application specific.
and type) for dirty or dusty environments, but keep in mind
that either an air-filter differential-pressure switch
or winding
E.7 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
temperature detectors must be wired
to alarm operators when
the filters become clogged. The type of differential-pressure
E.7.1 Data on Page 5, Line 8, TEWAC Heat Exchanger.
switch must be specified, typically a Dwyer
Switch.When filE.7.2 Data on Page 5, Line 11, Cooling Water Conditions
ters are specified,ordera
set of spares so theycanbe
Per 2.4.1.2.4, Item a?: This section of API 546 lists typical
exchanged for the onesin the motor and cleaned.
cooling water system characteristics, which are appropriate
E.7.9 Data on Page 5 , Line 25, Main Conduit Box Sized
for most applications. This list is reproduced below. If there
For.
are significant differencesin any items, notehere.
Velocity overheat exchange surfaces
Maximum allowable working pressure
Test pressure (minimumof 1.5 timesthe
maximum allowable workingpressure)
Maximum pressure drop
Maximum inlet temperature
Maximum outlet temperature
Maximum temperaturerise
Minimum temperature rise
Fouling factor on water side
1 S-2.5 d s
5-8 ft/s
>75 psig
2 5 bar (ga) 27.9bar (ga) 21 15 psig
1 bar
32'C
15 psig
90°F
49oc
120'F
17°C
30°F
20°F
0.002 h r - f t 2
'FiBtu
11°C
0.35
m' x KkW
E.7.10 Data on Page 5 , Lines 26 to 27, Main Feeder Cable:
Conductor Size, Type, Insulation, Quantity Per Phase: For the
cables from the motorstarter or circuit breaker to the motor,
indicate the conductorsize; Type [MC (metal-clad), TC
(traycable), or MV (medium-voltage)cable];Insulation[EPR
(ethylene propylene rubber) or XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene)], and the number of conductors per phase.
E.7.11 Data on Page 5, Line 27, Enter From: Top, Bottom,
Side: Indicate the position of the main power conductor entry.
This depends on the physical configuration of the cablelconduit system.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
88
API STANDARD546
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
E.7.12 Data on Page 5 , Line 28, Both Ends of Stator Winding Brought Outto Terminal Box: This is required when differentialcurrentprotection
is applied. Italsofacilitates
insulation testing on individual phases and should usuallybe
specified.
E.7.13 Data on Page 5, Line 29, Terminations and InteriorJumpers: Insulated, Uninsulated:Althoughmaintenance
checks
are
made more
difficult,
insulated
terminations are moresecure and are recommended. Adhere
to local practice.
the type (usually a window type) quantity, and ratio with a
maximum current rating of150 percent ofthe rated-load current of the motor. An accuracy class of C20 is usually adequate.
Refer
to the
particular
ammeter
device
or
specifications. An alternative is to use a current transducer
mounted in the switchgear wired to an ammeter mounted at
the motor. Current transformers for reactive power (var) or
power factor controlcan also be specified here. Indicate who
is to mount the current
transfomers (i.e., motor supplier, purchaser, panel manufacturer, etc.).
E.7.18 Data onPage 5, Lines 40 to 42, Potential TmsE.7.14 Data on Page 5, Lines 30 to 32, Current Transformformer for: Voltmeter: Potential transformers are not often
ers for Differential Protection:This is recommended for critisupplied for motors. Usually the transformers on the switchcal or special-purpose motors, or all motors rated 1,500 HP
gearbussuffice.Ifrequired,includedetailsonwho
is to
and larger. Appropriate protective relays must
be provided in
mount them, the quantity, the ratio, and the accuracy class.
the motor starter or switchgear. Three core-balance (window
Also specify, if fuses are required. If the area is classified,
type), current transformers are the most common. Specify themost applications of fuses within
the terminal box necessitate
B Y Z or the curparticular type, for example: Westinghouse
purging the terminal box.
rent transformer accuracy class.
A C 10 accuracy class isusuE.7.19 Data onPage
5 , Line 43, Bushing Studsor
ally adequate, but C 20 may be required depending on the
Receptacles:
Rarely
specified.
Used where a fast change of
protective relay type. Recommenda C 10 accuracy class and
motors
is
necessary
in
the
event
offailure. Specify studs or
a ratio of 50 to 5 (505)for most applications. Bar-type curreceptacles.
three)
are only applied for very high conrent transformers (
tinuous current ratings, and are specified with appropriately
E.7.20 Data on Page 5, Line 44, Space for Stress Cones:If
high ratios and accuracy classesto match a set of three curshielded conductors are used, specify the length
of the cable
rent transformersin the supply switchgear. If either the coretermination.
balance or bar-type current transformers specified, indicate
be supplied by the purchaser(orthe
whethertheywill
E.7.21 Data on Page 5, Line 45, Thermal Insulation: This
switchgear vendor)or if the motor manufacturer is to supply
is recommended for motors with large terminal boxes that
them.
enclose surge protection and instrument transformers
in locations where moisture condensation on cool metal surfaces is
E.7.15 Data on Page 5, Lines 33 to 34, Surge Capacitors:
common. Terminal box space heaters are recommended.
This is recommended for criticalmotors,thoseconnected
E.722 Data on Page 5, Line 47, Space Heaters: These are
through one transformer or directly to a bare overhead line,or
those which have switched capacitors on the same voltage
usually specified as 120 or 240-volt single phase, because of
box heater
their typical low power requirement. The terminal
level. Under these conditions, recommended for each motor
element surface temperature limits are the same as for the
individually. Specify0.5 microfarad for motor voltage ratings
main machine space heaters.
through 4,160 volts and 0.25 microfarad for ratings 6,600
volts and above. Type of switching device
can be a source of
E.7.23 Data on Page 6, Line 3, Breathers: These should be
surges, and should be considered.
specified for smaller, non-space heated terminal boxes; usually combined with drains.
E.7.16 Data on Page 5, Lines 35 to 36, SurgeArresters:
These are recommended for the same conditions given for
E.7.24 Data on Page 6, Line 3, Drain Holes: These should
surge capacitors. For those motors connected toa bare overbe included for all smaller, non-space heated terminal boxes
head line through at least one transformer (protected on its
to allow drainage of condensation.
primary with arresters), one set of surge arresters appliedon
the main switchgear to protect
a group of motors is adequate.
E.7.25 Data onPage 6, Line 3, ProvisionforPurging:
Specify 2.7-kv rated arresters for 2.3 or 2.4-kv rated motors,
Purging is required by the NEC for non-explosion proof ter4.5 k v for 4.0 or 4.16-kV motors, 7.5 kv for 6.6 or 6.9-kv
is
minalboxescontainingsurgearresterswhenthemotor
motors, and 15.0-kV for 13.2 or 13.8-kV motors. MOV type
installed in a Class I, Division 1 area. Specify when applicamesters shall be used for Classified areas.
ble. Refer to NEC Section 501-17.
E.7.17 Data on Page 5, Lines 37 to 39, CurrentTransIf a singlecurrenttransformer
is
formerfor:Ammeter:
needed for load-current indication localto the motor, specify
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
E.7.26 Data on Page 6, Line 4, Removable Links: This is
recommended for motors with larger terminal boxes to permit
isolation of each phase ofthe motor from the incoming cable
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I I P E T R O STD 5Vb-ENGL
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500 UVA AND LARGER
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and surge protection. This permits maintenance high-potendistia1 or insulation tests to be done without
AITOC untaping and
Group
connection of devices in order to isolate the motor windings.
E.7.27 DataonPage 6, Line4,Silver-Plated Bus Joints:
This is recommended for all applications. Cost is low and
increases the integrity of electrical contact areas.
E.7.28 DataonPage
6, Line S, FaultWithstand:The
extreme temperature of an arcing fault within a sheet metal
terminalboxcanresultininternalairpressurethatcauses
latched or bolted covers to blow off during a fault. Indicateif
you wish for the box to be designed to relieve the pressure
through the use of a pressure rupture disc
or through a reductionofthepossible
fault level(togroundfaultlevels)by
phase segregation.
E.7.29 Data on Page6, Line 6, Ground Bus: Usually specified for large terminal boxes which contain accessoryequip
ment such as surge capacitors, arresters or stress cones to be
grounded.
E.7.30 Data on Page 6, Lines 6 to 7, Other Teminal Box
Requirements:Specifyanyotherterminalbox
features
required.
E.7.31 Data on Page 6, Lines 9 to 10, Stator Space Heaters:
All motors shouldinclude space heaters. Specify 120-or 240volt,single-phase or 208- or 480-volt,three-phasepower,
depending on what power source is available with the motor
shut down. Three-phase power for
the space heaters usuallyis
needed only for motors over 4,000HP.
E.7.32 DataonPage 6, Line11,MaximumSheathTemperature: The maximum temperature permitted at the
surface
of the heater element, which could be a source of ignition in
an explosive atmosphere if the element too
is hot. For Class I
(gas or vapor) locations, specify a maximum temperature of
the lesser of 200°C or80 percent of the auto ignition temperor vapor
ature from NFF'A 497Mforthespecificgas
involved. Listed beloware those liquids requiring heater elements with a surface temperature of less than 200°C (from
the 1986 edition of NFPA 497M). For Class II (dust) locations, specify200°C for Group E, 1SO"C for Group F, or
120°C for Group G.
E.7.33 Data on Page 6, Line 11, Sheath Material: Various
materialssuch as silicon-rubber,stainlesssteel,moneland
aluminum are available. Normally specified to be the manufacturer's standard.
The following chart is a list of liquids with an autoignition
temperature ( A I T ) of less than 250°C requiring spaceheaters
withheaterelementsurfacetemperaturelessthan200°C
(extracted fromNFPA 497M-1986).
E.7.34 DataonPage
6, Line13,BearingHeaters:Not
specified very often, because most motors in extremely cold
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
89
80%
AITT
Material
Acetaldehyde
Acrolein (inhibited)
n-Butyraldehyde
Cyclohexane
Cyclohexene
Cyclohexanone *
Decene *
Diethyl Ether
Diethylene Glycol MonobutylEther **
Diethyl Glycol Monomethyl Ether **
Dimethyl Sulfate **
1,CDioxane
Dipentene *
Ethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether**
Ethylene Glycol Monoethyl Ether *
2-Ethyl Hexanol **
2-Ethylhexaldehyde *
Fuel Oils *
Heptane
Hexane
Hexenes
Hydrazine *
Isoprene
Isc-octyl Aldehyde *
Kerosene *
Methyl Formal
Monomethyl Hydrazine
Nome
Octane
Oaene
Pentane
Propionaldehyde
n-Propyl Ether
Propyl Nitlate
Valemldehyde
n
L
WC)
C
D
D
D
D
C
C
C
D
C
D
C
C
D
C
D
D
D
D
C
D
C
D
C
C
D
D
D
D
C
C
B
C
I75
235
218
245
244
245
235
160
228
24 I
188
I80
237
238
235
23 1
191
21-07
204
225
245
230-270
220
197
210
238
194
205
206
230
243
207
215
175
222
140
188
174
1%
195
196
188
128
I82
I92
150
144
189
190
188
184
152
168
I63
180
1%
176
157
168
190
155
164
165
184
194
165
172
140
177
*Flash point of these materials between
is
37.8OC (1 G O O F ) and 60°C ( 140OF).
Special electrical equipmentis required only if these materialsare stored or
handled abovetheir flash points.
**Flash point of these materialsis between 60°C(14O'F) and 93.3"C
(200°F). Special electrical equipmentis required onlyif these materialsare
stored or handled above their flash points.
climatesareinstalledinheatedshelters.Specifywhere
needed to bring lube-oil in the bearing housing sump up to
theminimumtemperaturerecommendedbythemanufacturer.Specifytheappropriate
details for electric or steam
heaters.
E.7.35 DataonPage
Detectors.
6, Line18,WindingTemperature
E.7.36 Data on Page 6, Lines 19 to 20, RTD Type, No./
Phase,ResistanceMaterial,Ohms:These
detectors are
installed in intimate contact with the winding insulation and
give an accurate measurementof the operating temperature of
thewinding.Theyprovide
better protection for themotor
thancurrent-sensitiveoverloadrelays.Specifyoncritical
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO STD
SYb-ENGL
L777
0732290 0 5 b 7 5 2 0 7Tb
m
API STANDARD 546
90
E.7.43 Data on Page 6, Line 27, Thermocouple: Type: Iron
Constantine type can be specified, for example, wherea thermocouple is desired.
motors regardless of size (should be monitored to prevent
damage to a critical motor) and on all motors 1,500 HP and
larger. Also recommended for all weather protected (WP I
and W P II) motors. Air filters, if installed,canbecome
clogged and cause high winding temperature. See E.7.8 of
this guide. Two detectors should be specified for each phase
of the motor winding. Either 100-ohm platinum or 120-ohm
nickel detectors should be specified, dependingon the monitoring system design.
E.7.44 Data onPage 6 , Line 28, Dial-Type Thermometer,
Alarm Contacts: Only applied to nonpressure-fed bearings.
Specify where an indication of the oil temperatureis desired.
If alarm contacts are requiredfor annunciation, indicate yes,
and the type and number ofcontacts under alarm contacts.
E.7.45 Data on Page 6, Line29,Location:Indicatethe
location of the detectors. For example: Both radial bearings.
E.7.37 DataonPage 6, Line19,3-WlreSystem,2-Wire
System: Always specifya 3-wire systemto minimize temperature errors introduced
by the RTD leads.
E.7.46 Data on Page 6, Line 30, Description:Might
include one detector per bearing for monitoring and
alarm
purposes or two detectors per bearing
if a shutdown systemis
to be used.
E.7.38 Data on Page 6, Line 20, GroundOne Lead: This is
dependent on the purchasers instrumentation requirements.
Typically, one lead is grounded at the motor.
E.7.47 DataonPage 6, Line33,TerminalHeadorBox:
Often, separate terminal heads are supplied and the external
conduit is run to each head. The detector terminations could
also be enclosed in the same terminal box as the winding
RTDs.
E.7.39 Data on Page 6, Line 22, Stator Winding Temperature Alarm and Shutdown: For theaa
l rm, normally add 10°C
plus 40°C for ambient,to the RTD temperatures given in the
table in E.3.2.7 of this guide. This alerts operators to problemsbefore they becomeserious.Forshutdown,normally
enter 155°C.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
E.7.40 Data on Page 6, Line 24, Hydrodynamic or Thrust
be
BearingTemperatureDevices:Thesedetectorsshould
applied consistent with the entire equipment train. They usually are applicable to large (LOO0 HP and greater) and special-purposeequipmenttrains.They
can
provide
early
warning of lube-oil loss or impending bearing failure. API
670 outlines requirements that assure accurate bearing-metal
temperature measurement. When radial temperature detectors
are used for shutdown systems, either resistance temperature
detectors (type100-ohm platinum at 0°C or 120-ohm nickel
at 0°C)or thermocouples (type iron Constantine, for example)
can be specified. Separate terminal heads usually are specified, and the external conduit
is run to each head.
E.7.41 DataonPage 6, Line25,ProvisionsOnly,Manufacturer'sStandard, M I 670 Wherefuturecapabilityfor
installation of sensors or use of sensors during factory tests
is
desired, specify provisions only. A manufacturer's standard
installation may not represent the true bearing metal temperaturesincemotormanufacturersoftenmonitorthebearing
shelltemperature, an inch or morefromtheshaft-bearing
interface. If bearing temperature monitoringis specified, API
670 requirements are recommended since the temperaturesensing tip locationis defined at the most representative place
on the bearing.
E.7.42 Data on Page 6, Line 26, RTD: Type:Specify either
an RTD is
100-ohmplatinum or 120-ohmnickelwhere
desired.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
E.7.48 Data on Page 6, Lines 31 to 32, Set at -"C
for
Alarm, -"C
for Shutdown: Completeas appropriate. Normal alarm temperature is 8OOC. If applicable, normal shutdown temperature is approximately 100°C.
E.7.49
Data on Page 6, Line 35, Vibration Detectors.
E.7.50 Data on Page6,Line36,NoncontactingProbes
Installed, or ProvisionsOnly:Specifyconsistentwith
the
equipmenttrain. This is recommended for criticalmotors
withsleeve or tilting-padbearingsrated
1,200 rpmand
higher. A once-per-revolution probe is included when probes
are specified. This provides a phase reference for filtered
vibration and speed measurements. All motors rated 1,200
rpm and higher should have at least provisions for probes
specified.
E.7.51 Data on Page 6, Line 39, Bearing Housing Seismic
Sensors: Specify consistent with the equipment train. Usually
applied on critical sleeve bearing motors rated less than 1,200
rpm which do not have noncontacting probes andon motors
with antifriction bearingsof all speed ratings.
E.7.52 Data onPage 6, Line 43, Vibration Switch: These
devices are not normally recommendedfor motors of the size
range covered by this specification, since they offer less protection thanA P I 670 or API 678 systems.
E.7.53 Data on Page 6, Line 45, TerminalHead or Box:
Whenever vibration detectors are specified,
a terminal box for
the machine-mounted converters or oscillator-demodulators
should be specified.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D 5"tb-ENGL
b32
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500
E 8 CONTROLS
KVA AND LARGER
91
E.9.5 Data on Page 8, Line 6, Export Boxing Required: A
substantial box is built around the motor in addition to the
sealing and desiccant described above.
E.8.1 Data on Page 7, Lines 2 to 36, Motor Vendor to Furnish:Manufacturer'sStandardExcitationControl,Completely Assembled Panel with Devices as Checked, Separate
E.9.6 Data on Page 8, Line 6, Outdoor Storage for More
Than Six Months: Indicate if this
is to be the case. Special storDevices as Checked: In most cases, specify Manufacturer's
age provisions maybe recommended by the motor supplier.
Standard Excitation Control. In some cases, specify separate
cone01 devices as checked. These devices are then usually
E.9.7 Data on Page 8, Line 7, Special Shipping Bearings:
mounted in space provided in a separately purchased switchThese are specifiedto prevent damage to the normal running
gear or sometimes in a panel provided by the motor vendor,
bearings due to abnormal handling during shipment, such as
as specified.
impact,droppingandrailyardhumping.Normalhandling
Some items which should be considered for each applicaso it can
during shipment does not usually affect the bearings,
tion:
be considered an insurance policy
for motors in which timely
1. Automatic Power Factor Controller, VAR Controller:
start-up is necessary. Shipping bearings alone, however, does
May be desirable for large machines where control
of the
not prevent damage to other parts from this type of abuse.
excitation is desired. For most applications, fixed excitaCritical shipments should include g (acceleration) recorders
tion systems are recommended unless there is a compelto monitor handling.
lingreason to control the reactive power output
of the
E.9.8 Data on Page 8, Line 7, Piping Assembled: Specified
motor.
where
coolers or lube-oil piping are to be suppliedby the
2. Control
Power
Transformer,
Constant
Voltage,
motor
supplier.
kVA,
V-120
V...:
This is recommended for all applications, since the pull-out torque of
E.9.9 Data on Page 8, Line 8, Special Winterizing Requirethe motor decreasesas the square of the main bus voltage, ments: Specified where winterconditions exist prior to startif
not
supplied. Whensupplied,thepull-outtorque
up. This is specified so the motorsupplier can identify protecdecreases directly as the main bus voltage dips. The kVA
tive items.
rating should normally carry Note 4 of the data sheet.
Voltage ratio normally is 240 volts to 120 volts, fed from a E.9.10 Data on Page 8, Line 8, Mounted on Skid: This is
recommended to protect the feet of the motor frame from
switchgear-supplied primary voltage (e.g., 4,160 volts)to
damage.
240 voltcontrolpowertransformer,usuallydedicated
only to the motor excitation.
E.9.11 Data on Page 8, Line 10, Miscellaneous.
Most of the other items of this section would normally be
E.9.12 DataonPage
8, Line11,Weights,Dimensions:
as relays,
supplied as part of the switchgear package (such
Self-Explanatory.
meters, and switches).
E.9.13 Data onPage 8, Line 12, MaxSound Pressure
Level:
The normal specified value is 85 decibels (dBA) at a
E.9 MISCELLANEOUS
distance of 3 feet. This is consistent with OSHA rules so that
E.9.1 Data on Page 8, Lines 2 to 4, Painting: The standard
hearing protectionis not required while the motor is operain
paintingisnormallyacceptedunlessthemotoristobe
tion. Remote, unattended equipment may
notrequire levels as
installed in a severe environment, suchas offshore. If special
low as 85 dBA. Certain rare installations near noise sensitive
paint is specified, include the surface preparation and paint
areas,such as residentialdwellings,mayrequirereduced
specifications withthe quotation request to the manufacturer.
noise levels of80 dBA or 75 &A. Consider the alternative of
Consideration should be givento the painting system used on
accepting manufacturer-standard noise levels and enclosing
the inside surfaces of WaP enclosure.
the entire drive train in a sound enclosure. Consult a
local
safety engineerfor more guidance.
E.9.2 Data on Page 8, Lines 5 to 9, Shipment.
E.9.14 Data on Page 8, Line 13, Quantity of Special Tools
E.9.3 Data on Page 8, Line 6, Domestic: Depending on the
Required: Normally, one setis adequate.
protection inherently offeredby the enclosure, specifying this
includes the protection described inN
I 546 and coverage of
E.9.15 Data on Page 8, Line 14, Proof of Nonsparking,
the motorby a tarpaulinor plastic.
Corrosion-Resistant Fan: Usually only specified for motors
rated for speeds of 1,800 rpm and higher.
E.9.4 DataonPage 8, Line 6, Export: Normally includes
E.9.16 DataonPage 8, Lines 15 to16,Listof
Special
complete, sealed coverage with desiccant. The manufacturer
Low-Temperature
Materials
Requirements:
describes the preparation included when the proposal is preThis section
sented.
applies to operating temperatures less than -29°C (-2OOF). If
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
certain materials to be used in the motor are not covered by
the ASME Code, the requirements are listed here.
E.9.17 Data on Page 8, Lines 17 to 18, List of Parts to be
Identified With Applicable ANSI, ASTM, or ASME Numbers: If certain parts identified by standard designations are
required, listthemhere. This may includeflanges,minor
hardware, shaft material, bearing babbitt alloy, etc.
E.9.18 DataonPage 8, Line 19, Special Identification: If
specialidentification is required for correspondence or on
drawings and data sheets, enter the details here.
E.9.19 Data on Page 8, Line 20 Nameplate Material: Normally, specify stainless steel.
E.9.20 DataonPage
8, Line 21, SpecialNameplatefor
Identification: Ifa special nameplate is needed for identifying
the motor equipment number or other information, detail the
requirements here.
E.9.21 Data on Page 8, Line 22, Outline of Weather Protection: Where weather (winterized) protection is specified by
the purchaser, the details are shown here.
E.9.22 DataonPage
8, Line 22, CommissioningAssistance Required: If there are competent installation engineers
on the project,this is not required.It is normally only required
for unique situations.
E.9.23 Data on Page 8, Line 23, Other: Indicate any other
miscellaneous requirements.
E.10 ANALYSIS, SHOPINSPECTION,
AND TESTS
E.lO.l Data on Page 9, Line 4, Design Audit: The design
audit is a comprehensive review meeting wherethe detailed
electricalandmechanicaldesignsarediscussedandany
electricaUmechanica1 analysesare presented. This is recommended for critical motor/driven-equipment trains, motors
rated at 1,200 rpmandabove,and
for new manufacturer
designs (prototypes). This is nottheorder-coordination
meeting.
E.10.2 DataonPage 9, Line 5, TorsionalAnalysis: This
normally is performed by thedriven-equipmentmanufacturer, but should also be verified by the motor manufacturer
or a third party. The analysis is usually performed only on
drivetrainswithspeed-increasinggearboxestothedriven
equipmentorhighinertialoads.Usuallynotspecifiedfor
direct-driven loads unless the load inertia is high.
It is important to predict where the critical speeds are and
howthe rotor reacts to excitations that can result in lateral
shaft vibration.
E.10.4 Data on Page 9, Line 7, Shop Inspection: If a quality assurance surveillance program is to be imposed, indicate
this. Not recommended if preferred suppliers with continuous
quality improvement track-recordsare used.
E.10.5 Data on Page 9, Line 8, Review of Quality Control
Program: Normally not specified unless the motor manufacturing plant has undergone change
or if recent problems have
been experienced.
E.10.6 Data on Page 9, Line 9, Inspection for Cleanliness
Per API 614: Requires the lube-oil system cleanliness specifications of API 614. Indicate when the specjal-purpose API
614 lube-oil systemis specified for the drive train. This
is also
applied when a motor with a forced-lubrication system has a
This isrecommendedfor
thoroughinspectionprogram.
forced-lubricatedbearingswhere
a thoroughflush ofthe
equipment lube-oil pipingis not to be made at the installation
site.
E.10.7 Data on Page 9, Line 10, Observance of Assembly/
Dismantling: Specify, if the company wishes to reserve the
right to observe the testing, dismantling, inspection,reasand
sembly of equipment. Normally, this should be specified and
most motor suppliersdo not impose a charge for a purchaser
to retain this right.
E.10.8 Data on Page9,Line 12, Stator Core Test:A quality
test for core-plate insulation integrityor damage. Some s u p
pliers do this test during manufacturing, but should only be
specified by the user for unspared or applications where the
motor will be inaccessible for easy repair
or replacement.
E.10.9 Data on Page 9, Line 13, Surge Comparison Test:
This is recommended for all motors. The risk
of not doing the
test is thatmarginalturn-to-turninsulation in thewinding
may not fail during running tests, because of the normally
sub
low turn-to-turn voltages, but may fail in operation when
jected to mild power system surges. This test exposes the
individual coil's insulation systemto higher voltage than normal to prove integrity of the insulation.
E.10.10 Data onPage 9, Line 14, SpecialSurgeTestof
Coils: Not normally specified. Exposes individual test coils to
a series of severe surge tests
to prove the insulation capability.
Consider fora critical motor.
E.10.11 Data on Page 9,Line 15, Balance in Minimum of
E.10.3 DataonPage
9, Line 6, LateralCritical Speed
ThreePlanes:Specify for all motors rated 3,000 rpmand
Analysis: Specify for all motors rated at speeds of 1,500rpm
above. Most motors rated up to 1,800 rpm are not flexible
and higher. This analysis is usually performed by the motor
manufacturer and gives the system critical speeds of the rotor,shaft machines (operating above their first system resonance
or critical speed) and do not require balancing in more than
bearing, bearing support, and foundation system. A critical
speed usually is excited by rotor unbalances or misalignment. two planes.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD*API/PETRO S T D 54b-ENGL
405
æ
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500 KVA AND LARGER
E.10.12 Data on Page 9, Line 16, Final Balance: Not normally specified, but could be done in conjunction other tests
specified for balance of higher-speedmotors.
test results are plottedfor each motor and percent deviation is
calculated.
E.10.20 Data on Page 9, Line 24, Manufacturer’s Standard
Shop and Routine Test: This is recommended for all motors.
of
Includesmeasurementofno-loadcurrent,calculation
locked-rotor current, high-potentialtests, insulation resistance
tests, measurement of winding resistance, vibration measurement, bearing insulation test, measurement of bearing temperature and, inspection of the bearings and oil supply.
E.10.13 Data on Page 9, Line 17, Balance Device (Sensitivity) Test: Specify for all special-purpose rotors. A simple
testfordeterminingthatthesensitivity
ofthebalancing
device is adequate.
E.10.14 Data on Page 9, Line 18, Residual UnbalanceVerification Test (Appendix C):A comprehensive test conducted
to determine the actual amount of unbalance remainingin the
rotor after balancing. The test is recommended for motors
rated 1,500rpm and above.
E.10.21 DataonPage 9, Line25,InsulationTestsUsing
Preferred Table 6 Values: Recommended.
E.10.15 Data on Page 9, Line 19, Balance with Half-Coupling: This is recommended for motors rated 1,500 rpm and
above, where coupling errorsor unbalance can have a significantaffectonthemotoranddrivenequipmentvibration.
Requires coordination with the coupling and driven-equip
ment supplier.
E.10.16 Data on Page9, Line 20, Running Tests with HalfCoupling: This is recommended for all two-pole motors and
for those four-poles operating above
the first rotor-system resonance.
E.10.17 Data on Page9, Line 2 1, Stator Inspection Prior to
Vacuum-Pressure Impregnation: This is a physical inspection
of the iron core of the motor and the winding insulation tap
ing or wrapping.Theinspection
is conductedbeforethe
winding is put through vacuumpressure impregnation (VPI),
which is a procedure to seal and solidify the winding insulation system. This inspection should be specified for critical,
unsparedmotorsor for motorswithvoltageratings6,600
volts and above. Frequently omitted when dealing with manufacturers with which the purchaser has confidence. When
specified it should be witnessed. The cost impact is usually
minimal.
E.10.18 DataonPage 9, Line22,SealedWindingConformance: This test should be specified when verification
a of
sealed windingis desired This test shouldbe as a witness, and
may be applied to critical,speqial-purposemotors.Some
manufacturers do this test as a standard, so therequired
option should be considered. Thecost of this testis based on
the Vendor’s perceivedrisk of failing the test.
E.10.19 DataonPage
9, Line 23, PowerFactorTip-up
Test: Recommended for stator voltages6,600 volts and above
for the completed stator. Provides a base
line for later maintenance tests to detect corona discharge within the insulation
system. Mayalso be specified on sacrificialcoils for development testing, but acceptancecriteria needs to be agreed upon
between the user and supplier. The power factortip up test is
usually conductedat 10 percent and 110percent or 20 percent
and 120 percent of rated line-to-gound power voltage. The
E.10.22 Data on Page 9, Line 26, Bearing Dimensional &
Alignment Checks Before Tests(Per 4.3.2.1, Item i): This is
recommended for all motors. Records
are made of all bearing
fits and clearances. In addition, a bearing disassembly and
inspection is requiredat the completion of the running tests.
E.10.23 Data on Page 9, Line 27, Vibration Recording: For
those motors undergoing comprehensive tests, for example:
Hot/coldvibrationandunbalanced
response; afrequencyan equivalent data
modulatedmagnetictaperecording,or
acquisition system, is recommended. Normally specified for
motors rated 1,500 rpm and greater.
E.10.24 Data on Page 9, Line28,CompleteTest:
This
includes an expensive series of
tests (up to approximately ten
percent of the motor’s cost) that should be specified for at
least one of each motor rating ordered at the same time. It
should also be specified when the evaluation factor justifies
the test costto prove the efficiency.
E.10.25 Data on Page 9, Line 29, Efficiency Test: Specify
for at least one of each rating where
the evaluation factorjustifies the expense. Rule of thumb: when the evaluation factor
exceeds $l,OOOkW. When it is specified, it is recommended
that it be witnessed.
E.10.26 Data on Page 9, Line 30, Locked Rotor: This is
also recommended for oneof each motor rating ordered
at the
same time. Verifies the calculated locked-rotor current, power
factor andtorque,whichcouldbecritical
for applications
where reduced-voltage startingis specified.
E.10.27 Data on Page 9, Line 3 1,OpedShort-CircuitSaturation: Specify when an efficiency testis selected.
E.10.28 Data on Page 9, Line 32, Heat Run: A test to determine the temperature rise of the motor windings and vibration levels with a hot rotor.
E.10.29 Data on Page 9, Line 33, Exciter Heat Run: A test
to determine the temperature rise of the exciter windings.
E.10.30 Data onPage 9, Line34,No-LoadVCurve:
Sometimes difficult for a manufacturer for large machines
that may either generateor absorb significant reactive power.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
93
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
API STANDARD
546
factured ofa certain frame size, or
a uniquely designed motor.
is low dueto the low bearing
The risk of not requiring the test
housing vibration limits required
by API 546, and if the motor
passes the vibration tests, the motor probably does
not have a
significant resonance.
E.10.31 Data on Page 9,Line 35, SoundPressureLevel
Test: Only specify if the motor is to be installed in a noisesensitive area. In many cases, certified data can be accepted
from a motor of duplicate design.
E.10.32 DataonPage
9, Line 36, BearingDimensional
ChecksafterTests(Per
4.3.3.1.2): Additionallyrequires a
dimensional check and examination forany metal transfer at
the completionof tests. It is recommended for all motors.
E.10.37 Data on Page 9, Line 42, Optional Teststo be Proposed by Vendor: Only specify
for special-purpose motors.
This selection requires that the motor supplier propose
to tests
prove the materials are satisfactory for the specified service.
E.10.33 Data on Page 9,Line 37,M= High-Potential Test:
The motor will already have had
a final AC high-potential test
for a one minute duration to prove the insulation
of the motor.
Subsequent high-potential tests in the field will most likely
be
DC tests. If a base-line DC test is desired to compare with
testsinthefield,specifyhere.
This test is performedat
approximately 75 percent of the equivalent final AC highpotential test, so it does relativelylittle damage to the insulation at this stress level.
E.10.38 Data on Page 9,Line 43, Certification of Materials: Specify for special-purpose motors. If it is specified, the
test reports on shafts, forgings, and major castings which are
obtained by themotorsupplierareprovided.Costimpact
should be minimal, since most suppliers obtainthis information on major material.
E.10.34 Data on Page 9, Lines 38 to 39, Rated Rotor Temperature Vibration Test When Complete Test Not Specified:
all two-poleandfour-pole
Thetestisrecommendedfor
motors and critical, special purpose motors of slower-speed
ratings which do not receive the complete test because
of the
susceptibility of some rotors to changing balance condition
with temperature. During this test, the motor is heated to its
rated operating temperature, and
the vibration performanceis
monitored and compared with acceptable limits. Some exceptions can be made for general-purpose motors in noncritical
applications. Thistest is usually witnessed.
E.10.39 Data on Page 10, Line 4, Final Assembly Running
Clearances Kept for 5 Years: Recommend that this be specified for special-purpose motors.
E.10.40 Data on Page 10, Line 5, PaintingDeferred(on
a castParts): The purchaser must list the specific part, as
such
ing, welded shaft, or rotor assembly. Not usually specified.
E.10.41 Data on Page 10, Lines 6 to 11, Surface and Subsurface Inspection of Parts: Only specified
for special-purpose motors.A list mustbe attached that specifies the parts to
be examined and the type of examinations to be done. The
following are typical:
a. Welded shafts-liquid penetrant, magnetic particle, hardE.10.35 DataonPage
9, Line 40, UnbaIanceResponse
ness.
Test: Recommended for all two-pole motors and all four-pole
motors 5,000 HP and larger to verify the motor’s performance b. Forged shafts-ultrasonic inspection.
c. Welded fans-liquid penetrant and magnetidparticle.
operating through its first resonant speed, or toverifythe
location of its resonant speed above operating speed. Often is d. Cast fans-radiography.
e. Bearing babbitt”u1trasonic.
dependent on manufacturing process, so should be done on
every motor unless user’s experience would dictate relaxation Note: Unless an acceptance standard for the forging ultrasonic or the hardof this test, perhaps to one of eachsize purchased at the same ness test is established,the motor supplier is free to establish the standard.
time.
E.10.42 Data on Page 11, Line 12, Certified Data Prior to
Shipment: Not normally specified, but it gives the motor
E.10.36 Data on Page 9, Line 41, Bearing Housing Natural
sup
plier incentive to deliver the reports promptly.
Frequency Test: Normallyspecified for thefirst motor manu-
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
94
S T D - A P I I P E T R O S T D 54b-ENGL 3 9 9 7 W 0732270 05b7525 288 m
APPENDIX F-SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR DATA SHEET GUIDE
easier to rewind in caseof a winding failure. This may not be
practical for generators rated above 7,500 kVA, due to the
high-ampere requirement. Normally
specify
continuous
duty.
The material inthis appendix offers a guide
to the information on the datasheets in Appendix B.
F.l
PURPOSE
This data sheet guide provides instructionsfor completing
the API Synchronous Generator Data Sheet before obtaining
bids. It also contains information to help evaluate data supplied by the Vendor. This data sheet guide presumes the specifying engineer:
F.3.2.4 Data on Page 1, Line 11, Nameplate kVA/kW, Service Factor, Synchronousrpm: Kilovolt-ampere outputof the
generator, where known. This may be entered by the driver
supplier, if the generator and driver are to be purchased as a
package. A service factor of 1.0 is recommended. If output
beyond the 1.0 service factor output rating is required, the
next higher generator rating should be chosen. If a 1.15 service factor is specified, API546 limits the temperature riseto
10°C above theClass B rise to ensure long life when applied
to a Class F winding insulation system. Enter the rated speed
of the generator, where known. Available speeds can be calculated by the following equation:
a. Is familiar withthe process of procuring driver equipment.
If not, the specifying engineer should referto the Specifying
this manual;
and Purchasing Procedure section of
b. Is familiar with the purpose, format and use of &ta sheets.
This guide does not cover all possible applications. The
specifyingengineermustconsiderthespecificinstallation
when filling outthe data sheet.
Speed (rpm) =
F.2 SCOPE
120x f
-
P
The Synchronous Generator Data Sheet covers all synchroWhere:
nous generators rated 500 kW and larger. See the motor data
sheet guide, Appendix E, for synchronous motors.
f =power line frequency in Hz.
The Synchronous Generator Data Sheet is based on API
p = number of magnetic poles in the motor
(2,4,6,8, ...).
546. Paragraph numbers corresponding to API 546 are indicated in parentheseson the data sheet, where applicable.
F.3.2.5 Data on Page1,Line
12, RatedPowerFactor:
Commonly specified power factor ratings are 0.80 and 0.85
F.3 GENERALINFORMATION
(overexcited). The power factor should always be specified,
F.3.1 Data on Page 1, Line 6, Applicable to: Proposal, Pureven if the driversupplier is filling inthe Nameplate kVA and
chase, or As-Built: Check proposal when the data sheet
is sent
Speed.
out for quotation, purchase when an order is placed, and asF.3.2.6 Data on Page 1, Line 12, Insulation Class: This perbuilt to reflect the completed data sheet after all design details
tains
to the winding electrical insulation. Normally specify
and changes duringthe manufacture and testing ofthe generClass F, the standard of the industry (rated for 155°C operaator have been completed.
tion).
F.3.2BASIC DATA
F.3.2.7 DataonPage1,Line
12, VoltageandFrequency
F.3.2.1 DataonPage
1, Line 8, ApplicableStandards:
Variations: Enter voltage and frequency variations if beyond
Indicate which standards apply, either North American or
standard limits.
International.
F.3.2.8 Data on Page 1, Lines 13 to 14, Stator Temperature
F.3.2.2 Data on Page 1, Line 9, Special-Purpose Apply: If
Rise:This is the increase in temRise and Rotor Temperature
the generator is unspared, high-speed (1,500 rpm or higher),
perature of the windings permitted over ambientair temperadriving a gearbox,or is subject to an abnormally hostile enviture.Therearetwomethods
to determine the temperature
ronment, this should be selected and all square bullet pararise: by resistance temperature detector (RTD)andbythe
graphs apply.
measurement of the resistance change (RES), with temperaF.3.2.3 Data on Page 1, Line 10, Volts, Phase, Hertz; Duty: ture, of the winding itself. Use the following table to fill
in the
blank.Temperaturerise byRTD is recommendedwhenthe
Normallyspecifiedgeneratorvoltageratings
are 2,400,
4,160, 6,900, and 13,800 volts for 60 hertz, three-phase
generatorstator is equippedwithRTDs. Ifnotequippedwith
powersystems.If at all possible, specify voltage ratings of RTDs, specify
by resistance (RES). All field winding temper4,160volts or below. The generator is less expensive and
atures aredetermined by resistance.
95
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
'STD.API/PETRO S T D 54b-ENGL L997 D 0732290 0 5 b 7 5 2 b 1LI.l m
API STANDARD
546
96
Stator Winding
All ratings
1,563and
kVA
less and less
Over 1,563 kVA
7,000V and less
Over 7,000V
field Winding
Salient-pole
Cylindrical-rotor
Method
(Above
RES
RTD
Class B Rise
W C Ambient)
8OOC
90°C
RTD
RTD
85°C
RES
RES
80°C
80°C
80°C
The Class B rise given above is specified even though the
insulation system is ratedfor the higherClass F temperature.
This is to assure long insulation life. The cost associated with
losses (life cycle costs-see F.3.5.0) also results in lower than
Class B rise in most cases, since losses result in heat. The
above values are for a maximum ambient air temperature of
40°C. If the maximum ambient temperature is above 40"C,
up to and including50°C reduce the table valuesby 10°C. If
the maximum ambient temperatureis above 5OoC, up to and
including 6O"C, reduce the table valuesby 20°C.
F.3.2.9 DataonPage
1, Line 15, Manufacturer'sType,
Frame Size: Usually completed by the manufacturer, unless
specified by the purchaser.
F.3.2.10 Data on Page 1, Line 17, Min % Overspeed: The
normal minimum percent overspeed is 20 percent for rated
speeds of 1,500 rpm andover,and 25 percentforrated
speeds of 1,499 rpm and below. This is discussed in the API
546 text.
F.3.2.11 Data on Page 1, Line 17, Rotor Wk*/J: Inertia data
for the generator is requested referred to the generator-shaft
Speed.
F.3.3 SITE DATA
F.3.3.1 Data on Page 1, Lines 19 to 20, Area Classification
Class-,
Division-,
Group-,
or Zone-,
Class-,
Groupor Nonclassified:Usethe
Class, Division,and
Group or Zone, Class, Group as defined in Chapter 5 of the
National Electrical Code (NEC). Areas are normally defined
for existing plants or projects. Refer to API Recommended
Practice 500 or the National Electrical Code
(ANSI/N"A
70).
The most commonly Specified
area classification is Class I,
Division 2, Group D for process areas. Class I means a flammable gas or liquid, Division 2 is where the gas or vapor is
present only during abnormal conditions, and Group D is a
category of materials including gasoline. A Division 1 area
means the gas or vapor is present during normal operation
and special enclosures or provisions for ventilation must be
used.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
F.3.3.2 Data onPage1,Line 21, Ignition Temperature, if
Less Than 250°C:If nothing is entered, 250°C is assumed
for
the generany ignitable vaporsor gases that may exist around
ator while it isin service. Some liquids have ignition temperbe listed here. See the
atures lower than 250"C, and must
current editionof ANSVNFPA 497M fora complete listingof
these liquids.
F.3.3.3 Data on Page 1, Line 21, Site Elevation: Significant
if 1,OOO meters (3,300 feet) or moreabovesealevel.
Machines must be derated or specially designed for higher
elevations above this because
of the decreasedair density.
F.3.3.4 Data onPage 1,Line22,AmbientTemperature:
Minimumandmaximumambientairtemperature.Significant, if below -15°C (5°F) or above 40°C(104°F). Low temoil
peratures may determine the need for bearing- housing
heaters or special impact-resistant steel types. High temperatures may determinea derating factor for the generator design
or may dictate a special oil cooling system.
F.3.3.5 DataonPage 1, Line 23, Relative Humidity: Indicates the maximum and minimum humidity.
F.3.3.6 DataonPage 1, Lines24to 2 5 , GeneratorLocaNo
tion:Indoor,TemperatureControlled,Outdoor,Roof,
Roof: Check as appropriate. Affects the selection
of the housing.Forexample:Requiring
a weatherproofhousing. If
Indoor Temperature Controlled, the operating ambient temperature of the generator may be different than the outdoor
temperature.
F.3.3.7 Data on Page 1, Lines 26 to 27, Nonmassive FoundationDescription:Thefoundationshould
be designed to
meet the massive foundationcriteria of 2.4.6.1.2. There may
be certain installations where thisis not possible. such as on
offshore platforms. Detail these structures on the data sheet.
A nonmassive foundation may affect the mechanical dynamic
performance of the generator. Refer to the description of a
massive foundationin AF'I 546.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Generator Rating or pillt
F.3.4
UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
F.3.4.1 Data on Page 1, Line 29, Dust: If abrasive dust conditions
are
specified,
winding
insulation
protection
is
required for drip proof or weather-protected enclosures. This
treatment usually reduces the air-cooling effectiveness and
raises the winding temperature above that without the treatment, resultingin a larger and more costly generator. Specify
any other dust conditions here, such
as adhering dust or corrosive dust. See the descriptions of Weather Protected Type
I
and II enclosures.
F.3.4.2 Data on Page 1, Line 29, Chemicals: If the generator is subject to any specific chemicals, vapors, or liquids,
specify what those chemicals are.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
S T D - A P I / P E T R O STD Sqb-ENGL L777 m 0732270 05b7527 050
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-400 KVA AND LARGER
F.3.4.3 DataonPage 1, Line 30, Seismic Loading: If the
generator has significant ducting or unsupported piping (not
recommended), indicate the maximum forces to whichthe
frame will be exposed. For example: Uniform Building Code
Seismic Zone2.
F.3.4.4 Data on Page 1, Line 30, Corrosive Agents:Include
environmental exposure that could result in stress-corrosion
cracking. This may include salt air or trace hydrogen-sulfide.
F.3.4.5 Data on Page 1, Line 3 1, Other: Indicate any other
or tropical
unusualconditions.Forexample:Hosedown
environment.
F.3.5
ENCLOSURE
F.3.5.1 DataonPage1,Line
33, Explosion-Proof:Not
often usedfor this type of machine.
F.3.5.2 DataonPage
1, Line 33, Totally-EnclosedFanCooled (TEFC): A construction wherefree exchange of air is
prevented between the inside and outside of the generator.
The generator is cooled
by a shaft-mounted fan external the
to
main frameor enclosure thatforces air past the outsideof the
frame. Only available in the smaller ratings covered by this
specification, normally less than about750 kVA. This is recommended for severe environments.An alternative for larger
sizesistheTotallyEnclosed
Air-to-Air Cooled(TEAAC)
type. See below.
F.3.5.3 Data on Page 1, Line 33, Open-Drip-Proof (ODP):
Theminimumprotectionnormallyspecifiedforanindoor
This is not recommendedfor outenvironment with clean air.
door service.
F.3.5.4 Data on Page 1, Line 34, Weather Protected; TypeI,
Type II: This is the most common enclosure used. Air from
outside the generator is passed through
its interior for cooling
active parts. Use the Weather Protected Type II (W II) for
most outdoor applications. TheWP II machine is constructed
so that high-velocityair and dirt ingested by the generator can
be discharged withoutentering the internalair passages to the
electricpartsof the generator.UsetheWeatherProtected
Type I (WF’ I) for sheltered locations that may be subject to
some weather intrusionor water spray. The WP II and WP I
enclosures may not be an appropriate choice where adhering
dust is present or if the area does not have free air exchange.
The hot air discharged from
the generator can cause a closedin area to become unbearably hot.
F.3.5.5 DataonPage
1, Line 35, Totally-EnclosedPipeVentilated (TEPV): Thereis no free exchange of air between
the inside of the generator and
the air immediately outside the
generator enclosure. Used where the generator is located in
very dirty locations or if the generator is installed in a Division 1 hazardous (classified) location. Requires air inlet and
97
outlet ducts to duct air to and from the generator, inlet air filters and usually inletair blowers.
F.3.5.6 Data on Page 1, Line 35, Totally-EnclosedWaterAir-Cooled(TEWAC):Useinenvironmentswithadhering
dust or dirt, where it is desired to remove the generator-loss
heat from a building,or if the generator is critical and none
of
theothertotally-enclosedconstructions
are applicable.A
1 GPM for each
source of cooling water is needed, usually
kilowatt of generator loss [(PF x kVA x (1.O - efficiency 90/
lOO)]. The material chosen for the cooler usually is
90/10,
copper/nickel.
Single-tube cooler constructionusually is specifiedwith
drip trays and leak detectors within the generator.Single tube
means that the generator cooling air is in direct contact with
the finned tube through which cooling water flows. When a
water leak occurs, the generator must be shut down.
Double-tube cooler construction is warranted for nonspared service. Double tube means that every tube through
whichwaterflowsisenclosedwithinasecondtube.The
clearance between the tubes is small and empties
into a separate header. If a water leak should develop in an inner tube,
the leak is enclosed in the second, outer tube and collects in
theheader. Thisheaderusuallyisequippedwithawater
detector and will trigger an alarm circuit. Both sets of tubes
areratedfor the operatingwaterpressure, so noleakage
occurs in theair path used for the generatorcooling. The generator can continue to operate until a shutdown can be scheduled to repairthe cooler.
A water flow switch and/or air outlet temperature resistance temperature detector (RTD)is recommended to alarm a
loss ofcooling water.
F.3.5.7 Data on Page 1, Line 36, Totally-Enclosed Air-toAir Cooled (TEAAC): Similar in function to the TEFC type.
Has an air-to-air heat exchanger, usually mounted on the top
of the generator, to remove heat from the internal air of the
generator by blowing outside air through the exchanger tubes.
Usefor locations withsevereenvironmentsnotinvolving
adhering dust. Choose the heat exchanger material based on
what is most compatible with air contaminants. Copper-free
aluminum is less expensive than stainless steel and is often
considered for offshore platforms.
F.3.5.8 Data on Page 1, Line 38, Stainless Steel Fasteners:
Recommended for corrosiveenvironments.Commonzincplated steel fasteners will corrode and make machine disassemblyand maintenancedifficult.Stainless steel fasteners
may cost more, depending on the machine size and the generator manufacturer’s pricing policy.
F.3.5.9 DataonPage1,Line
38, Provision for Purging:
Maybe specified to preventthegeneratorfromingesting
external, ambient airas it cools from operating temperature
or
when it is at rest.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
m
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
API STANDARD
546
98
F.3.5.10 Dataon Page 1, Line 39, Other: May include
other NEMA or international (enclosure and cooling system
designations per IEC and NEMA)enclosure designations. It
could also designateuse of a Dust-ignition-proof (DIP)
generator for Class II (explosive dust) environments. The
DIP generator is totally enclosed and is constructed so that
dust does not enter the enclosure. It also prevents heat or
sparks inside the enclosure from causing ignition outside
the generator.
For the use of enclosures in Classified areas, see NFF'A-70
Section 500 or IEC-79.
F.3.6
MOUNTING
F.3.6.1 Data on Page 2, Line 3, Foot Mounted: Specify foot
mounted for most applications.
F.3.6.2 Data on Page 2, Line 4, Engine Type, Bearings Furnished By -; Shaft FurnishedBy -: An engine type generator is typically slow speed and shares at least one of its
bearings with the driver engine. Typically indicate that the
driver supplieris tosupply the bearings and
the shaft.
F.3.6.3 Data on Page 2, Line 6, Baseplate Furnished By: If
a baseplate is furnished,it usually is by the driven-equipment
supplier as partof a package. Most generators have soleplates. See below.
F.3.6.4 Dataon Page 2, Line 6, SoleplateFurnished By:
Soleplates are steel plates embeddedinto a concrete foundation onto which the generator is mounted. They are normally
furnished by the generator supplier for installation
by the purchaser.
F.3.6.5 Data
on
Page
2, Line 7, Axial
Stator
Shift
Required: Many synchronous generators have their bearings
mountedontobearingbracketsattachedtothegenerator
frame, so axialstatorshift isnot required.Axial shift is
required when the generator frame must
be shifted in order to
remove the rotor. It usually applies to enginetype generators
with only a non-drive-end bearing where the drive-end bearing is integral with the driven equipment.If the generator is to
be supplied through a driver vendor, andyou are unsure of a
response, indicatea Note on the data sheet for the driver vendor to complete this.
F.3.6.6 Data on Page 2, Line 7, Epoxy Grout to be Used:
Requiredwherever a soleplateisspecified.
This assures
proper adhesionof the grout to the soleplate.
F.3.6.7 DataonPage 2, Line 8, SpecialConnectionsfor
Field Piping:Where non-standard piping connections willbe
used for any water or lube-oil connections, indicate here.
F.3.7
ELECTRIC SYSTEM CONDITIONS
F.3.7.1 Data onPage 2, Line 12, PrimaryPower-Volts,
Phase, Hertz: Indicate the nominal voltage, the number
of
phases,andthepowerfrequency
of theelectricalsystem
where the generator will
be connected.
F.3.7.2 Data onPage 2, Line 13, ShortCircuit MVA at
Generator Bus (at- k v Base), WR Ratio: Record the maximum short-circuit contribution andX/R ratio from the power
system with contribution from all sources. This reflects the
capacity of the utility company or the generation system and
is used to calculate the bursting pressure of the terminal box
for an internal terminal box short circuit.
F.3.7.3 Data on
Page
2, Line 14, Method of
System
Grounding, Maximum Ground Fault Amperes: Specify how
the power system source to the generator is to be grounded.
Most applications are either low-resistance grounded (50 to
400 amperes) or high-resistance grounded(10 amperes maximum). Some systems have delta connected transformers at
their source with no intentional connection to ground and are
ungrounded. The methodof grounding affects the voltage rating of surge arresters applied to the generator.
F.3.7.4 Data on Page 2, Line 15, Other: This may include
details on the electric power system such as line reclosure
duringsystemshortcircuitswhichcouldaffectwinding
mechanical bracing and the shaft design.
F.3.7.5 DataonPage 2, Line 16, ParallelOperationwith
Existing Equipment, Define: Where the unit willbe in paralare
lel with other generators on the system, define where they
on the system (one-line diagram), the type
of driver, governor,
voltage regulator, and generator.
F.3.8
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
F.3.8.1 Data on Page 2, Line 19, Special
Vibration
Requirements: For critical equipment (e.g.: unspared, high
inertia load,high speed, or other sensitive applications) lower
vibration limitsmay be specified.
F.3.8.2 Data on Page 2, Line 20, EvaluationFactor:See
below to determine the $kilowatt to be used for the evaluation of bids based on quoted efficiency. Shouldbe completed
for all generators.
Generators shouldbe purchased on the basis of Life Cycle
Cost &CC). LCC is the purchase priceof the generator plus
the value of losses over the life of the generator using the
evaluation factor(EF) and EvaluatedLoss ( W e )shown.
LCC=P+EFxKwe
F.3.6.8 DataonPage
2, Line 9, WhenRotorDynamic
Where:
Analysis is Specified, List of Foundation Data Required from
P
Purchaser: The generator supplier must specifically request
EF
the data required so they can perform the analysis.
= purchase price of the generator in dollars.
= evaluation factor($/kW) = C X N X PWF.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
"
STD.API/PETRO STI) Sqb-ENGL L797 m 0732290 05b7527 9 2 3 m
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS
MACHI
= energy
cost
in
$kWh (dollars per kilowatt-
F.4.9 Data on Page2,Line 33, Manufacturer's Standard,
MI 671:Inmostapplications,themanufacturerstandard
coupling is adequate.Forunsparedservice or applications
3,000 rpm and ,pater, consider the special-purpose API671
coupling. If an API 671 coupling is specified, an
M I 671 data
sheet accompanies the proposal.
hour).
N
= operatingtimeinhoursperyear.
PWF = cumulativepresentworth
factor (thisfactor
typically ranges from 2 to 4 for the purpose of
bid valuations).
kWe = evaluated loss in (kW).
kWe = LxkWrx [(lOO/Eop)- 11
L
= load factor = (output kW)/(generatornameplate kWr).
kWr = generatornameplatekilowatts.
Eo, = motorefficiency(in
'%) atthespecified
kVA
and power factor load.
F.4.10 Data on Page 2, Line 34, Taper Fit, Cylindrical Fit,
Flange: The most common type is the cylindrical fit type with
a keyway, but the taper fit offers advantagesfor removal during maintenance.A flange type is most commonly appliedon
high-speed (3,000 rpm and greater) generators.
F.4.11 Data on Page 2, Lines 35to 36, Coupling Wk2:Data
required for electricalandmechanicaltransientandrotordynamic analyses.
F.3.8.3 DataonPage
2, Line 21, Federal, State, Local
Codes, or Special Rules: List and supplycopies of any local,
special codes. The copies are required by the API 546 paragraph.Forexample:SouthernCaliforniainstallations
frequently call for special electrical codes.
F.4.12 Data onPage 2, Line 37, Supplied By: Most often,
the driver supplier provides the coupling, unless the purchaser
is coordinating the interfaces between equipment.
F.3.8.4 DataonPage
2, Lines 22 to23, AnyExternal
Forces on Generator Housing That May Affect Site Perforor any auxilmance: Indicate any forces from piping, ducting,
iaryequipmentnotprovidedbythegeneratorsupplier.
Typically, these loads are insignificant when these items are
properly supported.
F.4 DRIVER INFORMATlON
F.4.1 DataonPage 2, Line25,PrimeMoverEquipment
Item/Tag No: Enter identification number of driver.
F.4.2 Data on Page 2, Lines 26 to 27, Furnish Performance
Curves; Calculated Efficiency: Usually provided for information.
F.4.3 Data on Page 2, Line 28, Direct Connected: Check, if
the generator is directly coupled (at the same speed) to the
dnver (i.e., not coupled throughgears, etc.).
F.4.4 Data on Page 2, Line 29, Speed Increasing-Reducing
Gear: Check, if applicable. List the ratio of speed-increasing
or speed-decreasing gearboxes below.
F.4.13 DataonPage 2, Line 38, MountedBy:Generator
Manufacturer,DrivenEquipmentManufacturer,Purchaser:
Most generators ordered through a driven-equipment manufacturerhavetheircoupling-mountedbythemanufacturer.
Generators rated 1,500 rpm and greater usually undergo a
rotor dynamics test and requires that the coupling
be mounted
by the generator manufacturer. Coordination
is required at the
time of order entry to assure the coupling half, with its idling
adapter which allows the generator to be run uncoupled, is
properlycoordinated.Forexample:Thecoordinationmay
involvespecialtapped-holepatternson
the idler platefor
adaptation to a balancing machine drive.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
C
F.5 GENERATOR DATA
F 5 1 Data on Page 2, Line 40, Rotation Required by Driver
When Facing Generator Non Driven End:Indicate the direction of rotation as viewed from the exciter end (the outboard
end) of the generator. Indicate either clockwise or counterclockwise.
F.4.5 Data on Page 2, Line 30, Gear Wk? If known, enter
F 5 2 Data on Page 2, Lines 41 to 43, Rotor Construction:
the inertia of the gear at a specified r/min, usually the generaThetype of rotor construction is dependent somewhat on
tor speed.
speed. Solid cylindrical construction
is usually limitedto t w ~ .
pole speed. Laminatedcylindricalconstruction
is applied
F.4.6 Data onPage 2, Line 31, Driver W*:
List thetotal
mostly at four-, six- or eight-pole speeds. Salient-pole star
inertia including all parts suchas couplings, gears, and driver
punching designs are the least costly construction for fourrotors. These usually are referenced
to the generator speed.
pole speed and slower, but may have manufacturing related
F.4.7 DataonPage 2 , Line 32, TypeofCoupling:Enter
challenges on attaining proper shrink fit and thermally stable
gear,diaphra,p,resilient,etc.,
as appropriate.Includethe
vibrationcharacteristics.Salient-poledovetail
or T-tail
coupling manufacturer andcatalog number. Usually supplied
attachment to the shaft is the most common construction for
by the driver supplier.
four polespeedandslower.Other
types of construction
include solid-pole (from a forging integral with the
shaft) and
F.4.8 Data on Page 2, Line 33, Manufacturer, Model: Indisolid-pole,bolted pole tip.
cate any preferences.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
F.5.3 Data on Page 3, Lines 2 to 6, Calculated Expected
Data: Amperes, Power Factor Efficiency: General information for use in system designor evaluation.
F.6 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
F.6.1 Data on Page 4,Line13,Pressureor
Flood Lube:
Indicate if a pressurized lubeor flood lube system is required.
This is recommended for all generators rated above approximately 1,500 kVA.
F.5.4 Data on Page 3, Line 7,Guaranteed Efficiency atPF and
Load: This is the efficiency to use when applying the evaluation of life-cycle cost. Complete the power facF.6.2 Data on Page 4, Line14,PerAPI
614, Manufactor and load desired for economic evaluation. See Section
turer's
Standard:
API
614
is
a
comprehensive,'
special-purF. l. 1.35 ofthis guide.
pose lubrication system specification necessary for specialpurpose applicationsor those type of bearings that cannotbe
F.5.5 Data on Page3,Line
9, RatedGeneratorField:
supplied with backup oil rings. Usually, this type of system
Amps, Volts: The voltage and currentof the main rotor field
would accompany a compressor and could be common for
of the generator under rated conditions (voltage, kVA,and
boththegeneratoranddriven-equipment.
If themanufacpower factor).
turer'sstandardlubricationsystem
is desired,selectthat
F.5.6 Data on Page 3, Line 10, Rated Exciter Field Amps,
option.
Volts: All brushless exciters have a stationary pilot field for
F.6.3 Data on Page 4, Lines 14 to 16, Common with Driven
generating voltage on the rotating exciter. These values are
Equipment,Bearing OilRequirements,HeatLoss
to be
for that field, which typically
is suppIied froma voltage reguRemoved:Whenthedriven-equipmenthas
a pressurizedlation device.
lubricationsystem,thegeneratortypically
is fedfromthe
F.5.7 DataonPage 3, Lines 12 to 44, Generator Parameis for selecting sucha system, desigsame system. This space
ters:These are the reactances, resistances, and time constants nating its supplier, the lubricating oil type, quantity
of oil, and
that are used as inputs for power system studies. Check indi- the supply pressure.
An oil systemis typically suppliedby the
vidual stability p r o m s to determineif the nomenclature is
driven-equipment supplier. The typical oil for
a common sysconsistent orif additional constantsare required.
tem is IS0 Grade 32. The oil system pressure is typically 15
to 25 psig.
F.5.8 Data on Page4,Line46,BearingType
Required
this sizeand type of
Normallycheckhydrodynamic.For
F.6.4 Data on Page4,Lines18to
21, MainOilPump
motor, the hydrodynamic (oil-film) type bearing
is most suitRequired, Standby Oil Pump Required:
If an M I 614 system
(ballholler) type
able. This contrastswiththeantifriction
is supplied, or if backup oil rings are supplied, a main oil
bearing.
pump driven by the generator shaft is not required. A P I 614
usuallyrecommends a primaryandstandbypumpwhich
F.5.9 Data
on
Page
4,
Line 46, Bearing
Oil
Rings
must be designated on the A P I 614 Data Sheet. A standby
Required:Normallyselected.Theseringsrotatewiththe
pump normallyis specified for those generators with API 614
shaft to lift oil from a sump onto the shaft journal. The rings
systems, butnotif the generator has oil rings for backup
provide all the required lubrication for the bearing
on smaller
lubrication during emergency conditions.
generators and emergency backup or rundown capability for
the larger sizes. For larger-sized generators
or certain typesof
F.6.5 Data on Page 4, Line 24, Filter Element: If there is a
bearings (tilting-pad-journal), oil rings cannot be applied.
preference for a specific typeof filter in an M I 614 system,
complete this section.
F.5.1 O Data on Page 4, Line 2, Thrust Bearings, Maximum
Connected-Equipment Thrust: Usually leave blank. ApplicaF.6.6 Data on Page 4, Lines 25 to 26, Duplex Oil Filters
ble only to a generator with a vertically oriented shaft. The
Required, Oil Cooler Required:If a generator cannotbe shut
driven-equipment supplier would normallyenter this data for
down to change an oil filter on an A P I 614 system, duplex filvertical generators.
ters are recommended. Theuse of duplex filters witha switch
valve permits on-line oil filter changes. If is
there
a preference
F511 Data on Page 4, Lines 3 to 11, Bearings: These are
for an oil cooler type, specify water-cooled, shell and tube,
or
the bearing design details that are completed
by the generator
air-cooled, as appropriate.
manufacturer. All information should be consistent with any
lateralcriticalspeedanalysisandmanufacturingmeasureF.6.7 Data on Page4,Line 28, BearingHousingHeaters
ments.
Required: Not required very often, because most generators
in extremely cold climatesare installed in heated shelters.
F512 Dataon Page4,Line11,Special
Seals for Gas
Purge: Specify for generators that will operatein severe dust
F.6.8 Data on Page4,Line29,BearingConstant-Level
or dirt environments. A clean, dry air (or other gas source)
Sight Feed Oilers Required: Specify where the generator has
must be available.
self-lubricated bearings.
-
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
F.6.9 DataonPage 4, Line 30, OilMist for Antifriction
Bearings: Where antifriction (ball or roller) bearings are utilized, this alternate method of lubrication is not often used,
and is userlapplication specific.
F.7 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
F.7.1TEWACHEATEXCHANGER
F.7.1.1 DataonPage 4, Line 34, ExchangerLocation:If
there is a preference for the cooler mounting location (above
or below the generator),it is indicated here. Not all generator
suppliers have much flexibility intlus area because of design
constraints. Single-tube coolers below the generator
are functionally equivalent to double-tube coolers positioned above
the generator if proper attention
is given to the baffling of the
interior air paths.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
F.7.1.2 Data on Page 4, Line 36, Cooling Water Conditions
Per 2.4.1.2.4, Item a?: This section of API 546 lists typical
cooling water system characteristics, which are appropriate
for most applications. This list is reproduced below. If there
are significant differencesin any items, note here.
F.7.1.3 Data on Page 4, Line 38, Tube Material: Normally
indicates 90/10, copperhickel as the material, unless another
material is moresuitable for the plant's cooling water characteristics.
F.7.1.4 Data on Page 4, Line 39, Tube Construction: Double Tube, Single Tube: Double-tube construction is recommendedfornonsparedapplications,
single tube for others.
See F.3.30 of this guide for a discussion of Totally-Enclosed
Water-Air-Cooled (TEWAC) constructions.
F.7.1.5 Data on Page 4, Line 40, Air Temperature Sensor
Required:Sensesthetemperatureofthe
air outletofthe
cooler. A water flow switch or an air temperature sensor is
recommended for alarm purposes in case of cooling water
interruption.
Velocity
over
heat
exchange
surfaces
Maximum
allowable
working
pressure
Testpressure(minimum of 1.5 timesthe
maximum allowableworhng pressure)
Maximum
drop
pressure
32°C
temperature
inlet
Maximum
temperature
outlet
Maximum
rise
temperature
Maximum
rise
temperature
Minimum
Fouling
factor
on side
water
15 psig
90°F
49°C
17OC
1200F
30°F
11°C
20°F
0.35
m2xK/kW
0.002 hr-ft*
OF/Btu
F.7.2AIR
FILTERS
F.7.2.1 Data on Pages 4 and 5, Lines 46 to 47 and 2 to 7,
Air Filters: Filter provisions (mounting hardware) are provided as standard on WP II enclosures, but should be specified for WP I and TEPV, unless the TEPV generator has a
separate filtered airsupply. The cost of filter provisions is low.
Specify filters (manufacturer and type)
for dirty or dusty environments, but keep in mind that either an air-filter differenbe
tial-pressure switch or winding temperature detectors must
wired to alarm operators when the filters become clogged.
be specified,
The type of differential-pressure switch must
typically a Dwyer Switch. When filters are specified, order a
ones in the genset of sparesso they can be exchanged for the
erator and cleaned.
F.7.3
MAIN CONDUIT BOX SIZED FOR:
F.7.3.1 DataonPage 5 , Line 6, MainLeads:Conductor
Size, Type,Insulation,QuantityPerPhase:Forthe
cables
from the generator circuit breaker to the generator, indicate
the conductor size: Type [MC (metal-clad), TC (tray-cable),
or MV (medium-voltage) cable]; Insulation [EPR (ethylene
propylene rubber)or XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene)], and
the number of conductors per phase.
F.7.3.2 Data on Page 5, Line 7, Enter From: Top, Bottom,
Side: Indicate the position of the main power conductor entry.
This depends on the physical configuration of the cabldconduit system.
F.7.3.4 Data on Page 5 , Line 9, Terminations and Interior
Jumpers:
Insulated,
Uninsulated:
Although
maintenance
checksaremademoredifficult,insulatedterminations
are
more secure and are recommended. Adhereto local practice.
-
F.7.1.6 Data on Page 4, Line41, Flow Sensor Local Indicator Required: All TEWAC applications requirealowflow
sensing device. When this item is specified, an indicator of
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
F.7.1.7 Data on Page 4, Line 42, Leak Detector Required:
Type: This is recommended as a damage-prevention device
for all TEWAC motors. A conductive type is recommended.
An alternativeisafloat-typeofdetector,buttheseoften
become inoperative withtime.
F.7.3.3 Data on Page 5 , Line 8, Both Ends of Stator Whding Brought Out to Terminal Box: This is required when differentialcurrentprotectionis
applied. Italsofacilitates
insulation testing on individual phases and should usually be
specified.
1.5-2.5 m / s 5-8 W S
25 bar (ga) 175 psig
27.9 bar (ga) 21 15 psig
1 bar
water flow rate (local to the generator)
is required. This is recommended for TEWAC applicationsto assist operators.
F.7.3.5 Data on Page 5, Line 10, Surge Capacitors: This is
recommended
for
critical
generators, those
connected
or
through one transformeror directly to a bare overhead line,
thosewhichhaveswitchedcapacitorsonthesamevoltage
level. Under these conditions, recommended for each generator individually. Specify0.5 microfarad for generator voltage
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
.STD*API/PETRO STD 5Yb-ENGL
102
API STANDARD 546
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ratings through 4,160 volts and 0.25 microfarad for ratings
6,900 volts and above. Type of switching device can
be a
be considered.
source of surges, and should
F.73.10 Data on Page5, Line 23, Bushing Studs or Receptacles: Rarely specified. Used where
a fast change of generatorsisnecessary in the event of failure. Specify studs or
receptacles.
F.7.3.6 Data on Page 5, Line 12, Surge Arresters:These are
recommended for the same conditions given for surge capaci- F.7.3.11 Data on Page 5, Line 24, Space for Stress Cones:
tors. For those generators connected to a bare overhead line
If shieldedconductorsareused,specifythelengthofthe
through at least one transformer (protected
on its primary
cable termination.
with arresters), one set of surge arresters appliedon the main
F.7.3.12 Data on Page 5, Line 25, Space Heaters: These are
switchgear to protecta group of generators is adequate. Specusually
specifiedas 120- or 240-volt single phase, becauseof
ify 2.7-kv rated arrestersfor 2.4-kV rated generators, 4.5 kv
their
typical
low power requirement. The terminal box heater
for 4.16-kv generators, 7.5 k v for or 6.9-kv generators, and
element
surface
temperature limits are the same as for the
15.0-kv for 13.8-kv generators. MOV type arresters shallbe
main
machine
space heaters.
used for Classified areas.
F.7.3.13 Data on Page 5, Line 27, Thermal Insulation:This
F.7.3.7 Data on Page 5 , Line 14, Current Transformer for:
is recommended for generators with large terminal boxes that
Ammeter.: If a single current transformer is needed
for loadenclose surge protection and instrument transformers in locacurrentindicationlocal to thegenerator,specifythetype
tions where moisture condensation on cool metal surfaces is
(usually a window type) quantity, and ratiowith a maximum
common.
Terminalbox space heaters are recommended.
current rating of 150 percent of the rated-load current of the
generator. An accuracy class of C20 is usuallyadequate.
F.7.3.14 Data on Page 5 , Line 28, Breathers: These should
Refer to the particular ammeter or device specifications. An
be specifiedforsmaller,non-space-heatedterminalboxes;
alternative is touse a currenttransducermountedinthe
usually combined with drains.
switchgear wired to an ammeter mounted at the generator.
Current transformers for reactive power (var) or power factor F.7.3.15 Data onPage 5, Line 28, DrainHoles:These
should be included for all smaller, non-space heated terminal
control can also be specified here. Indicate who is to mount
boxes to allow drainageof condensation.
the current transformers (Le., generator supplier, purchaser,
panel manufacturer, etc.).
F.7.3.16 DataonPage 5 , Line 28, Provision for Purging:
F.7.3.8 Data on Page 5, Line 17, Current Transformers for
Purging is requiredby the NEC for non-explosjon proof terDifferential Protection: This is recommended for critical or
minal boxes containing surge arresters when the generator is
special-purpose generators,or all generators rated1,500 kVA
installed in a Class I, Division 1 area. Specify when aplicaand larger. Appropriate protective relays must
be provided in
ble. Refer to NEC Section501-17.
the generator starter or switchgear. Three core-balance (winF.7.3.17 Data on Page 5 , Line 29, Removable Links: This
dow type), current transformersare the most common. Specis
recommended for generators with larger terminal boxes to
ify the particular type, for example: Westinghouse BYZ; or
permit
isolationofeachphase
of thegeneratorfromthe
the current transformer accuracyclass. A C 10 accuracy class
This permits mainteincoming
cable
and
surge
protection.
is usually adequate, but C 20 may be required depending on
nance
high-potential
or
insulation
tests
to
be done without
the protective relay type. Recommend a C 10 accuracy class
untaping
and
disconnection
of
devices
in
order
to isolate the
and a ratio of 50 to 5 (505) for most applications. Bar-type
generator
windings.
current transformers (three) are only applied for very high
continuous current ratings, and are specified with appropriF.7.3.18 Data on Page 5, Line 29, Silver-Plated Bus Joints:
ately high ratios and accuracy classes to matcha set of three
This is recommended for all applications. Cost
is low and
current transformers in the supply switchgear. If either the
increases the integrityof electrical contact areas.
core-balance or bar-type current transformers specified, indiF.7.3.19 DataonPage 5, Line 30, FaultWithstand:The
cate whether they will be supplied by the purchaser (or the
extreme
temperature of an arcing fault within a sheet metal
switchgear vendor)or if the generator manufacturer
is to sup
air pressure that causes
terminal
box
can result in internal
ply them.
latched or bolted covers to blowoff during a fault. Indicateif
F.7.3.9 Data on Page 5, Line 22, Potential Transformer for:
you wish for the box to be designed to relieve the pressure
Voltmeter: Potential transformers are frequently supplied for
through the useof a pressure rupture discor through a reducgenerators. If they are required, include detailson who is to
(to ground fault levels) by
tionofthepossiblefaultlevel
mount them, the quantity, the ratio, and the accuracy class.
phase segregation.
Specify if fuses are required. If the area is classified, most
applications of fuses within the terminal box necessitate purg- F.7.3.20 DataonPage 5, Line 30, GroundBus:Usually
specified for large terminalboxeswhichcontainaccessory
ing the terminal box.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
STD.API/PETRO STD 59b-ENGL L977
,
m
0732290 0 5 b 7 5 3 3 354
m
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINEMOO KVA AND LARGER
103
I
equipment such as surge capacitors, arresters, or stress cones
to be grounded.
F.7.3.21
Page on Data
Requirements:
Specify
any
required.
Material
5, Line 31,
Terminal
BoxOther
other terminal
box
features
Hydnzine
lsoprene
Iso-octyl Aldehyde*
Kerosene *
Methyl Formal
Monomethyl Hydrazine
Nonane
F.7.3.22 DataonPage
5, Lines 33 to36, StatorExciter
Space Heaters: All generatorstator and exciter compartments
should include space heaters. Specify 120- or 240-volt, single-phase or 208- or 480-volt, three-phase power, depending
onwhatpowersourceisavailablewiththegenerator
shut
down.Three-phasepower for thespaceheatersusually
is
needed onlyfor generators over about5000 kVA.
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
F.7.3.23 Data on Page 5, Line 35, Maximum Sheath Temperature: is the maximum temperature permitted at the surfaceoftheheaterelement,whichcouldbeasourceof
ignition in an explosive atmosphere if the elementis too hot.
For Class I (gas or vapor) locations, specify a maximum temperature of the lesser of200°C or 80 percent of theauto ignition temperature from NFPA 497M for the specific gas or
vaporinvolved.Listedbelowarethoseliquidsrequiring
heater elements with a surface temperatureless
ofthan 200°C
(from the 1986 edition of NFPA 497M). For Class II (dust)
locations, specify 200°C for GroupE, 150°C for Group F, or
120°C for Group G.
F.7.3.24 Data on Page 5, Line 36, Sheath Material: Various
materialssuch as silicon-rubber,stainlesssteel,moneland
aluminum are available. Normally specified to be the manufacturer's standard.
The followingchart is a listof liquids with an autoignition
temperature ( A I T ) of less than 250"C, requiring space heaters
withheaterelementsurfacetemperaturelessthan200°C
(extracted from NFPA 497M-1986).
80%
Group
Material
140
175
Acetaldehyde
Acrolein (inhibited)
n-Butyraldehyde
Cyclohexane
Cyclohexene
Cyclohexanone *
Decene *
Diethyl Ether
Diethylene Glycol MonobutylEther **
Diethyl Glycol Monomethyl Ether**
Dimethyl Sulfate **
1 ,CDioxane
Dipentene *
Ethylene Glycol Monobutyl
Ether
190
238**
Ethylene Glycol Monoethyl
Ether
188
235*
2-Ethyl Hexanol **
2-Ethylhexaldehyde *
Fuel Oils *
Heptane
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
C
B(C)
188
C
D
D
D
188
D
C
C
C
150
D
C
189
D
C
C
D
C
D
D
235
218
245
244
245
235
160
228
24 1
188
180
237
23 1
191
210-407
204
174
1%
195
I96
128
182
192
144
184
152
168
163
197
238
194
Octane
Octene
Pentane
Ropionaldehyde
n-Propyl Ether
Propyl Nitrate
Valeraldehyde
AITT
D
225
245
I80
D
220
I 76
157
I68
190
155
164
165
I84
I94
165
172
140
171
196
D
230-270 C
*
207
222
80%
AITOC
Group
C
D
C
C
D
D
D
D
C
C
B
C
210
205
206
230
243
215
175
is between 37.8OC (IOOOF) and 60°C(140OF).
*Flash point of these materials
Special electrical equipmentis required onlyif these materialsare stored or
handled abovetheir flash points.
**Flash pointof these materials is between 60°C
(140OF)and 93.3T
(2OOOF). Special electrical equipment is requiredonly if these materialsare
stored or handled abovetheir flash points.
F.7.3.25 Data on Page 5, Lines 37 to 41, Bearing Heaters:
Not
specified
very
often,
because
most
generators
in
extremely cold climatesare Installed in heated shelters. Specifywhereneeded to bring lube-oil in the bearing housing
sump up to the minimum temperature recommended by the
manufacturer. Specify the appropriate details for electric or
steam heaters.
F.7.4 WINDING TEMPERATURE DETECTORS
F.7.4.1 DataonPage 5 , Line 43, RTDType,No./Phase,
Resistance Material, Ohms: These detectors are installed in
intimatecontactwiththewindinginsulationandgivean
accurate measurement of the operating temperature ofthe
winding. They provide better protection for the generator
than
current-sensitive overload relays. Specify on critical generators regardless of size (should be monitored to prevent damage to a critical generator) and on all generators 1,500 kVA
and larger. Also recommendedfor all weather protected (WP
I and WP II) generators. Air filters, if installed, can become
clogged and cause high winding temperature. See F.7.9
of
this guide. Two detectors should be specified for each phase
of the generator winding. Either 100-ohm platinum or 120ohm nickel detectors should be specified, depending on the
monitoring system design.
F.7.4.2 DataonPage 5, Line 43, 3-Wire System,2-Wire
System: Always specify a 3-wire system to minimize temperature emors introduced by theRTD leads.
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
~
~
~
~
~~
~
104
54b-ENGL L777
API
STANDARD
F.7.4.4 Data on Page 5, Line 46, Stator Winding Tempera10°C plus
ture Alarm andShutdown:Forthealarm,add
40°C for ambient, to theRTD temperatures givenin the table
in F.3.9 of this guide. This alerts operators to problems before
they become serious. For shutdown, enter 155°C.
F.7.4.13 Data on Page 6, Lines 10 to 11, Set at -OC
for
Alarm, -"C
for Shutdown: Completeas appropriate. Normal alarm temperature is 80°C. If applicable, normal shutdown temperature is approximately 100°C.
F.7.5
F.7.4.10 DataonPage
6,Line7,Location:Indicatethe
location of the detectors. For example: Both radial bearings.
F.7.4.11 Data
on
Page
6,Line
8, Description:Might
include one detector per bearing for monitoring and alarm
purposes or two detectors per bearing
if a shutdown systemis
to be used.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
VIBRATION DETECTORS
6, Line14,NoncontactingProbes,
F.7.5.1 DataonPage
ProvisionsOnly,orInstalled:Specifyconsistentwiththe
equipment train. "lus is recommended for critical generators
rated 1,200 rpmand
withsleeveortilting-padbearings
higher. A once-per-revolution probe is included when probes
are specified. This provides a phasereference for filtered
vibration andspeed measurements. All generators rated 1,200
rpm and higher should have
at least provisions for probes
specified.
F.7.4.6 Data on Page 6, Line 3, Provisions Only, Manufacturer's Standard,API 6 7 0 Where future capability for installationofsensorsoruseofsensorsduringfactorytests
is
desired, specify provisions only. A manufacturer's standard
installation may not represent the true bearing metal temperature since generator manufacturers often monitor the bearing
shelltemperature, an inchormorefromtheshaft-bearing
interface. If bearing temperature monitoring
is specified, API
670 requirements are recommended since the temperaturesensing tip location
is defined at the most representative place
on the bearing.
F.7.4.9 DataonPage6,Line
6,Dial-TypeThermometer,
A l m Contacts: Only applied to nonpressure-fed bearings.
Specify where an indication of the oil temperatureis desired.
If alarm contacts are required for annunciation, indicate yes
of contacts under alarm contacts.
and the type and number
546
RTDs.
F.7.4.5 DataonPage 6, Lines 2 to12,Hydrodynamicor
Thrust Bearing Temperature Devices: These detectors should
be applied consistent with the entire equipment train. They
usually are applicable to large (1 ,O00 kVA and greater) and
special-purposeequipmenttrains. Theycanprovideearly
warning of lube-oil loss or impending bearing failure. API
670 outlines requirements that assure accurate bearing-metal
temperature measurement. When r&al temperature detectors
are used for shutdown systems, either resistance temperature
detectors (type 100-ohm platinum at 0°C or 120-ohm nickel
at 0°C)or thermocouples (type iron constantine, for example)
can be specified. Separate terminal heads usually are specified, and the external conduit is run to each head.
F.7.4.8 Data on Page 6, Line 5, Thermocouple: Type: Iron
constantine typecan be specified, for example, wherea thermocouple is desired.
m
F.7.4.12 DataonPage 6, Line 9,Terminal Head or Box:
Often, separate terminal heads are supplied and the external
conduit is run to each head. The detector terminations could
also be enclosed in the same terminal box as the winding
F.7.4.3 Data on Page 5, Line 44, Ground One Lead: This is
dependent onthepurchasersinstrumentationrequirements.
Typically, one leadis grounded at the generator.
F.7.4.7 Dataon Page 6, Line 4, RTD:Specify either 100ohm platinum or 120-ohm nickel where an RTD is desired.
Alwaysspecify a 3-wiresystemtominimizetemperature
errors introducedby the RTD leads.
0732270 05b7534 290
F.7.5.2 Data on Page 6, Line 17, Bearing Housing Seismic
Sensors: Specify consistent with the equipment train. Usually
applied on critical sleeve bearing generators rated less than
1,200 rpm which do not have noncontacting probes and on
generators with antifriction bearings
of all speed ratings.
F.7.5.3 DataonPage 6, Line 21, Vibration Switch: These
devices are not normally recommendedfor generators of the
size range covered by this specification, since they offer less
protection than API 670 or API 678 systems.
F.7.5.4 DataonPage 6, Line 23, Terminal Head or Box:
Whenever vibration detectors are specified,
a terminal box for
the machine-mounted converters or oscillator-demodulators
should be specified.
F.8 CONTROLS
F.8.1EXCITATIONSYSTEM
F.8.1.1 Data on Page 6, Line 34, Permanent Magnet Generator Excitation Source Required:This is recommended for
most applications. If it is not specified, the excitation source
is usually derived from the main power dismbution bus, making the generator more susceptible to power system disturbances and making generator blackstarts more difficult. The
permanent magnet generator makes the excitation system
for
the generator's main field self-sufficient.
F.8.1.2 Data
on
Page
6, Line26, IEEE Type
Excitation System: Most brushless excitation systems are Type 2rotating rectifier system. The types of excitation systems are
standardized by IEEE so they easily can be represented in a
stability computer program.The gains and time constants of
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
STD.API/PETRO STD
~
S T D - A P I / P E T R O S T D SlIb-ENGL L777
m
BRUSHLESSSYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-S00
the excitation system are to be presented in the IEEE format
for use by the purchaser in the stability simulations.
F.8.1.3 Data on Page 6, Line 27, Excitation System Voltage
of how well the excitation system
Response Ratio: A measure
responds to a system disturbance while previously operating
at rated load conditions. When the response ratio is high, it
generally implies a larger exciter with a high output voltage
capability.
0732290 0 5 b 7 5 3 5 L27
KVA AND LARGER
m
105
F.9 MISCELLANEOUS
F.9.1 Data onPage 7, Lines 44 to 46, Painting: The standard painting is normally accepted unless the generator is to
be installed in a severe environment, suchas offshore. If specialpaint is specified, include the surface preparationand
paint specifications are included with
the quotation request to
the manufacturer. Consideration shouldbe given to the painting system used on the
inside surfaces of a WP enclosure.
F.9.2 SHIPMENT
F.8.1.4 Data on Page 6, Line 29, Excitation System Voltage
Response Time: The time it takes for the exciter to change
F.9.2.1 DataonPage 8, Line 3, Domestic:Depending on
from rated output conditions to 95 percent of the difference
the protection inherently offeredby the enclosure, specifying
between the exciter ceiling
(top) voltage and the output of the
this includes the protection described in API 546 and coverexciter under ratedoutput conditions.Rated output conditions
age of the generatorby a tarpaulinor plastic.
are the nameplate kilowatt, voltage, and power factor of the
synchronous generator. This value should be under 0.5 secF.9.2.2 Data on Page 8, L h e 3, Export: Normally includes
complete, sealed coverage with desiccant. The manufacturer
ond for mostbrushlessexcitationsystems.Ingeneral,the
describes the preparation included when the proposal is prefaster this time is, the better power system performance dursented.
ing disturbances. A more dominant factor determining the
severity of the system disturbance is the value of the transient
F.92.3 Data on Line 8, Page 3, Export Boxing Required A
reactance.
substantial box is built around thegenerator in addition to the
sealing
and desiccantdescribed above.
F.8.1.5 DataonPage 6, Line 35, High Initial Response
Excitation SystemRequired This is recommended for generators in critical service or those that are called upon to start
of the genermotors with horsepower ratings over 15 percent
ator kVA rating. Generally improves the dynamic stability of
a generator.
F.9.2.4 Data on Page 8, Line 3, Outdoor Storage for More
Than Six Months: Indicate if this is to be the case. Special
storageprovisionsmay be recommended by thegenerator
supplier.
F.9.2.5 Data on Page 8,Line 4, Special Shipping Bearings:
These are specifiedto prevent damage to the normal running
F.8.1.6 Data on Page 6, Line 42, Power System Stabilizer
bearings due to abnormal handling during shipment, such as
Required (Applied to the Synchronous Machine Regulator):
impact,droppingandrailyardhumping.Normalhandling
Generally required for generators rated over 10,ooO kWin
so it can
during shipment does not usually affect the bearings,
parallel with the electric utility Check with the local utility
beconsideredaninsurancepolicy
for generators inwhich
company for generation interconnection requirements, which
timely start-up is necessary. Shipping bearings alone, howwill include anypowersystemstabilizerspecifications.A
ever, do not prevent damage to other parts from this type of
power system stabilizer introduces positive damping into the
include g (acceleration)
excitation systemto minimize generator power swings during abuse.Criticalshipmentshould
recorders to monitor handling.
an external system disturbance, such as a short circuit. If a
powersystem stabilizer isspecified,theproposalshould
F.9.2.6 DataonPage 8, Line 4,Piping Assembled: Speciinclude enough information so you can confirm its adequacy
fied where coolersor lube-oil pipingare to be supplied by the
with the electric utility. It should include technical descriptive
generator supplier.
information and details of its transfer function, including filter parameters,gains, and time constants.
F.9.2.7 Data on Page 8, Line 5, Special Winterizing
Requirements: Specified where winter conditions exist prior
F.8.1.7 Data on Page 6 and 7, Lines 31 to 45 and Lines 2to
tostart-up. This isspecified so the generator suppliercan
42, GeneratorVendortoFurnish:CompletelyAssembled
identify protective items.
Panel
with
Devices
as Checked,
Separate
Devices
as
Checked, No Control Devices: In most cases, specify separate F.9.2.8 Data on Page 8, Line 5, Mounted on Skid: This is
recommended to protect the feet of the
generator frame from
control devices as checked. These devices are then mounted
damage.
in spaceprovidedinaseparatelypurchasedswitchgear.
A
recommended listfor dus type of application follows:
F.9.3 Data on Page 8, Line 12, Max Sound Pressure Level:
The normal specified valueis 85 dBA at a distance of 3 feet.
Most of theother items of this section would be supplied
as
This is consistent withOSHA rules so that hearing protection
part of the switchgear package (e.g., relays,
meters, switches,
is not required while the generator is in operation. Remote,
etc.).
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
F.9.4 Data on Page 8, Line 13, Quantity of Special Tools
Required: Normally, one set is adequate.
F.11 ANALYSIS, SHOP INSPECTION, AND
TESTS
F.ll.l Data on Page 9, Line 4, Design Audit: The design
audit is a comprehensive review meeting where the detailed
electrical and mechanical designs are discussed and
any elecis recomtricaVmechanica1analysesarepresented.This
mended for critical generator/driven-equipment trains,
generators rated at1,200 rpm and above, and for new manufacturer designs (prototypes). This isnot the order-coordination meeting.
F.9.5 DataonPage 8, Line 14, SpecialLow-Temperature
MaterialsRequirements:Thissectionapplies
to operating
temperatures lessthan -29°C (-20OF). If certain materials to
be used in the generator are not covered by the ASME Code,
the requirementsare listed here.
F.11.2 Data onPage 9, Line5,TorsionalCriticalSpeed
Analysis: This normallyis performed by the driver manufacturer, but should also be verified by the generator manufacturer or a third party. The analysis is usually performed only
on drive trains with speed-increasing gearboxesto the driven
equipment.
F.9.6 Data on Page 8, Line 16, List of Materials to be Identified W~thApplicable ANSI, ASTM, ASME, or IEC Numbers: If certain parts identified by standard designations are
required,listthemhere.
This may includeflanges,minor
hardware, shaft material, bearing babbitt alloy, etc.
F.11.3 Data on Page 9, Line 6, Lateral Critical SpeedAnalysis: Specify for all generators rated at speeds of 1,500 rpm
and higher. This analysisis usually performedby the generator manufacturer and gives the system critical speedsof the
A critrotor, bearing, bearing support, and foundation system.
ical speed usually is excitedby rotor unbalancesor misalignment. It is important to predict where the critical speeds are
and how the rotor reacts to excitations that can result
in lateral
shaft vibration.
F.9.7 DataonPage 8, Line18,SpecialIdentificationfor
Transmittals: If special identification is required for correspondence or on drawings and data sheets, enter the details
here.
F.9.8 Data on Page 8, Line 19, Nameplate Material: Normally, specify stainless steel.
F.11.4 Data on Page 9, Line 7, Shop Inspection:If a quality
assurancesurveillanceprogram is to be imposed,indicate
this. Not recommendedif preferred suppliers with continuous
quality improvement track-recordsare used.
F.9.9 DataonPage8,Line
20, Separate Nameplate With
Purchaser’s Information:If a special nameplate is needed for
identifying the generator equipment number or other information, detail the requirements here.
F.11.5 Data on Page 9, Line 8, Review of Quality Control
Program: Normally not specified unless the generator manufacturing plant has undergone change or if recent problems
have been experienced.
F.9.10 Data on Page 8, Line 23, Detailed Data Required on
the Generator, Excitation System, Prime Mover, and GovernorinOrdertoPerform
an ElectricalTransientStability
Study: This is recommended for all generators for which a
stability study is to be applied. A detailed data request must
be made after a purchase order is placed for the generator.
Specifying this item alerts the supplier that the data is to be
required.
F.11.6 Data on Page 9, Line 9, Inspection for Cleanliness
Per API614: Requires the lube-oil system cleanliness specifications of API 614. Indicate when the special-purpose M I
614 lube-oil systemis specified for the drive train.
This is also
applied when a generator with a forced-lubrication system
has a thorough inspectionproaoram. This is recommended for
forced-lubricatedbearingswhere
a thoroughflushofthe
is not tobe made at the installation
equipment lube-oil piping
site.
F.10 STATOR AND ROTOR WINDING
REPAIR DATA
F.11.7 Data on Page 9, Line 10, Observance of Assembly/
Dismantling: Specify, if the company wishes to reserve the
right to observe the testing, dismantling, inspection, and reassembly of equipment. Normally, this should be specified and
most generator suppliers do not impose a charge for a purchaser to retain this right.
F.10.1 Data on Page 8, Lines 27 to 46 This section of the
data sheet includes information determined during
the generator design.This section includesa variety of information for
the purchaser to record spare parts information andto record
data on the designfor future maintenance or repair.
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
F.11.8 Data on Page 9, Line 12, Stator Core Test:A quality
test for core-plate insulation integrity or damage. Some sup-
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
unattended equipment maynot require levels as low as 85
dBA.Certainrareinstallationsnearnoisesensitiveareas,
such as residential dwellings, may require reduced noise levels of 80 &A or 75 dBA. Consider the alternativeof acceptingmanufacturer-standardnoiselevelsandenclosingthe
entire drive train in a sound enclosure. Consult a local safety
engineer for more guidance.
STD-API/PETRO STD 54b-ENGL 1777 m 0732290 0 5 b 7 5 3 7 TTT
BRUSHLESS
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES-500 KVA AND LARGER
m
107
pliers do this test during manufacturing, but should only be
specified by the user for unspared or applications where the
generator will be inaccessiblefor easy repairor replacement.
tion system. This inspection should be specified for critical,
unsparedgeneratorsorforgeneratorswithvoltageratings
6,600 volts and above. Frequently omitted when
we are dealing with manufacturers with which the Purchaser has confiF.11.9 DataonPage 9, Line13,SurgeComparisonTest:
dence.Whenspecifieditshouldbewitnessed.Thecost
This is recommended for all generators. The risk of not doing
impact is usually minimal.
the test is that marginal turn-to-turn insulation
in the winding
of the normally
may not fail during running tests, because
F.11.18 Data onPage 9, Line 22, SealedWindingConlow turn-to-turn voltages, but mayfail in operation when subformance: This test should
be specified when verification of a
jected to mildpowersystemsurges.Thistestexposes
the
sealed winding is desired This test should asbea witness, and
individual coil’s insulation system to higher voltage than nor- may be applied to critical, special-purpose generators. Some
mal to prove integrity of the insulation.
manufacturersdothistest
as astandard, so therequired
option
should
be
considered.
Thecost of this test is basedon
F.11.10 DataonPage 9, Line14,SpecialSurgeTest
of
the
vendor’s
perceived
risk
of
failing the test.
Coils: Not normally specified. Exposes individual coils
test to
a series of severesurge tests to prove the insulation capability.
Consider for a critical generator.
F.11.19 Data onPage 9, Line 23, PowerFactorTip-up
Test: Recommended forstator voltages 6,600 volts and above
for the completed stator. Provides a base
line for later maintenance tests to detect corona discharge within the insulation
system. Mayalso be specified on sacrificialcoils for develop
ment testing, but acceptancecriteria needs to be agreed upon
between the user and supplier. The power factor tip up test
is
usually conducted at10 percent and110 percent or 20 percent
and 120 percent of rated line-to-ground power voltage. The
test results are plotted for each generator and percent deviation is calculated.
F.11.11 Data on Page 9, Line 15, Balance in Minimum of
Three Planes: Specify for all generators rated 3,000 rpm and
above. Most generators rated up to 1,800 rpm are flexible
not
shaft machines (operating above their first system resonance
or critical speed) and do not require balancing in more than
two planes.
F.11.12 Data on Page 9, Line 16, Final Balance: Not normally specified, but could be done in conjunction other tests
specified for balance of higher-speed generators.
F.11.20 Data on Page 9, Line 24, Manufacturer’s Standard
F.11.13 Data on Page 9, Line 17, Balance Device (Sensitivity) Test: Specify for all special-purposerotors. A simple
test for determiningthatthesensitivity
ofthe balancing
device is adequate.
F.11.14 Data on Page 9, Line 18, Residual Unbalance Verification Test (AppendixC):A comprehensive test conducted
to determine the actual amount
of unbalance remaining in the
rotor after balancing. The testis recommended for generators
rated 1,500 rpm and above.
Shop and Routine Test: This is recommended for all generators. Includes measurementof no-load current, calculation of
locked-rotorcurrent,high-potentialtests,insulationresistancetests,measurementofwindingresistance,vibration
measurement, bearing insulation test, measurement of bearand oil supply.
ing temperature and inspection of the bearings
F.11.21 Data onPage 9, Line 25, InsulationTestsUsing
Preferred Table 6 Values: Recommended.
Data on Page 9, Line 19, Balance with Half-Coupling: This is recommended for generators rated 1,500 rpm
and above, where coupling errors or unbalance can have a
significantaffectonthegeneratoranddrivenequipment
vibration.Requirescoordinationwiththecouplingand
driven-equipment supplier.
F.11.22 Data onPage 9, Line 26, Bearing Dimensional &
Alignment Checks and Before Tests (Per
4.3.2.1,Item i): This
is recommended for all generators. Records are made of all
bearing fits and clearances. In addition, a bearing disassembly
and inspection is required at the completion at the running
tests.
F.11.16 Data on Page 9, Line 20, Running Tests withHalfCoupling: This is recommended for all two-pole generators
and for those four-poles operating above the first rotor-system
resonance.
F.11.23 Data on Page 9, Line 27, Vibration Recording: For
those generators undergoing comprehensive tests, for example: hotkold vibration and unbalanced response; a frequencymodulatedmagnetictape recording, or anequivalent data
acquisition system, is recommended. Normally specified for
generators rated 1,500 rpm and greater.
F.11.17 Data on Page 9, Line 2 I , Stator Inspection Prior to
Vacuum-Pressure Impregnation: This is a physical inspection
of the iron core of the generator and the winding insulation
taping or wrapping. The inspection is conducted before the
winding is put through vacuum pressure impregnation (VPI),
which is a procedure to seal and solidify the winding insula-
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
F.11.24 Data onPage 9, Lines28 to 34, CompleteTest:
This includes an expensive series of tests(uptoapproximatelytenpercentofthegenerator’s
cost) that should be
specified for at least one of each generator rating ordered at
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
F.11.15
108
54b-ENGL
1777
0732270 05b7538 73b
API STANQARQ
546
the Same time. It should also be specified when the evaluation verifythelocationofitsresonantspeedaboveoperating
speed.Oftenisdependent
on manufacturingprocess, so
factorjustifies the test cost to prove the efficiency.
should be done on every generator unless user’s experience
F.1125 Data on Page 9, Line 29, Efficiency Test: Specify
would dictate relaxation of this test, perhaps to one of each
jusfor at least oneof each rating where the evaluation factor
size purchased at the same time.
tifies the expense. Ruleof thumb: when the evaluation factor
F.11.35 Data on Page 9, Line 40, Bearing Housing Natural
exceeds $l,OOO/kW. When it is specified, it is recommended
FrequencyTest:Normallyspecifiedforthefirstgenerator
that it be witnessed.
manufactured of a certain frame size, or a uniquely designed
F.11.26 Data on Page 9, Line 30,OpedShort-Circuit Satugenerator. The risk of not requiring the test is low due to the
ration: Specify whenan efficiency test is selected.
low bearing housing vibration limits required
by API 546,
and
if
the
generator
passes
the
vibration
tests,
the
generator
F.11.27 Data on Page 9, Line 3 1, Heat Run:A test to deterprobably
does
not
have
a
significant
resonance.
mine the temperaturerise of the generator windings.
F.1128 Data on Page 9, Line 32, Exciter Heat Run: A test
to determine the temperature rise
of the exciter windings.
F.1129 Data on Page9,Line33,No-Load
V Curve:
Sometimes difficult for a manufacturer for large machines
that may either generate or absorb significant reactive
power.
F.11.30 Data on Page 9, Line 34, Noise Test: Only specify
if the generator is to be installed in a noise-sensitive area. In
many cases, certified data canbe accepted froma generator of
duplicate design.
F.11.31 DataonPage
9, Line35,BearingDimensional
ChecksafterTests(per4.3.3.1.2):Additionallyrequires
a
dimensional check and examination for
any metal transfer at
the completionof tests. It is recommended for all generators.
F.11.32 Data on Page 9, Line 36, DC High-Potential Test:
The generator will already have had
a final AC high-potential
test for a one minute duration to prove the insulation of the
generator.Subsequenthigh-potentialtests
in thefieldwill
most likely be DC tests. If a base-line DC test is desired to
compare with tests in the field, specify here.This test is performed at approximately 75 percent of the equivalent final
AC high-potential test, so it does relatively little damage to
the insulation atthis stress level.
F.11.36 Data on Page 9, Line 41, Optional Material Tests
to be Proposed by Vendor: Only specify for special-purpose
generators. This selection requires that the generator supplier
propose tests to prove the materials are satisfactory for the
specified service.
F.11.37 Data on Page 9, Line 42, Certification of Materials: Specify for special-purpose generators. If it is specified,
the test reports on shafts, forgings, and major castings which
are obtained by the generator supplier. Cost impact should
be
minimal,sincemostsuppliersobtain
this information on
major material.
F.1138 Data on Page 10, Line 4,Final Assembly Running
Clearances: Recommend that this be specified for specialpurpose generators.
F.11.39 DataonPage10,Line
5 , PaintingDeferred(on
Parts): The purchaser must list the specific part, such
as a
casting, welded shaft, or rotor assembly. Not usually specified.
F.11.40 Data on Page 10, Lines 6 to 11, Surface and Subsurface Inspection of Parts: Only specified for special-purpose generators. A list must be attached that specifies the
parts to be examined andthe type of examinations to be done.
The followingare typical:
F.11.33 Data on Page 9, Line 37, Rated Rotor Temperature
Mbration Test When Complete Test Not Specified: Theis test a. Welded shafts-liquid penetrant, magnetic particle, hardness.
recommended for all two-pole and four-pole generators and
b.
Forged shafts-ultrasonic inspection.
critical, special purpose generators of slower-speed ratings
c. Welded fans-liquid penetrant and magnetic/particle.
because of the susceptibilityof some rotorsto changing balance condition with temperature. During this test, the genera- d. Cast fans-radiography.
tor is heated to itsratedoperatingtemperature,andthe
e. Bearing babbitt-ultrasonic.
vibrationperformance
is monitoredandcomparedwith
Note: Unless an acceptance standard for the forging ultrasonic or the hardacceptable limits. Some exceptionscan be made for generalness test is established the generator supplieris free to establish the standard.
purposegeneratorsinnoncriticalapplications.
This test is
F.11.41 Data onPage 10, Line 12, Certified Data Prior to
usually witnessed.
Shipment: Not normally specified, but it gives the generator
F.1134 DataonPage
9, Line39,UnbalanceResponse
supplier incentive to deliver the reports promptly.
Test: Recommended for all two-pole generators andall fourF.11.42 Data on Page 10, Line 13, Other: If any other tests
pole generators5,000 HP and larger toverify the generator’s
apply, attacha list.
performance operating throughits first resonant speed, or to
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
STD-API/PETRO STD
-
STD.API/PETRO STD Sqb-ENGL 2 9 9 7 m 0732290 0 5 b 7 5 3 9 8 7 2 m
--`,,,`,``,```,,,,,```,`,,,```,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Additional copies available from API Publications and Distribution:
(202) 682-8375
Information about API Publications, Programs and Services
is
available on the World Wide Web at: http://www.api.org
American
Petroleum
Institute
Copyright American Petroleum Institute
Provided by IHS under license with API
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
1220 L Street, Northwest
Washington, D.C.20005-4070
202-682-8000
Licensee=ExxonMobil/1890500101
Not for Resale, 08/01/2008 03:59:01 MDT
Order No. C54602